WO2022030305A1 - Film for reinforcement, optical member and electronic member - Google Patents
Film for reinforcement, optical member and electronic member Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2022030305A1 WO2022030305A1 PCT/JP2021/027752 JP2021027752W WO2022030305A1 WO 2022030305 A1 WO2022030305 A1 WO 2022030305A1 JP 2021027752 W JP2021027752 W JP 2021027752W WO 2022030305 A1 WO2022030305 A1 WO 2022030305A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- polymer
- weight
- monomer
- less
- meth
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09J—ADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
- C09J7/00—Adhesives in the form of films or foils
- C09J7/30—Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
- C09J7/38—Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
- C09J7/381—Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA] based on macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
- C09J7/385—Acrylic polymers
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B27/00—Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B27/00—Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
- B32B27/30—Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin comprising vinyl (co)polymers; comprising acrylic (co)polymers
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B7/00—Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
- B32B7/04—Interconnection of layers
- B32B7/12—Interconnection of layers using interposed adhesives or interposed materials with bonding properties
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08L—COMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
- C08L43/00—Compositions of homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing boron, silicon, phosphorus, selenium, tellurium or a metal; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
- C08L43/04—Homopolymers or copolymers of monomers containing silicon
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09J—ADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
- C09J133/00—Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09J—ADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
- C09J143/00—Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing boron, silicon, phosphorus, selenium, tellurium, or a metal; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
- C09J143/04—Homopolymers or copolymers of monomers containing silicon
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09J—ADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
- C09J151/00—Adhesives based on graft polymers in which the grafted component is obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
- C09J151/06—Adhesives based on graft polymers in which the grafted component is obtained by reactions only involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers grafted on to homopolymers or copolymers of aliphatic hydrocarbons containing only one carbon-to-carbon double bond
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09J—ADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
- C09J175/00—Adhesives based on polyureas or polyurethanes; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
- C09J175/04—Polyurethanes
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09J—ADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
- C09J201/00—Adhesives based on unspecified macromolecular compounds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09J—ADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
- C09J7/00—Adhesives in the form of films or foils
- C09J7/30—Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
- C09J7/38—Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2270/00—Resin or rubber layer containing a blend of at least two different polymers
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2457/00—Electrical equipment
- B32B2457/20—Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a reinforcing film, and an optical member and an electronic member to which the reinforcing film is attached.
- the adhesive is in the form of an adhesive sheet, and is used for mobile electronic devices such as mobile phones, smartphones, tablet personal computers, and other electronic devices for the purpose of adhering adherends to each other and fixing articles to the adherend. Widely used in various applications.
- an adhesive sheet is used as a reinforcing material (reinforcing film) that imparts rigidity and impact resistance to optical members, electronic members, and the like constituting the above equipment.
- Patent Documents 1 and 2 are examples of documents disclosing this type of prior art.
- Patent Documents 3 to 6 Development of an adhesive sheet that can be used for fixing or the like is in progress.
- Patent Documents On the other hand, looking at the performance of adhesives, recently, an adhesive sheet has been proposed which exhibits low adhesive strength at the initial stage of attachment to an adherend and then can greatly increase the adhesive strength (Patent Documents). 7). According to the adhesive sheet having such characteristics, before the increase in the adhesive force, the adhesive sheet exhibits re-sticking property (reworkability) useful for suppressing a decrease in yield due to an error or failure to attach the adhesive sheet, and also has an adhesive force. After rising, it is possible to exhibit strong adhesiveness suitable for the original purpose of use of the adhesive sheet.
- the reinforcing film can also be used for the above flexible device.
- an adhesive sheet is attached as a reinforcing film to reinforce the device to prevent problems caused by deformation of the device. It is desirable to improve the handleability.
- the flexible device can be repeatedly bent or bent, the reinforcing film used for the flexible device has a property of recovering a normal shape (bending recovery property) even when repeatedly bent, and is peeled off. It is required to have characteristics (bending holding force) that do not cause problems such as. Since the reinforcing film having such bending recovery and bending holding force can be used for various applications including flexible devices, the range of application is not limited and it is useful.
- a pressure-sensitive adhesive as proposed in Patent Document 7 which exhibits low adhesive strength at the initial stage of application and is configured to have a large increase in adhesive strength thereafter, is also used as a reinforcing film. It is desirable to have bending recovery and bending holding power.
- a method for improving the bending holding force for example, a method of appropriately setting the storage elastic modulus of the pressure-sensitive adhesive can be considered.
- changing the storage elastic modulus affects both the initial low adhesive strength and the post-increased adhesive strength.
- the bending recovery in addition to the bending holding force, it is not easy to satisfy all of these characteristics. It would be practically beneficial to be able to improve the bending recovery and bending holding power of a pressure-sensitive adhesive that exhibits low adhesive strength at the initial stage of application and then greatly increases the adhesive strength.
- the present invention was created in view of the above circumstances, and exhibits light peelability at the initial stage of attachment to the adherend, and then can greatly increase the adhesive strength and recover from bending. It is an object of the present invention to provide a reinforcing film having properties and bending holding force. Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical member and an electronic member to which the reinforcing film is attached.
- a reinforcing film provided with an adhesive layer contains a polymer (A) and a polymer (B).
- the polymer (B) contains a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton and a (meth) acrylic monomer unit.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus of 1 to 20 kPa at 23 ° C.
- the glass transition temperature TB of the polymer ( B ) is ⁇ 20 ° C. to 5 ° C.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) containing a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton, it has a light peelability at the initial stage of being attached to the adherend. After that, it is possible to greatly increase the adhesive strength. Further, when the glass transition temperature (Tg) TB of the polymer ( B ) is ⁇ 20 ° C. or higher, the light peelability at the initial stage of application tends to be excellent, and when the TB is 5 ° C. or lower, the adhesiveness tends to be excellent. It tends to have excellent force-increasing properties. Further, the reinforcing film has bending recovery property and bending holding force.
- the reinforcing film having a surface elastic modulus (23 ° C. surface elastic modulus) at 23 ° C. of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 1 kPa or more, and has good bending recovery while exhibiting the above-mentioned adhesive properties. Further, since the adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. of 20 kPa or less, it has a good bending holding force while exhibiting the above-mentioned adhesive characteristics, so that even when it is used in a mode of repeated bending, it can be used. Problems such as peeling are unlikely to occur.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a bulk modulus G'23 at 23 ° C. of 10. It is ⁇ 200 kPa. According to the pressure-sensitive adhesive having a bulk elastic modulus G'23 in this range, the adhesive strength at the initial stage of application tends to be in a suitable range excellent in light peelability. In addition, it is excellent in workability, and generally tends to have both strain relaxation property and bending recovery property in a normal temperature range.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a bulk modulus G'80 at 80 ° C. of 5-100 kPa.
- a pressure-sensitive adhesive having a bulk elastic modulus G'80 in this range generally tends to have both bending recovery and bending holding force. For example, even when it is used under a high temperature condition of about 80 ° C., it may have elasticity suitable for bending recovery and have an adhesive holding force for realizing bending holding force.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a tan ⁇ 80 of 0.10 to 0.60 at 80 ° C.
- a pressure-sensitive adhesive having a tan ⁇ 80 (loss elastic modulus G at 80 ° C. G ′′ 80 / storage elastic modulus G '80 at 80 ° C.) of 0.10 or more tends to exhibit an adhesive force suitable for bending retention.
- the tan ⁇ 80 is 0.60 or less, the plastic deformation of the adhesive is suppressed and good bending recovery is easily obtained. Further, even when the reinforcing film is held in the bent state for a long time, It is easy to exert a holding force (bending holding force) that does not cause peeling from the adherend.
- the polymer (A) is preferably an acrylic polymer. According to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing the polymer (A) which is an acrylic polymer and the polymer (B) containing a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton, the effects of the techniques disclosed herein are preferably realized.
- the content of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.5 to 5 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A).
- the amount of the polymer (B) By setting the amount of the polymer (B) to 0.5 parts by weight or more with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), it is easy to obtain light peelability at the initial stage of application.
- the amount of the polymer (B) By setting the amount of the polymer (B) to 5 parts by weight or less, it is easy to realize the desired increase in adhesive strength. Further, by setting the amount of the polymer (B) used in the above range, it is easy to realize good bending recovery and bending holding force.
- the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) of the isocyanate group to the hydroxyl group contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.002 to 0.03.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) of 0.002 or more tends to be excellent in bending recovery property and processability. Further, by setting the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) to 0.03 or less, it tends to be easy to realize a suitable increase in adhesive strength.
- the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group may exist in a state where at least a part thereof is chemically bonded (crosslinked).
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains, for example, a cross-linking agent, and in such a configuration, the isocyanate group may be, for example, a part of the cross-linking agent, and the hydroxyl group may be, for example, a part of the polymer (A).
- the reinforcing film disclosed here is suitable as a reinforcing film that imparts rigidity and impact resistance to the optical member, for example, during processing or transportation of an optical member such as a polarizing plate or a wave plate. Accordingly, according to the present specification, there is provided an optical member to which any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein is attached.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein is also suitable as a reinforcing film for an electronic member of a device such as a portable electronic device. Therefore, according to the present specification, there is provided an electronic member to which any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein is attached.
- the "acrylic polymer” refers to a polymer containing a monomer unit derived from a (meth) acrylic monomer in a polymer structure, and is typically a monomer derived from a (meth) acrylic monomer. A polymer containing a unit of more than 50% by weight.
- the (meth) acrylic monomer means a monomer having at least one (meth) acryloyl group in one molecule.
- the "(meth) acryloyl group” has the meaning of comprehensively referring to an acryloyl group and a methacryloyl group.
- the concept of the (meth) acrylic monomer may include both a monomer having an acryloyl group (acrylic monomer) and a monomer having a methacryloyl group (methacrylic monomer).
- (meth) acrylic acid means acrylic acid and methacrylic acid
- (meth) acrylate means acrylate and methacrylate, respectively.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein has the form of an adhesive sheet having an adhesive surface formed by an adhesive.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet used as a reinforcing film is configured to include a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein may be in the form of a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is laminated on one side or both sides of a support base material, and is a base material-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having no support base material. It may be in the form of.
- a "reinforcing film” means an adhesive sheet (adhesive film for reinforcement) used for reinforcing an adherend as described later.
- the reinforcing film is, for example, in the form of a base material-less adhesive sheet, in which a support material or the like is attached to one adhesive surface and then the other adhesive surface is attached to an adherend to be reinforced to reinforce the film. Therefore, it is not limited to the form of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material. In this respect, it is understood as a concept in a broader sense than the "reinforcing film" described later, which has the form of an adhesive sheet with a base material.
- FIG. 1 schematically shows the structure of the reinforcing film according to one embodiment.
- the reinforcing film 1 is a single-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material including a sheet-shaped support base material 10 having a first surface 10A and a second surface 10B, and an adhesive layer 21 provided on the first surface 10A side thereof. It is configured as.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21 is fixed to the first surface 10A side of the support base material 10.
- the reinforcing film 1 is used by attaching the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21 to the adherend. As shown in FIG.
- the reinforcing film 1 before use (that is, before being attached to the adherend) has the surface (adhesive surface) 21A of the adhesive layer 21 peeled off at least on the side facing the adhesive layer 21. It may be a component of the reinforcing film 100 with a peeling liner in a form of being in contact with the peeling liner 31 which is a property surface (peeling surface).
- a peeling liner 31 for example, a sheet-like base material (liner base material) having a peeling layer provided on one side thereof so that one side becomes a peeling surface can be preferably used.
- the release liner 31 is omitted, the support base material 10 having the second surface 10B as the release surface is used, and the adhesive surface 21A is wound around the reinforcing film 1 so that the adhesive surface 21A is the second surface 10B of the support base material 10. It may be in contact with the (roll form).
- the release liner 31 or the second surface 10B of the support base material 10 is peeled off from the adhesive surface 21A, and the exposed adhesive surface 21A is pressure-bonded to the adherend.
- FIG. 2 schematically shows the structure of the reinforcing film according to the other embodiment.
- the reinforcing film 2 is provided on the sheet-shaped support base material 10 having the first surface 10A and the second surface 10B, the adhesive layer 21 provided on the first surface 10A side thereof, and the second surface 10B side. It is configured as a double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material comprising the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 22.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) 21 is fixed to the first surface 10A of the support base material 10
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) 22 is fixed to the second surface 10B of the support base material 10. There is.
- the reinforcing film 2 is used by attaching the pressure-sensitive adhesive layers 21 and 22 to different parts of the adherend.
- the locations where the pressure-sensitive adhesive layers 21 and 22 are attached may be the respective locations of different members, or may be different locations within a single member.
- the surface (first adhesive surface) 21A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21 and the surface (second adhesive surface) 22A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 22 are at least the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21.
- 22 may be a component of the reinforcing film 200 with a release liner in a form of being in contact with the release lines 31 and 32 whose sides facing the release lines are the release surfaces, respectively.
- release liners 31 and 32 for example, those configured by providing a release layer with a release treatment agent on one side of a sheet-shaped base material (liner base material) so that one side becomes a release surface are preferably used. obtain.
- the release liner 32 is omitted, a release liner 31 having both sides as release surfaces is used, and the release liner 31 is overlapped with the reinforcing film 2 and wound in a spiral shape so that the second adhesive surface 22A becomes a release liner.
- a reinforcing film with a release liner in a form (roll form) in contact with the back surface of 31 may be configured.
- the structure of the reinforcing film according to still another embodiment is schematically shown in FIG.
- the reinforcing film 3 is configured as a base-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet composed of a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21.
- the reinforcing film 3 has a first adhesive surface 21A composed of one surface (first surface) of the adhesive layer 21 and a second adhesive surface composed of the other surface (second surface) of the adhesive layer 21. It is used by attaching the surface 21B to different parts of the adherend.
- the reinforcing film 3 before use has a release liner 31, in which the first adhesive surface 21A and the second adhesive surface) 21B have peeling surfaces at least on the sides facing the adhesive layer 21.
- the release liner 32 is omitted, a release liner 31 having both sides as release surfaces is used, and the release liner 31 is overlapped with the reinforcing film 3 and wound in a spiral shape so that the second adhesive surface 21B becomes a release liner.
- a reinforcing film with a release liner in a form (roll form) in contact with the back surface of 31 may be configured.
- the reinforcing film may be in a roll form, a single-wafer form, or may be cut or punched into an appropriate shape according to the intended use and usage mode.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the technique disclosed herein is typically formed continuously, but is not limited to this, even if it is formed in a regular or random pattern such as a dot shape or a striped shape. good.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein comprises a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer comprising the polymer (A) and the polymer (B).
- a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be formed from a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the polymer (A), which is a complete polymer or a partial polymer of the monomer raw material A, and the polymer (B).
- the form of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is not particularly limited, and may be various forms such as a solvent type, a water-dispersed type, a hot melt type, and an active energy ray-curable type (for example, a photocurable type).
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is characterized by having a surface elastic modulus (23 ° C. surface elastic modulus) of its surface (adhesive surface) at 23 ° C. in the range of 1 to 20 kPa.
- a surface elastic modulus 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus
- the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus is 1 kPa or more, it is possible to have good bending recovery while realizing the adhesive property based on the content of the polymer (A) and the polymer (B).
- the surface elastic modulus is 20 kPa or less, it is possible to exhibit a good bending holding force while realizing the above-mentioned adhesive characteristics.
- the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus is preferably 2 kPa or more, more preferably 3 kPa or more, further preferably 4 kPa or more (for example, 5 kPa or more), and may be 8 kPa or more, and may be 10 kPa or more. However, it may be 12 kPa or more (for example, 14 kPa or more).
- surface elastic modulus is preferably 15 kPa or less, preferably 12 kPa or less, and more preferably 9 kPa. Hereinafter, it is more preferably 7 kPa or less (for example, 6 kPa or less), and may be 4 kPa or less.
- the 23 ° C surface elasticity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is determined by the type and characteristics (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.) of the polymer (A), and the type (chemical structure, etc.) and characteristics (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, etc.) of the polymer (B). Etc.), the amount used, the type of cross-linking agent, the amount used, etc. can be adjusted.
- the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is measured by the method described in Examples described later.
- the bulk elastic modulus G'23 ( 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 23 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus and is limited to a specific range. It is not something that will be done. In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 10 kPa or more. By setting the bulk elastic modulus G'23 to a predetermined value or more, the adhesive force at the initial stage of application tends to be in a suitable range excellent in light peelability.
- the bulk elastic modulus G'23 is preferably 15 kPa or more, more preferably 20 kPa or more, still more preferably 25 kPa or more, and particularly preferably 30 kPa or more. In some other embodiments, the bulk modulus G'23 may be 50 kPa or higher, 80 kPa or higher, or 100 kPa or higher.
- the 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 200 kPa or less.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive having a bulk elastic modulus G'23 of less than or equal to a predetermined value generally tends to have excellent strain-relieving properties in the normal temperature range, and tends to exhibit an increase in adhesive strength.
- the bulk elastic modulus G'23 is preferably 150 kPa or less, more preferably 90 kPa or less. In some preferred embodiments, the bulk modulus G'23 may be 60 kPa or less, or 40 kPa or less (eg, 35 kPa or less).
- the bulk elastic modulus G'80 ( 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 80 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus and is limited to a specific range. It is not something that will be done.
- the 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably 5 kPa or higher.
- the bulk modulus G'80 may be 7 kPa or higher, 9 kPa or higher, or 10 kPa or higher. In some other embodiments, the bulk modulus G'80 may be 15 kPa or higher, 30 kPa or higher, or 50 kPa or higher.
- the 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 100 kPa or less.
- the bulk elastic modulus G'80 is preferably 90 kPa or less, more preferably 60 kPa or less.
- the bulk modulus G'80 may be 20 kPa or less, 16 kPa or less, or 14 kPa or less (eg, 12 kPa or less).
- the tan ⁇ 80 (80 ° C. tan ⁇ 80 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 80 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus, and is not limited to a specific range. In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the 80 ° C. tan ⁇ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.10 or higher. The higher the tan ⁇ 80 , the easier it is for the pressure-sensitive adhesive to exhibit an adhesive force suitable for bending and holding.
- the tan ⁇ 80 is preferably 0.20 or more. In some preferred embodiments, the tan ⁇ 80 may be 0.30 or higher, 0.40 or higher, or 0.45 or higher.
- the 80 ° C. tan ⁇ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably 0.60 or less.
- the plastic deformation of the pressure-sensitive adhesive is suppressed, and good bending recovery is easily obtained. Further, even when the reinforcing film is held in a bent state for a long time, it is easy to exert a holding force that does not cause peeling from the adherend. Further, the increase in adhesive strength tends to be in a suitable range.
- the 80 ° C. tan ⁇ 80 may be 0.55 or less. In some other embodiments, the 80 ° C. tan ⁇ 80 may be 0.50 or less, or 0.35 or less.
- the 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23, 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 and 80 ° C. tan ⁇ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer are the types and characteristics of the polymer (A) (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.) and the polymer (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.). It can be adjusted according to the type (chemical structure, etc.) and characteristics (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, etc.) of B), the amount used, the type of the cross-linking agent, the amount used, and the like.
- the 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23, the 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 and the 80 ° C. tan ⁇ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer are measured by the methods described in Examples described later.
- Polymer (A) examples include acrylic polymers, rubber polymers, polyester polymers, urethane polymers, polyether polymers, silicone polymers, polyamide polymers, and fluoropolymers known in the field of pressure-sensitive adhesives at room temperature. One or more of various polymers showing rubber elasticity in the region can be used.
- the polymer (A) is typically the main component of the polymer component contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, that is, a component occupying more than 50% by weight, for example, 75 of the above polymer components. It can be a component that accounts for more than% by weight.
- the polymer (A) is a component that occupies more than 50% by weight of the entire pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, may be a component that occupies 70% by weight or more, or may be a component that occupies 80% by weight or more. , 90% by weight or more, or 95% by weight or more (for example, 97% by weight or more) may be used.
- the glass transition temperature TA of the polymer ( A ) is not particularly limited and can be selected so as to obtain preferable properties in the reinforcing film disclosed herein.
- the polymer ( A ) having a TA of less than 0 ° C. may be preferably employed. Since the pressure-sensitive adhesive containing the polymer (A) exhibits appropriate fluidity (for example, the motility of the polymer chains contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive), it is used for reinforcement in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive strength increases to a predetermined value or more by heating. Suitable for realization of film.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably carried out using a polymer ( A ) having a TA of less than ⁇ 10 ° C., less than ⁇ 20 ° C., less than ⁇ 30 ° C. or less than ⁇ 35 ° C.
- TA may be below ⁇ 40 ° C. or below ⁇ 50 ° C.
- the TA is ⁇ 55 ° C. or lower, more preferably ⁇ 58 ° C. or lower, even more preferably ⁇ 62 ° C. or lower, and may be ⁇ 65 ° C. or lower (eg, ⁇ 66 ° C. or lower).
- the lower limit of TA is not particularly limited.
- a polymer ( A ) having a TA of ⁇ 80 ° C. or higher and ⁇ 70 ° C. or higher can be preferably adopted.
- TA may be, for example, ⁇ 63 ° C. or higher, ⁇ 55 ° C. or higher, ⁇ 50 ° C. or higher, or ⁇ 45 ° C. or higher.
- Tg glass transition temperature of the polymer
- the glass transition temperature of the polymer for example, the glass transition temperature of the polymer (A), the polymer (B) described later, etc.
- Tg determined by the Fox formula based on the composition of the monomer raw material used in the preparation of the polymer.
- the Fox formula is a relational formula between the Tg of the copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of the homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing each of the monomers constituting the copolymer.
- Tg is the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of the copolymer
- Wi is the weight fraction of the monomer i in the copolymer (copolymerization ratio based on the weight)
- Tgi is the homopolymer of the monomer i. Represents the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of.
- the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer used for calculating Tg the value described in the publicly known material shall be used. Specifically, the figures are listed in the "Polymer Handbook” (3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989). For the monomers for which multiple types of values are described in the above Polymer Handbook, the highest value is adopted.
- the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of the monomer not described in the above Polymer Handbook the value obtained by the following measuring method shall be used. Specifically, in a reactor equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, a nitrogen introduction tube and a reflux condenser, 100 parts by weight of a monomer, 0.2 parts by weight of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile and acetic acid as a polymerization solvent. Add 200 parts by weight of ethyl and stir for 1 hour while flowing nitrogen gas. After removing oxygen in the polymerization system in this way, the temperature is raised to 63 ° C. and the reaction is carried out for 10 hours.
- a homopolymer solution having a solid content concentration of 33% by weight.
- this homopolymer solution is cast-coated on a release liner and dried to prepare a test sample (sheet-shaped homopolymer) having a thickness of about 2 mm.
- This test sample is punched into a disk shape with a diameter of 7.9 mm, sandwiched between parallel plates, and shear strain with a frequency of 1 Hz using a viscoelasticity tester (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, model name "ARES").
- the viscoelasticity is measured in a shear mode at a temperature range of ⁇ 70 ° C. to 150 ° C. and a temperature rise rate of 5 ° C./min, and the temperature corresponding to the peak top temperature of tan ⁇ is defined as Tg of the homopolymer.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (A) is about 20 ⁇ 104 or more.
- Mw weight average molecular weight
- the polymer (A) of Mw it is easy to obtain a pressure-sensitive adhesive showing good cohesiveness.
- the Mw of the polymer (A) may be, for example, 30 ⁇ 10 4 or more, 40 ⁇ 10 4 or more, or 50 ⁇ 10 4 or more. , 60 ⁇ 10 4 or more, or 80 ⁇ 10 4 or more.
- the Mw of the polymer (A) is about 500 ⁇ 104 or less.
- the polymer (A) of Mw easily forms a pressure-sensitive adhesive exhibiting appropriate fluidity (movement of polymer chains), a reinforcing film having a low adhesive strength at the initial stage of application and a large increase in adhesive strength can be realized. Suitable for. It is preferable that the Mw of the polymer (A) is not too high from the viewpoint of improving the compatibility with the polymer (B). In some preferred embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (A) may be, for example, 250 ⁇ 10 4 or less, 200 ⁇ 10 4 or less, 150 ⁇ 10 4 or less, 100 ⁇ 10 4 or less. It may be 70 ⁇ 10 4 or less.
- the Mw of the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) described later can be determined by polystyrene conversion by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). More specifically, Mw can be measured according to the methods and conditions described in the examples described later.
- an acrylic polymer can be preferably adopted as the polymer (A) in the reinforcing film disclosed here.
- an acrylic polymer is used as the polymer (A)
- good compatibility with the polymer (B) tends to be easily obtained.
- the good compatibility between the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) can contribute to the reduction of the initial adhesive force and the improvement of the adhesive force after heating by improving the mobility of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
- an acrylic polymer having a high degree of freedom in molecular design is suitable as a pressure-sensitive adhesive material capable of improving adhesive properties, bending recovery and bending holding power in a well-balanced manner.
- the acrylic polymer is, for example, a polymer containing 50% by weight or more of a monomer unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, that is, 50 out of the total amount of the monomer component (monomer raw material A) for preparing the acrylic polymer. It can be a polymer in which% by weight or more is a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
- a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (that is, C 1-20 ) can be preferably used.
- the ratio of the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 50% by weight or more, or 60% by weight or more.
- the proportion of (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A is 70% by weight or more, more preferably 80% by weight or more, still more preferably 85% by weight or more. Particularly preferably, it is 90% by weight or more.
- the proportion of the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 99.9% by weight or less, 98% by weight or less, or 95% by weight or less. In some embodiments, the proportion of the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 90% by weight or less, 85% by weight or less, or 80% by weight or less.
- Non-limiting specific examples of the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester include methyl (meth) acrylic acid, ethyl (meth) acrylic acid, propyl (meth) acrylic acid, and isopropyl (meth) acrylic acid.
- the acrylic polymer is at least one selected from (meth) acrylic acid C 4-12 alkyl esters (preferably acrylic acid C 4-10 alkyl esters, eg acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl esters).
- (meth) acrylic acid C 4-12 alkyl esters preferably acrylic acid C 4-10 alkyl esters, eg acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl esters.
- an acrylic polymer containing one or both of n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) is preferable, and an acrylic polymer containing at least 2EHA is particularly preferable.
- the proportion of acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl ester (preferably acrylic acid C 8-9 alkyl ester, typically 2EHA) in the monomer raw material A for preparing the acrylic polymer is , 70% by weight or more, more preferably 80% by weight or more, still more preferably 85% by weight or more, and particularly preferably 90% by weight or more.
- Acrylic polymers with such a monomer composition are particularly suitable for achieving the effects of the techniques disclosed herein.
- the proportion of acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl ester (preferably acrylic acid C 8-9 alkyl ester, typically 2EHA) in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 99.9% by weight or less. From the viewpoint of initial low adhesive strength, bending recovery, etc., it may be 98% by weight or less, or 95% by weight or less.
- the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-3 alkyl ester eg, (meth) acrylic acid C 1 alkyl ester, typically methacrylic
- the proportion of methyl acid (MMA)) is limited.
- (Meta) acrylic acid C 1-3 alkyl ester for example, (meth) acrylic acid C 1 alkyl ester, typically MMA) tends to have a relatively high Tg, and is an acrylic polymer using the above-mentioned monomer component. Adhesives containing, tend to be highly cohesive.
- the cohesive force of the adhesive is appropriately reduced, and the elastic modulus suitable for achieving both bending holding force and increasing adhesive force (typically). Is a surface elastic modulus) can be preferably realized.
- the ratio of (meth) acrylic acid C 1-3 alkyl ester for example, (meth) acrylic acid C 1 alkyl ester, typically MMA
- the above-mentioned monomer raw material A is 8% by weight or less. It is suitable, preferably 6% by weight or less, more preferably 3% by weight or less, still more preferably 1% by weight or less (for example, 0 to 0.3% by weight).
- the monomer raw material A may contain a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester as a main component and, if necessary, another monomer (copolymerizable monomer) copolymerizable with the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester. ..
- a monomer having a polar group for example, a carboxy group, a hydroxyl group, a nitrogen atom-containing ring, etc.
- Monomers having polar groups can be useful for introducing cross-linking points in acrylic polymers and for enhancing the cohesive power of acrylic polymers.
- the copolymerizable monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- Non-limiting specific examples of the copolymerizable monomer include the following. Hydroxyl-containing monomers: For example, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic.
- N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone N-methylvinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylpyridine, N-vinylpiperidone, N-vinylpyrimidine, N-vinylpiperazine, N-vinylpyrazine, N- Vinylpyrrole, N-vinylimidazole, N-vinyloxazole, N- (meth) acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone, N- (meth) acryloyl piperidine, N- (meth) acryloyl pyrrolidine, N- (meth) acryloyl morpholine, N- Vinylmorpholin, N-vinyl-3-morpholinone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactam, N-vinyl-1,3-oxadin-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-morpholindione, N-vinylpyrazole, N -Vinylis
- Monomer containing carboxy group For example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, carboxyethyl acrylate, carboxypentyl acrylate, itaconic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid and the like.
- Acid anhydride group-containing monomer For example, maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride.
- Epoxide group-containing monomer For example, epoxy group-containing acrylate such as (meth) glycidyl acrylate and (meth) -2-ethyl glycidyl ether, allyl glycidyl ether, glycidyl ether (meth) acrylate and the like.
- Cyano group-containing monomer For example, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, etc.
- Isocyanate group-containing monomer For example, 2-isocyanatoethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
- Amide group-containing monomers For example, (meth) acrylamide; N, N-dimethyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-diethyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-dipropyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-diisopropyl (meth).
- N, N-dialkyl (meth) acrylamide such as acrylamide, N, N-di (n-butyl) (meth) acrylamide, N, N-di (t-butyl) (meth) acrylamide; N-ethyl (meth) N-alkyl (meth) acrylamide such as acrylamide, N-isopropyl (meth) acrylamide, N-butyl (meth) acrylamide, Nn-butyl (meth) acrylamide; N-vinylcarboxylic acid amide such as N-vinylacetamide.
- Classes; monomers having a hydroxyl group and an amide group such as N- (2-hydroxyethyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (2-hydroxypropyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (1-hydroxypropyl) (meth).
- N- (3-hydroxypropyl) (meth) acrylamide N- (2-hydroxybutyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (3-hydroxybutyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (4-hydroxybutyl) ( N-hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylamide, such as meta) acrylamide
- monomers with an alkoxy group and an amide group such as N-methoxymethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-butoxymethyl ( N-alkoxyalkyl (meth) acrylamide such as meta) acrylamide
- N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylamide and the like N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylamide and the like.
- Aminoalkyl (meth) acrylates For example, aminoethyl (meth) acrylate, N, N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, N, N-diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, t (meth) acrylate. -Butyl aminoethyl.
- Alkoxy group-containing monomers for example, 2-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-methoxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, propoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid.
- Alkoxyalkyls (meth) acrylates such as butoxyethyl, ethoxypropyl (meth) acrylates; alkoxyalkylene glycols (meth) acrylates such as methoxyethylene glycol (meth) acrylates, methoxypolypropylene glycols (meth) acrylates, etc.
- Monomer containing a sulfonic acid group or a phosphate group for example, styrene sulfonic acid, allyl sulfonic acid, sodium vinyl sulfonic acid, 2- (meth) acrylamide-2-methyl propane sulfonic acid, (meth) acrylamide propane sulfonic acid, sulfo.
- acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group For example, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
- acrylic acid ester having an aromatic hydrocarbon group For example, phenyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
- Vinyl ethers For example, vinyl alkyl ethers such as methyl vinyl ether and ethyl vinyl ether.
- Vinyl esters For example, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, etc.
- Aromatic vinyl compounds For example, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, vinyltoluene and the like.
- Olefins For example, ethylene, butadiene, isoprene, isobutylene and the like.
- heterocyclic-containing (meth) acrylates such as tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate, halogen atom-containing (meth) acrylates such as vinyl chloride and fluorine atom-containing (meth) acrylates, and silicon atom-containing silicone (meth) acrylates.
- the amount used is not particularly limited, but it is usually appropriate to use 0.01% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A. From the viewpoint of better exerting the effect of using the copolymerizable monomer, the amount of the copolymerizable monomer used may be 0.1% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A or 1% by weight or more. In some preferred embodiments, the content of the copolymerizable monomer in the monomer raw material A is 3% by weight or more, more preferably 5% by weight or more, still more preferably 7% by weight or more (for example, 8% by weight or more). Is.
- the amount of the copolymerizable monomer used can be 50% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, and is preferably 30% by weight or less. This prevents the cohesive force of the adhesive from becoming too high, and can improve the tackiness at room temperature (25 ° C.). In some preferred embodiments, the amount of the copolymerizable monomer used is 20% by weight or less, more preferably 15% by weight or less (eg, 12% by weight or less), and 10% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A. You may.
- the cohesive force of the adhesive is reduced, the elastic modulus (typically the surface elastic modulus) is in a suitable range, and excellent bending holding force is easily obtained, and the adhesive is adhered. It is easy to realize an increase in power.
- the monomer raw material A may contain a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring.
- a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring By using a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring, the cohesive force and polarity of the adhesive can be adjusted, and the adhesive force after heating can be suitably improved.
- the compatibility between the polymer (A) formed from the monomer raw material A and the polymer (B) tends to be improved. This makes it easier to obtain a reinforcing film that can greatly increase the adhesive strength by heating.
- the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring can be appropriately selected from the above examples, and can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the monomer raw material A contains, as the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring, at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of an N-vinyl cyclic amide and a cyclic amide having a (meth) acryloyl group. Is preferable.
- N-vinyl cyclic amide examples include N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-2-piperidone, N-vinyl-3-morpholinone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactam, and N-vinyl-1,3. -Oxazine-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-morpholindione and the like can be mentioned. Particularly preferred are N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-vinyl-2-caprolactam.
- cyclic amide having a (meth) acryloyl group examples include N- (meth) acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone, N- (meth) acryloylpiperidin, N- (meth) acryloylpyrrolidine, N- (meth) acryloylmorpholine and the like. Can be mentioned. Preferable examples include N-acryloyl morpholine (ACMO).
- the amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring is not particularly limited, and is usually appropriately 40% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, 30% by weight or less, or 20% by weight or less. It may be 10% by weight or less.
- the content of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring in the monomer raw material A is 7% by weight or less from the viewpoint of lowering the cohesive force and lowering the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus). It is more preferably 5% by weight or less, still more preferably 3% by weight or less (for example, 1.5% by weight or less).
- the amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring used is 0.01% by weight or more (preferably 0.1% by weight or more, for example 0.5% by weight or more) of the monomer raw material A. be. From the viewpoint of obtaining an appropriate cohesive force and elastic modulus, in some embodiments, the amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring may be 0.8% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A, 1.0% by weight or more. May be.
- the monomer raw material A comprises a hydroxyl group-containing monomer.
- the hydroxyl group-containing monomer By using the hydroxyl group-containing monomer, the cohesive force and polarity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, and thus the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus) can be adjusted, and the effect of the technique disclosed herein can be preferably realized.
- the hydroxyl group-containing monomer provides a reaction point with a cross-linking agent (for example, an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent) described later, and the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive can be enhanced by the cross-linking reaction.
- a cross-linking agent for example, an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent
- hydroxyl group-containing monomer examples include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth) acrylate, and N- (2-hydroxyethyl) (meth) acrylamide. It can be suitably used. Among them, preferred examples include 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA), 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate (4HBA), and N- (2-hydroxyethyl) acrylamide (HEAA). 4HBA is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of obtaining a cohesive force suitable for bending recovery and bending holding force.
- the amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer used is not particularly limited, and is usually appropriately 40% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, 30% by weight or less, or 20% by weight or less.
- the content of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in the monomer raw material A is 15% by weight or less, more preferably, from the viewpoint of reducing the cohesive force and thus the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus). Is 12% by weight or less (for example, 10% by weight or less).
- the content of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer may be 5% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A. Further, it is appropriate that the amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer used is 0.01% by weight or more (preferably 0.1% by weight or more, for example, 0.5% by weight or more) of the monomer raw material A. From the viewpoint of obtaining an appropriate cohesive force and elastic modulus, in some preferred embodiments, the amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer used is 1% by weight or more, more preferably 3% by weight or more, still more preferably 5 of the monomer raw material A. It is 7% by weight or more, particularly preferably 7% by weight or more (for example, 8% by weight or more).
- a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and a hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be used in combination as the copolymerizable monomer.
- the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be, for example, 0.1% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A, preferably 1% by weight or more, and more preferably 3% by weight. % Or more, more preferably 5% by weight or more, particularly preferably 7% by weight or more (for example, 9% by weight or more), 10% by weight or more, 15% by weight or more, or 20% by weight or more. It may be 25% by weight or more.
- the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be, for example, 50% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, and is preferably 30% by weight or less. In some preferred embodiments, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is 20% by weight or less, more preferably 15% by weight or less (for example, 12% by weight or less) of the monomer raw material A. be.
- the relationship (weight basis) with WOH ) is not particularly limited.
- W N / W OH may be, for example, 0.01 or more, usually 0.05 or more, 0.10 or more, or 0.12 or more. Further, W N / W OH may be, for example, 10 or less, usually 1 or less is appropriate, preferably 0.50 or less, 0.30 or less, 0.20 or less, and 0. It may be .15 or less.
- the monomer raw material A does not contain a monomer having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton (monomer S1) which is preferably used as a constituent component of the monomer raw material B described later, or the content of the monomer is the monomer raw material A. It is preferably less than 10% by weight (more preferably less than 5% by weight, for example, less than 2% by weight). According to the monomer raw material A having such a composition, a reinforcing film having a good balance between initial reworkability and strong adhesiveness after an increase in adhesive strength can be preferably realized.
- monomer S1 polyorganosiloxane skeleton
- the monomer raw material A does not contain the monomer S1 or, if it contains the monomer S1, its content (weight basis) is higher than the content of the monomer S1 in the monomer raw material B. Low is preferable.
- the method for obtaining the polymer (A) is not particularly limited, and various polymerization methods such as a solution polymerization method, an emulsion polymerization method, a bulk polymerization method, a suspension polymerization method, and a photopolymerization method can be appropriately adopted.
- the solution polymerization method may be preferably employed.
- the polymerization temperature at the time of solution polymerization can be appropriately selected depending on the type of the monomer and solvent used, the type of the polymerization initiator and the like, and is, for example, about 20 ° C. to 170 ° C. (typically 40 ° C. to 140 ° C.). °C).
- the initiator used for the polymerization can be appropriately selected from conventionally known thermal polymerization initiators, photopolymerization initiators and the like, depending on the polymerization method.
- the polymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- thermal polymerization initiator examples include azo-based polymerization initiators (for example, 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis (for example). 2-Methylpropionic acid) dimethyl, 4,4'-azobis-4-cyanovalerian acid, azobisisobutyvaleronitrile, 2,2'-azobis (2-amidinopropane) dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis [2 -(5-Methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl) propane] dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis (2-methylpropionamidine) disulfate, 2,2'-azobis (N, N'-dimethylene) Isobutylamidin) dihydrochloride, etc.); Persulfate such as potassium persulfate; Peroxide-based polymerization initiator (for example, dibenzoylperoxide, t-butyl
- the amount of the thermal polymerization initiator used is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, preferably 0.01 parts by weight, preferably 5 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the monomer component (monomer raw material A) used for preparing the polymer (A).
- the amount can be in the range of 0.05 parts by weight to 3 parts by weight.
- the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and is, for example, a benzoin ether-based photopolymerization initiator, an acetophenone-based photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -ketol-based photopolymerization initiator, an aromatic sulfonyl chloride-based photopolymerization initiator, and photoactivity.
- Oxym-based photopolymerization initiator, benzoin-based photopolymerization initiator, benzyl-based photopolymerization initiator, benzophenone-based photopolymerization initiator, Ketal-based photopolymerization initiator, thioxanthone-based photopolymerization initiator, acylphosphine oxide-based photopolymerization initiator Agents and the like can be used.
- the amount of the photopolymerization initiator used is not particularly limited, but is, for example, an amount in the range of 0.01 parts by weight to 5 parts by weight, preferably 0.05 parts by weight to 3 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the monomer raw material A. Can be.
- the polymer (A) is a partial polymer obtained by irradiating a mixture of the above-mentioned monomer raw material A with a polymerization initiator with ultraviolet rays (UV) to polymerize a part of the monomer component (a partial polymer).
- a polymer syrup it may be included in a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition for forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
- a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing such a polymer syrup can be applied to a predetermined object to be coated and irradiated with ultraviolet rays to complete the polymerization. That is, the polymer syrup can be grasped as a precursor of the polymer (A).
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein can be formed, for example, by using a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the polymer syrup and the polymer (B).
- the polymer (B) in the technique disclosed herein is the polymerization of a monomer component (monomer raw material B) containing a monomer having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton (hereinafter, also referred to as “monomer S1”) and a (meth) acrylic monomer. It is a thing.
- the polymer (B) can be said to be a copolymer of the monomer S1 and the (meth) acrylic monomer.
- the polymer (B) can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the polymer (B) suppresses the adhesive force at the initial stage of attachment to the adherend due to the low polarity and motility of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from the monomer S1, and increases the adhesive force to the adherend by heating. It can function as an adhesive force increase retarder.
- the monomer S1 is not particularly limited, and any monomer containing a polyorganosiloxane skeleton can be used. Due to the low polarity derived from the structure of the monomer S1, the polymer (B) is unevenly distributed on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the reinforcing film before use (before being attached to the adherend), and the initial bonding period. (Low adhesiveness) is exhibited.
- a monomer having a structure having a polymerizable reactive group at one end can be preferably used.
- a polymer (B) having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton in the side chain is formed.
- the polymer (B) having such a structure tends to have a low initial adhesive force and a high adhesive force after heating due to the motility and mobility of the side chains.
- the monomer S1 preferably has a polymerizable reactive group at one end and does not have a functional group that causes a cross-linking reaction with the polymer (A) at the other end.
- the polymer (B) in which the monomer S1 having such a structure is copolymerized tends to have a low initial adhesive force and a high adhesive force after heating due to the motility of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from the monomer S1.
- the monomer S1 for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or (2) can be used. More specifically, examples of the one-ended reactive silicone oil manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. include X-22-174ASX, X-22-2426, X-22-2475, and KF-22. Monomer S1 can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- R 3 in the above general formulas (1) and (2) is hydrogen or methyl
- R 4 is a methyl group or a monovalent organic group
- m and n are integers of 0 or more.
- the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 can be an appropriate value within a range in which the desired effect is exhibited by using the monomer S1, and is not limited to a specific range.
- the functional group equivalent is, for example, 100 g / mol or more, 200 g / mol or more, and 300 g / mol or more (for example, 500 g / mol or more). It is preferably 800 g / mol or more, and more preferably 1500 g / mol or more.
- the functional group equivalent is 2000 g / mol or more, more preferably 2500 g / mol or more, and 3000 g, from the viewpoint of achieving both low adhesiveness at the initial stage of application and increase in adhesive strength after heating. It may be / mol or more, 4000 g / mol or more, or 5000 g / mol or more. In some other embodiments, the functional group equivalent may be 9000 g / mol or more, 12000 g / mol or more, or 15000 g / mol or more.
- the functional group means a polymerizable functional group (for example, an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group or an allylic group).
- the functional group equivalent is preferably, for example, 30,000 g / mol or less, may be 20,000 g / mol or less, may be less than 15,000 g / mol, and may be less than 10,000 g / mol. But it may be.
- the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 is 7000 g / mol or less, more preferably 5500 g / mol or less, still more preferably 4500 g / mol or less, and may be 4200 g / mol or less, 3500 g / mol or less. It may be as follows.
- the compatibility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (for example, compatibility with the base polymer) tends to be good, and the polyorganosiloxane skeleton (chain) of the polymer (B) tends to be good. It has good motility, and it is easy to adjust the mobility of the polymer (B) to an appropriate range, and it is easy to realize a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer that achieves both initial low adhesiveness and an increase in adhesive strength after heating.
- the "functional group equivalent” means the weight of the main skeleton (for example, polydimethylsiloxane) bonded to each functional group.
- the title unit g / mol is converted to 1 mol of functional group.
- the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 can be calculated, for example, from the spectral intensity of 1 H-NMR (proton NMR) based on nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR). 1
- the calculation of the functional group equivalent (g / mol) of the monomer S1 based on the spectral intensity of 1 H-NMR is based on the general structural analysis method related to 1 1 H-NMR spectral analysis, and if necessary, the Japanese Patent No. 1 This can be done with reference to the description in JP-A-591153.
- the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 composed of n kinds of monomers having different functional group equivalents (monomer S1 1 , monomer S1 2 ... Monomer S1 n ) can be calculated by the following formula.
- Functional group equivalent of monomer S1 (g / mol) (functional equivalent of monomer S1 1 ⁇ compounding amount of monomer S1 1 + functional group equivalent of monomer S1 2 ⁇ compounding amount of monomer S1 2 + ... + monomer S1 n
- Functional group equivalent amount ⁇ amount of monomer S1 n / (amount of monomer S1 1 + amount of monomer S1 2 + ... + amount of monomer S1 n )
- the content of the monomer S1 can be an appropriate value within a range in which the desired effect is exhibited by using the monomer S1, and is not limited to a specific range. From the viewpoint of sufficiently suppressing the initial adhesive force, in some embodiments, the content of the monomer S1 is, for example, 5% by weight or more among the total amount of the monomer component (monomer raw material B) for preparing the polymer (B). It is preferable that the content is 10% by weight or more, more preferably 12% by weight or more, still more preferably 15% by weight or more, and particularly preferably 18% by weight, from the viewpoint of better exerting the effect as an adhesive force increase retarder. It is 20% by weight or more, and may be 20% by weight or more.
- the content of the monomer S1 in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 80% by weight or less, preferably 60% by weight or less, preferably 50% by weight, from the viewpoint of polymerization reactivity and compatibility. Hereinafter, it may be more preferably 40% by weight or less, still more preferably 30% by weight or less.
- the monomer raw material B contains a (meth) acrylic monomer copolymerizable with the monomer S1 in addition to the monomer S1.
- the mobility of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be suitably adjusted. It can also help improve the compatibility between the polymer (B) and the polymer (A). Since the polymer (B) containing the (meth) acrylic monomer unit can be well compatible with the acrylic polymer, the initial adhesive strength is reduced and after heating through the improvement of the mobility of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. It is easy to improve the adhesive strength.
- the composition of the (meth) acrylic monomer contained in the monomer raw material B is such that the glass transition temperature TB of the polymer ( B ) is ⁇ 20 ° C. to 5 ° C. It can be set appropriately in the range.
- the glass transition temperature TB1 based on the composition of the (meth) acrylic monomer is also appropriately set within a range satisfying the above TB , and is not limited to a specific range.
- TB1 is preferably set to be higher than the glass transition temperature TA of the polymer ( A ).
- TB1 can be set to be higher than 0 ° C., for example.
- the glass transition temperature TB1 based on the composition of the (meth) acrylic monomer is a Fox formula based on the composition of only the (meth) acrylic monomer among the monomer components used for the preparation of the polymer ( B ). It means Tg obtained by.
- the Fox formula described above is applied only to the (meth) acrylic monomer among the monomer components used in the preparation of the polymer ( B ), and the glass transition of the homopolymer of each (meth) acrylic monomer is applied. It can be calculated from the temperature and the weight fraction of each (meth) acrylic monomer in the total amount of the (meth) acrylic monomer.
- the initial adhesive force is likely to be suppressed.
- the polymer ( B ) having a relatively high glass transition temperature TB1 typically higher than 0 ° C.
- TB1 is 10 ° C. or higher, more preferably 30 ° C. or higher, still more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, and may be 45 ° C. or higher.
- the adhesive strength at the initial stage of application generally tends to be better suppressed. This is because, according to the polymer ( B ) in which TB1 is above a predetermined temperature, the improvement of the mobility and mobility of the polyorganosiloxane structural portion with the temperature rise to room temperature or a temperature region higher than room temperature is improved.
- TB1 may be, for example, 50 ° C. or higher, 55 ° C. or higher, or 60 ° C. or higher. Further, TB1 may be, for example, 120 ° C. or lower, or 100 ° C. or lower. When TB1 becomes low, the increase in adhesive strength due to heating tends to be easy. In some preferred embodiments, TB1 is, for example, 90 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or lower, still more preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 55 ° C. or lower (eg, 50 ° C. or lower).
- the total amount of the monomer S1 and the (meth) acrylic monomer in all the monomer components for preparing the polymer (B) is, for example, 50 weight by weight. % Or more, 70% by weight or more, 85% by weight or more, 90% by weight or more, 95% by weight or more, and substantially 100% by weight.
- the glass transition temperature TB of the polymer ( B ) used in the technique disclosed herein is in the range of ⁇ 20 ° C. to 5 ° C.
- the TB of the polymer ( B ) is 5 ° C. or lower, the mobility (typically, temperature-sensitive motility) of the polymer (B) is improved, and the adhesive strength can be greatly increased.
- the TB of the polymer ( B ) may be below 0 ° C, below ⁇ 5 ° C, or below ⁇ 10 ° C.
- the polymer (B) unevenly distributed on the surface side of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at the time of sticking to the adherend contributes to a decrease in initial adhesive strength, resulting in light peelability at the initial stage of sticking. Tends to be better.
- the TB of the polymer ( B ) may be -15 ° C or higher.
- the composition of the monomer component for preparing the polymer ( B ) may be set such that TB1 is higher than TB , i.e. TB1 - TB is greater than 0 ° C. can. According to such a composition, the effect of adjusting the mobility of the polymer (B) is likely to be suitably exhibited by the composition of the (meth) acrylic monomer contained in the monomer component.
- TB1 - TB may be, for example, about 40 ° C to 100 ° C, or may be about 50 ° C to 90 ° C. In some preferred embodiments, TB1 - TB is 45 ° C. or higher, more preferably 50 ° C. or higher, still more preferably 55 ° C.
- TB1- TB is preferably 80 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or lower, still more preferably 65 ° C. or lower (for example, 62 ° C. or lower). be.
- the composition of the monomer component for preparing the polymer (B) is the glass transition temperature T of the polymer (A).
- T glass transition temperature
- TB can be set to be 20 ° C. or higher higher than TA , that is, TB ⁇ TA can be set to 20 ° C. or higher.
- TB - TA is, for example, 30 ° C. or higher, more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, still more preferably 50 ° C. or higher, 60 ° C. or higher, or 70 ° C. or higher. good.
- TB - TA may be, for example, 130 ° C. or lower, 120 ° C. or lower, preferably 100 ° C. or lower, more preferably 80 ° C. or lower, still more preferably 65 ° C. or lower. It may be 55 ° C. or lower, or 45 ° C. or lower.
- Examples of the (meth) acrylic monomer that can be used for the monomer raw material B include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters.
- alkyl refers to a chain-like (including linear and branched chain-like) alkyls (groups), and does not include the alicyclic hydrocarbon group described later.
- one or more of the monomers exemplified above as the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester that can be used for the polymer (A) can be used as a constituent component of the monomer raw material B.
- the monomer raw material B is a (meth) acrylic acid C 4-12 alkyl ester (preferably a (meth) acrylic acid C 4-10 alkyl ester, eg, a (meth) acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl ester. ) Can be contained.
- the monomer raw material B may contain at least one of a methacrylic acid C 1-18 alkyl ester (preferably a methacrylic acid C 1-14 alkyl ester, such as a methacrylic acid C 1-10 alkyl ester). ..
- the monomer raw material B may contain, as the (meth) acrylic monomer, one or more selected from, for example, MMA, n-butyl methacrylate (nBMA) and 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (2EHMA).
- MMA n-butyl methacrylate
- EHMA 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate
- the above (meth) acrylic monomer is a (meth) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group.
- cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, 1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate and the like can be used.
- the monomer raw material B may contain, as the (meth) acrylic monomer, at least one selected from dicyclopentanyl methacrylate, isobornyl methacrylate and cyclohexyl methacrylate.
- the content of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester and the (meth) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 10% by weight or more and 95% by weight or less, and may be 20% by weight. It may be 95% by weight or less, 30% by weight or more and 90% by weight or less, 40% by weight or more and 90% by weight or less, and 50% by weight or more and 85% by weight or less. May be good. From the viewpoint of easiness of increasing the adhesive force by heating, the use of (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester may be advantageous.
- the content of the (meth) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be less than 50% by weight, less than 30% by weight, or less than 15% by weight of the monomer raw material B. It may be less than 10% by weight or less than 5% by weight. It is not necessary to use a (meth) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group.
- the (meth) acrylic monomer which is a constituent of the monomer raw material B, may contain a monomer M2 having a homopolymer Tg of 50 ° C. or higher.
- the polymer (B) by copolymerizing the monomer S1 and the monomer M2, the motility and mobility of the polyorganosiloxane structural portion with increasing temperature are suitably controlled, and the initial light peelability (reworkability) and heating are performed. It is easy to achieve both the later increase in adhesive strength.
- the Tg of the homopolymer of the monomer M2 may be 60 ° C. or higher, 70 ° C. or higher, 80 ° C. or higher, or 90 ° C. or higher.
- the upper limit of Tg of the homopolymer of the monomer M2 is not particularly limited, but it is usually appropriate to be 200 ° C. or lower from the viewpoint of easiness of synthesizing the polymer (B).
- the Tg of the homopolymer of the monomer M2 may be, for example, 180 ° C or lower, 150 ° C or lower, or 120 ° C or lower.
- the monomer M2 for example, among the (meth) acrylic monomers exemplified above, those in which the Tg of the homopolymer satisfies the condition can be used.
- one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters and (meth) acrylic acid esters having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group can be used.
- the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester a methacrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having a carbon atom number in the range of 1 to 4 can be preferably adopted.
- the content of the monomer M2 may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 15% by weight or more, or 20% by weight or more of the monomer raw material B. However, it may be 25% by weight or more, or 30% by weight or more. In some embodiments, the content of the monomer M2 may be 35% by weight or more, 40% by weight or more, 45% by weight or more, 50% by weight or more, 55% by weight or more of the monomer raw material B. But it may be.
- the content of the monomer M2 may be, for example, 90% by weight or less, usually 80% by weight or less, preferably 75% by weight or less, 70% by weight or less, and 65% by weight.
- the content of the monomer M2 is 60% by weight or less (eg, 50% by weight or less, typically 42% by weight or less).
- the copolymerization ratio of the monomer M2 having a Tg of 50 ° C. or higher is limited to a predetermined value or less, so that the adhesive strength after heating is increased based on the mobility of the polymer (B) at around 50 ° C. It can be preferably realized.
- the content of the monomer M2 in the monomer raw material B may be 35% by weight or less, 25% by weight or less, or 15% by weight or less (for example, 5% by weight or less).
- the content of the monomer M2 is, for example, one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester and the (meth) acrylic acid ester having the alicyclic hydrocarbon group. It can be preferably applied in an embodiment consisting of one or more monomers in which the monomer M2 is selected from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester (for example, a methacrylic acid alkyl ester). As a preferred example of such an embodiment, there is an embodiment in which the above-mentioned monomer M2 is composed of MMA.
- the (meth) acrylic monomer may contain a monomer M3 in which the Tg of the homopolymer is less than 50 ° C (typically ⁇ 20 ° C or higher and lower than 50 ° C).
- the monomer M3 is preferably used in combination with the monomer M2.
- the monomer M3 for example, among the (meth) acrylic monomers exemplified above, those in which the Tg of the homopolymer satisfies the condition can be used.
- one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters can be used.
- the content of the monomer M3 may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 15% by weight or more, or 20% by weight or more of the monomer raw material B. However, it may be 25% by weight or more, 30% by weight or more, or 35% by weight or more. Further, the content of the monomer M3 is usually preferably 70% by weight or less of the monomer raw material B, and may be 60% by weight or less, or 50% by weight or less. The content of the monomer M3 can be preferably applied, for example, in an embodiment in which the monomer M3 consists of one or more monomers selected from (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters (eg, methacrylic acid alkyl esters).
- the monomer raw material B preferably has a monomer content of a homopolymer having a Tg higher than 170 ° C. of 30% by weight or less.
- the term "monomer content of X% by weight or less" in the present specification includes an embodiment in which the monomer content is 0% by weight, that is, an embodiment in which the monomer is substantially not contained, unless otherwise specified. It is a concept. Further, “substantially free” means that the above-mentioned monomer is not used at least intentionally.
- the copolymerization ratio of the monomer having a Tg of homopolymer higher than 170 ° C. is high, the mobility of the polymer (B) tends to be insufficient, and it is difficult to increase the adhesive strength by heating to a temperature range higher than 50 ° C. Can be.
- the monomer raw material B preferably contains at least MMA as the (meth) acrylic monomer.
- MMA the polymer in which MMA is copolymerized, it is easy to obtain a reinforcing film having a large adhesive force after heating.
- the ratio of MMA to the total amount of the (meth) acrylic monomer contained in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 20% by weight or more, and 30% by weight or more. However, it may be 40% by weight or more.
- the ratio of MMA to the total amount of the monomer raw material B is usually 95% by weight or less, and in some preferred embodiments, the ratio of MMA to the total amount of the monomer raw material B is adhesion after heating. From the viewpoint of increasing the force, it may be 75% by weight or less, 65% by weight or less, 60% by weight or less, or 55% by weight or less (for example, 50% by weight or less).
- ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate diethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, triethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol.
- Oxyalkylene di (meth) acrylates such as di (meth) acrylates, propylene glycol di (meth) acrylates, dipropylene glycol di (meth) acrylates, tripropylene glycol di (meth) acrylates; monomers having a polyoxyalkylene skeleton, such as A polyoxyalkylene chain such as polyethylene glycol or polypropylene glycol has a polymerizable functional group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group or an allyl group at one end, and an ether structure (alkyl ether, aryl ether, etc.) at the other end.
- a polyoxyalkylene chain such as polyethylene glycol or polypropylene glycol has a polymerizable functional group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group or an allyl group at one end, and an ether structure (alkyl ether, aryl ether, etc.) at the other end.
- Polymerizable polyoxyalkylene ethers such as arylalkyl ethers
- (Meta) Acrylic acid alkoxyalkyls such as ethoxypropyl acid; Salts such as (meth) acrylic acid alkali metal salts; Polyvalent (meth) acrylates such as trimethyl propanthry (meth) acrylic acid esters: Vinylidene chloride, (meth) Vinyl halide compounds such as -2-chloroethyl acrylate; oxazolin group-containing monomers such as 2-vinyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-5-methyl-2-oxazoline and 2-isopropenyl-2-oxazoline; (meth).
- Acryloyl azilysin, aziridin group-containing monomers such as (meth) acrylate-2-aziridinylethyl; (meth) acrylate-2-hydroxyethyl, (meth) acrylate-2-hydroxypropyl, lactones and (meth).
- Hydroxyl-containing vinyl monomer such as an adduct with -2-hydroxyethyl acrylate; Fluorine-containing vinyl monomer such as fluorine-substituted (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester; Containing reactive halogen such as 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether and monochloroethyl vinyl acetate Vinyl monomer; contains organic silicon such as vinyl trimethoxysilane, ⁇ - (meth) acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, allyltrimethoxysilane, trimethoxysilylpropylallylamine, 2-methoxyethoxytrimethoxysilane.
- Vinyl-containing monomers In addition, macromonomers having a radically polymerizable vinyl group at the terminal of a monomer polymerized with a vinyl group; and the like can be mentioned. These can be copolymerized with the monomer S1 alone or in combination of two or more.
- the polymer (B) may preferably be one that does not have a functional group that causes a cross-linking reaction with the polymer (A).
- the polymer (B) is preferably contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in a form that is not chemically bonded to the polymer (A).
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing the polymer (B) in such a form has good mobility of the polymer (B) at the time of heating, and is suitable for improving the adhesion increase ratio.
- the functional group that causes a cross-linking reaction with the polymer (A) may differ depending on the type of the functional group of the polymer (A), and may be, for example, an epoxy group, an isocyanate group, a carboxy group, an alkoxysilyl group, an amino group or the like. ..
- the Mw of the polymer (B) is not particularly limited.
- the Mw of the polymer (B) may be, for example, 1000 or more, and may be 5000 or more.
- the Mw of the polymer (B) is 10,000 or more, more preferably 12,000 or more, and 15,000 or more, from the viewpoint of preferably exhibiting an increase in adhesive strength after heating. It may be 20,000 or more, 22,000 or more, or 25,000 or more.
- the Mw of the polymer (B) may be 30,000 or more, 50,000 or more, or 70,000 or more.
- the upper limit of Mw of the polymer (B) is, for example, 500,000 or less, may be 350,000 or less, may be 200,000 or less, or may be 150,000 or less.
- the Mw of the polymer (B) is 100,000 from the viewpoint of adjusting the compatibility and mobility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to an appropriate range and preferably exhibiting low tackiness at the initial stage of application. It is more preferably 80,000 or less, still more preferably 60,000 or less, particularly preferably 40,000 or less (for example, 30,000 or less), and may be 25,000 or less, further 20 It may be 000 or less.
- the Mw of the polymer (B) is 100,000 from the viewpoint of adjusting the compatibility and mobility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to an appropriate range and preferably exhibiting low tackiness at the initial stage of application. It is more preferably 80,000 or less, still more preferably 60,000 or less, particularly preferably 40,000 or less (for example, 30,000 or less), and may be 25,000 or less, further 20 It may be 000 or less.
- the Mw of the polymer (B) is preferably lower than the Mw of the polymer (A). This makes it easier to realize a reinforcing film that achieves both good reworkability at the initial stage of application and an increase in adhesive strength after heating.
- the Mw of the polymer (B) may be, for example, 0.8 times or less, 0.75 times or less, 0.5 times or less, 0 times the Mw of the polymer (A). It may be 3 times or less.
- the ratio of Mw B of the polymer ( B ) to Mw A of the polymer ( A ) is 0.3 or less, more preferably 0.2 or less, still more preferred.
- the ratio (Mw B / Mw A ) is, for example, 0.010 or more, preferably 0.020 or more, more preferably 0.03 or more, and further preferably 0.04 or more.
- the polymer (B) can be produced, for example, by polymerizing the above-mentioned monomer by a known method such as a solution polymerization method, an emulsion polymerization method, a bulk polymerization method, a suspension polymerization method, or a photopolymerization method.
- a chain transfer agent can be used as needed to adjust the molecular weight of the polymer (B).
- chain transfer agents used include octyl mercaptan, lauryl mercaptan, t-nonyl mercaptan, t-dodecyl mercaptan, mercaptoethanol, compounds having a mercapto group such as ⁇ -thioglycerol; thioglycolic acid, methyl thioglycolate, etc.
- Examples thereof include thioglycolic acid esters of glycol, thioglycolic acid esters of neopentyl glycol, thioglycolic acid esters such as pentaerythritol thioglycolic acid ester; ⁇ -methylstyrene dimer; and the like.
- the amount of the chain transfer agent used is not particularly limited, but is usually 0.05 parts by weight to 20 parts by weight, preferably 0.1 parts by weight to 15 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the monomer. It is more preferably contained in an amount of 0.2 parts by weight to 10 parts by weight.
- Chain transfer agents can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- various conventionally known means including the use of the chain transfer agent can be used alone or in combination as appropriate.
- Non-limiting examples of such means include selection of polymerization method, selection of type and amount of polymerization initiator, selection of polymerization temperature, selection of type and amount of polymerization solvent in solution polymerization method, and light weight. Legal selection of light irradiation intensity, etc. are included.
- a person skilled in the art can understand how to obtain a polymer having a desired molecular weight based on the description of the present specification including the specific examples described later and the common general knowledge as of the filing of the present application.
- the amount of the polymer (B) used can be, for example, 0.1 part by weight or more with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) used, and a higher effect (preferably). From the viewpoint of obtaining (light peelability at the initial stage of application), 0.5 parts by weight or more is preferable, 1 part by weight or more is more preferable, 1.5 parts by weight or more is further preferable, and 2 parts by weight or more may be used. In some embodiments, the amount of the polymer (B) used may be, for example, 3 parts by weight or more, 4 parts by weight or more, or 5 parts by weight or more, from the viewpoint of improving reworkability. ..
- the amount of the polymer (B) used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) may be, for example, 75 parts by weight or less, 30 parts by weight or less, 10 parts by weight or less, and 8 parts by weight or less. But it may be. From the viewpoint of suitably realizing the desired increase in adhesive strength, in some preferred embodiments, the amount of the polymer (B) used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is 5 parts by weight or less, more preferably 4 parts by weight. Parts or less, more preferably 3 parts by weight or less, and particularly preferably 2.5 parts by weight or less.
- the amount of the polymer (B) used relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is 1.5 parts by weight or less (eg, 1.2 parts by weight or less).
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may contain a polymer (arbitrary polymer) other than the polymer (A) and the polymer (B), if necessary, as long as the performance of the reinforcing film disclosed herein is not significantly impaired.
- the amount of such arbitrary polymer used is usually 20% by weight or less of the total polymer component contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and may be 15% by weight or less, or 10% by weight or less. In some embodiments, the amount of the optional polymer used may be 5% by weight or less of the total polymer component, 3% by weight or less, or 1% by weight or less.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be substantially free of polymers other than the polymer (A) and the polymer (B).
- a cross-linking agent may be used for the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, if necessary, for the purpose of adjusting the cohesive force or the like.
- a cross-linking agent known in the field of adhesives can be used. Examples thereof include a cross-linking agent, an alkyl etherified melamine-based cross-linking agent, a metal chelate-based cross-linking agent, and the like.
- An isocyanate-based cross-linking agent, an epoxy-based cross-linking agent, and a metal chelate-based cross-linking agent can be preferably used.
- An isocyanate-based cross-linking agent can be preferably used as a cross-linking agent that preferably achieves both bending recovery and bending holding power.
- the cross-linking agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- polyfunctional isocyanate (a compound having an average of two or more isocyanate groups per molecule, including one having an isocyanurate structure) can be preferably used.
- the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- polyfunctional isocyanates examples include aliphatic polyisocyanates, alicyclic polyisocyanates, aromatic polyisocyanates and the like.
- aliphatic polyisocyanes include 1,2-ethylene diisocyanate; 1,2-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-tetramethylene diisocyanate and other tetramethylene diisocyanates; 1,2.
- -Hexamethylene diisocyanate such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 2,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate;
- Examples thereof include 2-methyl-1,5-pentanediisocyanate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediisocyanate, and lysine diisocyanate.
- alicyclic polyisocyanates include isophorone diisocyanates; 1,2-cyclohexyldiisocyanates, 1,3-cyclohexyldiisocyanates, 1,4-cyclohexyldiisocyanates and other cyclohexyldiisocyanates; 1,2-cyclopentyldiisocyanates, 1,3.
- -Cyclopentyl diisocyanate such as cyclopentyl diisocyanate; hydrogenated xylylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated tolylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated diphenylmethane diisocyanate, hydrogenated tetramethylxylylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate, and the like.
- aromatic polyisocyanates include 2,4-toluene diisocyanate, 2,6-toluene diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 2,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, and 2,2'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate.
- polyfunctional isocyanate As a preferable polyfunctional isocyanate, a polyfunctional isocyanate having an average of 3 or more isocyanate groups per molecule is exemplified.
- trifunctional or higher functional isocyanates are addition reactions of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional isocyanate multimers (eg, dimers or trimers), derivatives (eg, polyhydric alcohols and two or more molecules of polyfunctional isocyanates). Product), polymer, etc.
- epoxy-based cross-linking agent examples include bisphenol A, epichlorohydrin-type epoxy-based resin, ethylene glycidyl ether, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, glycerin diglycidyl ether, glycerin triglycidyl ether, 1,6-hexanediol glycidyl ether, and trimethyl propanetri.
- examples include glycidyl ether, diglycidyl aniline, diamine glycidyl amine, N, N, N', N'-tetraglycidyl-m-xylylenediamine and 1,3-bis (N, N-diglycidylaminomethyl) cyclohexane. Can be done. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- metal chelate compound examples include aluminum, iron, tin, titanium, nickel and the like as metal components, and acetylene, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl lactate and the like as chelate components. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the amount used when the cross-linking agent is used is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, an amount exceeding 0 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A).
- the amount of the cross-linking agent used can be, for example, 0.01 parts by weight or more, preferably 0.05 parts by weight or more, based on 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A).
- the amount of the cross-linking agent used increases, the adhesive strength at the initial stage of application is suppressed, and the reworkability tends to be improved. It tends to be excellent in bending recovery and workability.
- the amount of the cross-linking agent used per 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) may be 0.1 parts by weight or more, 0.5 parts by weight or more, or 0.8 parts by weight. It may be the above.
- the amount of the cross-linking agent used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is usually 15 parts by weight or less. Is appropriate, and may be 10 parts by weight or less, or 5 parts by weight or less.
- the technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out in an embodiment in which at least an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent is used as the cross-linking agent.
- the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is, for example, 0.01 parts by weight in some embodiments. It can be more than 0.05 parts by weight, more preferably 0.07 parts by weight or more, and may be 0.10 parts by weight or more, and 0.15 parts by weight or more (for example, 0.20 parts by weight). It may be more than a part).
- the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) can be, for example, 5 parts by weight or less, preferably less than 1.0 part by weight, more preferably less than 0.5 parts by weight, and further. It is preferably less than 0.3 parts by weight, particularly preferably less than 0.2 parts by weight (for example, 0.15 parts by weight or less).
- the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, and thus the elastic modulus is appropriately lowered, a good bending holding force can be obtained, and an increase in the adhesive force after heating can be easily obtained.
- the molar ratio of the isocyanate group contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the hydroxyl group can be, for example, 0.001 or more.
- the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) is 0.002 or greater, more preferably 0.004 or greater, still more preferably 0.006 or greater (eg 0.007 or greater). It may be 0.010 or more, 0.020 or more, or 0.030 or more. Further, the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) can be, for example, 1.0 or less, and may be 0.10 or less. By limiting the molar ratio to a predetermined value or less, a crosslinked structure suitable for greatly increasing the adhesive force after heating with respect to the adhesive force at the initial stage of application can be preferably formed.
- the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) is 0.030 or less, more preferably 0.015 or less, still more preferably 0.012 or less (eg 0.009 or less). Yes, it may be 0.005 or less.
- the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group may exist in a state where at least a part thereof is chemically bonded (crosslinked). More specifically, the isocyanate group may exist in a state of being chemically bonded (crosslinked) with the hydroxyl group. On the other hand, a part of the hydroxyl group may be chemically bonded to the isocyanate group, and the other part may be present in a state where it is not chemically bonded (crosslinked) to the isocyanate group.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer comprises a catalyst.
- the catalyst may be added for the purpose of promoting the curing of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer during the formation of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, typically for the purpose of more effectively advancing any of the above-mentioned cross-linking reactions. Therefore, the catalyst is also referred to as a curing catalyst or a cross-linking catalyst. By adding a catalyst, initial curing is promoted, and side reactions that cause bubbles on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be suppressed.
- the catalyst examples include organic metal-based compounds such as iron-based catalysts, tin-based catalysts, titanium-based catalysts, zirconium-based catalysts, lead-based catalysts, cobalt-based catalysts, and zinc-based catalysts, and tertiary amine compounds. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among them, an iron-based catalyst and a tin-based catalyst are preferable, and an iron-based catalyst is particularly preferable, from the viewpoint of the balance between the reaction rate and the pot life.
- organic metal-based compounds such as iron-based catalysts, tin-based catalysts, titanium-based catalysts, zirconium-based catalysts, lead-based catalysts, cobalt-based catalysts, and zinc-based catalysts, and tertiary amine compounds. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among them, an iron-based catalyst and a tin-based catalyst are preferable, and an iron-based catalyst is particularly preferable, from the viewpoint of the balance between
- iron-based catalyst examples include iron acetylacetonate and iron 2-ethylhexanoate.
- the iron-based catalyst may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- tin-based catalyst examples include dibutyltin dichloride, dibutyltin oxide, dibutyltin dibromide, dibutyltin maleate, dibutyltin dilaurate, dibutyltin diacetate, dibutyltin sulfide, tributyltin methoxyde, tributyltin acetate, and triethyltinethoxydo.
- tributyl tin ethoxydo examples thereof include tributyl tin ethoxydo, dioctyl tin oxide, dioctyl tin dilaurate, tributyl tin chloride, tributyl tin trichloroacetate, tin 2-ethylhexanoate and the like.
- the tin-based catalyst may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the amount of the catalyst used is not particularly limited and can be, for example, 0.0001 parts by weight or more, preferably 0.001 parts by weight or more, and more preferably 0.003 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). It is 0 parts by weight or more, more preferably 0.006 parts by weight or more, and particularly preferably 0.008 parts by weight or more.
- the amount of the catalyst used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) can be, for example, 1 part by weight or less, and may be 0.1 part by weight or less.
- the amount of catalyst used per 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is 0.03 parts by weight or less, more preferably 0.02 parts by weight or less, still more preferably 0.01 parts by weight or less. Yes, it may be 0.005 part by weight or less.
- the amount of the catalyst used is the molar ratio of the catalyst and the hydroxyl group contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer ([catalyst]. / [OH]) can be, for example, 1.0 ⁇ 10 -6 or more, preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 -5 or more, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 -4 or more, still more preferable. Is an amount of 2.0 ⁇ 10 -4 or more, particularly preferably 3.0 ⁇ 10 -4 or more.
- the molar ratio ([catalyst] / [OH]) can be, for example, 5.0 ⁇ 10-2 or less, and may be 5.0 ⁇ 10 -3 or less. In some preferred embodiments, the molar ratio ([catalyst] / [OH]) is 3.0 ⁇ 10 -3 or less, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 -3 or less, still more preferably 5.0. It may be ⁇ 10 -4 or less, and may be 3.0 ⁇ 10 -4 or less. By appropriately limiting the content of the catalyst, it is easy to realize a suitable increase in adhesive strength.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may contain a pressure-sensitive adhesive resin, if necessary.
- the tackifier resin is not particularly limited, and for example, a rosin-based tackifier resin, a terpene-based tackifier resin, a phenol-based tackifier resin, a hydrocarbon-based tackifier resin, a ketone-based tackifier resin, a polyamide-based tackifier resin, etc. Examples thereof include an epoxy-based adhesive-imparting resin and an elastomer-based adhesive-imparting resin.
- the tackifier resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the content of the adhesive-imparting resin is not particularly limited, and can be set so as to exhibit appropriate adhesive performance according to the purpose and application.
- the content of the tackifier resin with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) (when two or more kinds of tackifier resins are included, the total amount thereof) can be, for example, about 5 to 500 parts by weight. Further, the technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out in an embodiment in which the amount of the tackifier resin used is limited.
- the content of the tackifier resin with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) can be less than 20 parts by weight, may be less than 10 parts by weight, may be less than 3 parts by weight, and may be less than 1 part by weight ( It may be from 0 part by weight to less than 1 part by weight), and in some embodiments, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer does not substantially contain the tack-imparting resin.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the technique disclosed herein is a leveling agent, a plasticizer, a softening agent, a colorant (dye, pigment, etc.), a filler, and an antistatic agent, to the extent that the effects of the present invention are not significantly impaired.
- Anti-aging agents, UV absorbers, antioxidants, light stabilizers, preservatives and the like which may contain known additives that can be used as adhesives, if necessary.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer constituting the reinforcing film disclosed herein may be a cured layer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. That is, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed by applying (for example, coating) a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition such as a water-dispersed type, a solvent type, a photo-curing type, or a hot-melt type to an appropriate surface, and then appropriately performing a curing treatment. obtain. When performing two or more types of curing treatments (drying, crosslinking, polymerization, cooling, etc.), these can be performed simultaneously or in multiple steps.
- a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition such as a water-dispersed type, a solvent type, a photo-curing type, or a hot-melt type
- a final copolymerization reaction is typically performed as the above-mentioned curing treatment. That is, the partial polymer is subjected to a further copolymerization reaction to form a complete polymer.
- a photocurable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition light irradiation is performed.
- hardening treatment such as crosslinking and drying may be carried out.
- photo-curing after drying when it is necessary to dry with a photocurable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, it is preferable to perform photo-curing after drying.
- treatments such as drying (heat drying) and cross-linking are carried out as necessary.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition can be applied using a conventional coater such as a gravure roll coater, a reverse roll coater, a kiss roll coater, a dip roll coater, a bar coater, a knife coater, or a spray coater.
- a conventional coater such as a gravure roll coater, a reverse roll coater, a kiss roll coater, a dip roll coater, a bar coater, a knife coater, or a spray coater.
- the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited and can be, for example, 6 ⁇ m or more. In some embodiments, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be 8 ⁇ m or greater, 10 ⁇ m or greater, 15 ⁇ m or greater, 20 ⁇ m or greater, or greater than 20 ⁇ m. As the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer increases, the pressure-sensitive adhesive strength tends to increase after heating. Further, in some embodiments, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be, for example, 300 ⁇ m or less, 200 ⁇ m or less, 150 ⁇ m or less, 100 ⁇ m or less, 70 ⁇ m or less, 50 ⁇ m or less, 40 ⁇ m or less. It may be as follows.
- a reinforcing film having an adhesive layer having a thickness within the above range can have a good balance of adhesive properties such as adhesive strength, bending recovery property, and bending holding force.
- the thickness of the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is at least the thickness of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
- the thickness of the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be selected from the same range. Further, in the case of a base material-less reinforcing film, the thickness of the reinforcing film coincides with the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
- the reinforcing film may be in the form of a substrate-based pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having an pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on one or both sides of a supporting base material.
- the material of the supporting base material is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose of use, the mode of use, and the like of the reinforcing film.
- Non-limiting examples of base materials that can be used include resin films such as plastic films; foam sheets made of foams such as polyurethane foams, polyethylene foams, and polychloroprene foams; various fibrous substances (linen, cotton, etc.).
- a base material having a composite structure thereof may be used. Examples of such a composite base material include a base material having a structure in which a metal foil and the above plastic film are laminated, a plastic base material reinforced with an inorganic fiber such as glass cloth, and the like.
- the film base material may be a porous base material such as a foam film or a non-woven fabric sheet, or may be a non-porous base material, and may be a porous layer and a non-porous layer. It may be a base material having a laminated structure.
- a film containing an independently shape-maintainable (self-supporting or independent) resin film as a base film can be preferably used as the film substrate.
- the term "resin film” means a resin film (of voidless) having a non-porous structure and typically containing substantially no bubbles.
- the resin film is a concept that is distinguished from foam films and non-woven fabrics.
- the resin film one that can independently maintain its shape (self-supporting or independent) can be preferably used.
- the resin film may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure having two or more layers (for example, a three-layer structure).
- the resin material constituting the resin film examples include polyamide (PA) such as polyester, polyolefin, nylon 6, nylon 66, and partially aromatic polyamide, polyimide (PI), polyamideimide (PAI), and polyetheretherketone (PEEK). ), Polyethersulfone (PES), Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), Polycarbonate (PC), Polyurethane (PU), Ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and other fluororesins and acrylic resins.
- PA polyamide
- PPS Polyphenylene sulfide
- PC Polycarbonate
- EVA Ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer
- PTFE Polytetrafluoroethylene
- Polyacrylate, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride and the like can be used.
- the resin film may be formed by using a resin material containing one kind of such a resin alone, or may be formed by using a resin material in which two or more kinds are blended. good.
- the resin film may be unstretched or stretched (for example, uniaxially stretched or biaxially stretched).
- the resin material constituting the resin film include polyimide-based resin, polyester-based resin, PPS resin, and polyolefin-based resin.
- the polyimide-based resin refers to a resin containing polyimide in a proportion of more than 50% by weight.
- the polyester-based resin refers to a resin containing polyester in a proportion of more than 50% by weight
- the PPS resin refers to a resin containing PPS in a proportion of more than 50% by weight, and is a polyolefin-based resin. Refers to a resin containing polyolefin in a proportion of more than 50% by weight.
- polyester resin examples include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polybutylene naphthalate and the like.
- polyolefin resin one kind of polyolefin can be used alone, or two or more kinds of polyolefins can be used in combination.
- the polyolefin can be, for example, a homopolymer of an ⁇ -olefin, a copolymer of two or more kinds of ⁇ -olefins, a copolymer of one or more kinds of ⁇ -olefins and another vinyl monomer, and the like.
- Specific examples include polyethylene-propylene copolymers such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), poly-1-butene, poly-4-methyl-1-pentene, and ethylene propylene rubber (EPR), and ethylene-propylene-.
- Examples thereof include a butene copolymer, an ethylene-butene copolymer, an ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer, and an ethylene-ethyl acrylate copolymer. Both low density (LD) polyolefins and high density (HD) polyolefins can be used.
- polyolefin resin films include unstretched polypropylene (CPP) film, biaxially stretched polypropylene (OPP) film, low density polyethylene (LDPE) film, linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE) film, medium density polyethylene (MDPE).
- Examples thereof include a film, a high-density polyethylene (HDPE) film, a polyethylene (PE) film in which two or more kinds of polyethylene (PE) are blended, a PP / PE blend film in which polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) are blended, and the like.
- HDPE high-density polyethylene
- PE polyethylene
- PE polypropylene
- PE polyethylene
- resin film that can be preferably used as the base film of the reinforcing film disclosed herein include PI film, PET film, PEN film, PPS film, PEEK film, CPP film and OPP film.
- Known resin films include light stabilizers, antioxidants, antistatic agents, colorants (dyees, pigments, etc.), fillers, slip agents, antiblocking agents, etc., as long as the effects of the present invention are not significantly impaired.
- Additives can be added as needed.
- the blending amount of the additive is not particularly limited and can be appropriately set according to the purpose and the like.
- the method for manufacturing the resin film is not particularly limited.
- conventionally known general resin film molding methods such as extrusion molding, inflation molding, T-die casting molding, and calender roll molding can be appropriately adopted.
- the base material may be substantially composed of such a base film.
- the base material may include an auxiliary layer in addition to the base film.
- the auxiliary layer include an optical property adjusting layer (for example, a colored layer and an antireflection layer), a printing layer or a laminating layer for imparting a desired appearance to a substrate, an antistatic layer, an undercoat layer, and a peeling layer. Such as a surface treatment layer.
- the thickness of the base material is not particularly limited and can be selected according to the purpose and mode of use of the reinforcing film.
- the thickness of the substrate can be, for example, 1000 ⁇ m or less. In some embodiments, the thickness of the substrate may be, for example, 500 ⁇ m or less, 300 ⁇ m or less, or 250 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of handleability and processability of the reinforcing film. It may be 200 ⁇ m or less. From the viewpoint of miniaturization and weight reduction of the product to which the reinforcing film is applied, in some embodiments, the thickness of the base material may be, for example, 160 ⁇ m or less, 130 ⁇ m or less, or 100 ⁇ m or less.
- the thickness of the base material may be, for example, 2 ⁇ m or more, 5 ⁇ m or more, 10 ⁇ m or more, 20 ⁇ m or more, 25 ⁇ m or more, or 25 ⁇ m or more.
- the thickness of the substrate may be, for example, 30 ⁇ m or more, 35 ⁇ m or more, 55 ⁇ m or more, 70 ⁇ m or more, 75 ⁇ m or more, 90 ⁇ m or more, 120 ⁇ m or more. ..
- a base material having a thickness of 30 ⁇ m or more can be preferably adopted.
- the first surface of the base material is a conventionally known surface such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, and formation of an undercoat layer by applying a primer, if necessary. It may be treated.
- a surface treatment may be a treatment for improving the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the substrate.
- a base material subjected to such anchoring property improving treatment can be preferably adopted.
- the above surface treatments can be applied alone or in combination.
- the composition of the primer used for forming the undercoat layer is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known ones.
- the thickness of the undercoat layer is not particularly limited, but is usually about 0.01 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m, preferably about 0.1 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m.
- Other treatments that can be applied to the first surface of the substrate as needed include antistatic layer forming treatments, colored layer forming treatments, printing treatments and the like.
- the second side of the base material may be subjected to peeling treatment or antistatic treatment, if necessary.
- Conventionally known surface treatment such as treatment may be applied.
- a release treatment agent typically, by providing a release layer with a release treatment agent
- the rewinding force of the reinforcing film in the form of being wound in a roll shape. Can be lightened.
- a silicone-based stripping agent a long-chain alkyl-based stripping agent, an olefin-based stripping agent, a fluorine-based stripping agent, a fatty acid amide-based stripping agent, molybdenum sulfide, silica powder, or the like can be used. ..
- the second surface of the base material is subjected to treatments such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, and alkali treatment. It may have been done.
- the second surface of the base material is subjected to the same surface treatment as those exemplified above as the surface treatment that can be applied to the first surface of the base material, if necessary. May be good.
- the surface treatment applied to the first surface of the base material and the surface treatment applied to the second surface may be the same or different.
- the initial adhesive force N 23 measured after being bonded to a stainless steel plate and held at 23 ° C. for 30 minutes is limited to a predetermined value or less.
- the adhesive force N 23 is preferably, for example, less than 500 gf / 25 mm, more preferably less than 400 gf / 25 mm, still more preferably less than 300 gf / 25 mm, particularly preferably 250 gf / 25 mm or less (eg 200 gf /). 25 mm or less), and may be 150 gf / 25 mm or less.
- a low adhesive force N 23 is preferable from the viewpoint of reworkability.
- the lower limit of the adhesive force N 23 is not particularly limited and may be, for example, 1 gf / 25 mm or more.
- the adhesive strength N 23 is usually preferably 10 gf / 25 mm or more from the viewpoint of sticking workability to the adherend and prevention of positional deviation before the adhesive strength increases. From the viewpoint of improving the adhesive strength after heating, in some embodiments, the adhesive strength N 23 may be, for example, 20 gf / 25 mm or more, 50 gf / 25 mm or more, 80 gf / 25 mm or more, 100 gf / 25 mm or more. The above (for example, 150 gf / 25 mm or more) may be used.
- the adhesive strength N 23 [gf / 25 mm] is applied by crimping to a stainless steel (SUS) plate as an adherend and leaving it in an environment of 23 ° C. and 50% RH for 30 minutes, and then in the same environment (that is, at 23 ° C.). ), The peeling angle is 180 degrees, and the tensile speed is 300 mm / min.
- a SUS304BA plate is used as the adherend.
- an appropriate backing material for example, a PET film having a thickness of about 25 ⁇ m
- the adhesive strength N 23 can be measured according to the method for measuring the initial adhesive strength described in Examples described later.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein has an adhesive strength that increases by heating, for example, an adhesive strength of N60 of 300 gf / 25 mm or more, that is, after being bonded to a stainless steel plate and held at 60 ° C. for 60 minutes, at 23 ° C. It can indicate the adhesive strength to be measured.
- N 60 is 400 gf / 25 mm or more and 500 gf / 25 mm or more.
- the adhesive strength is increased to a predetermined value or more by heating. According to the technique disclosed herein, it is possible to obtain a strong adhesive force by heating.
- the adhesive force N 60 is 600 gf / 25 mm or more, more preferably 700 gf / 25 mm or more, 800 gf / 25 mm or more, or 900 gf / 25 mm or more.
- the upper limit of the adhesive strength N 60 is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of ease of manufacturing and economic efficiency of the reinforcing film, the adhesive strength N 60 may be, for example, 3000 gf / 25 mm or less, 1500 gf / 25 mm or less, or 1000 gf / 25 mm or less in some embodiments.
- the adhesive strength N 60 [gf / 25 mm] is pressure-bonded to a SUS plate as an adherend and held in an environment of 60 ° C. for 60 minutes, and then left in an environment of 23 ° C. and 50% RH for 30 minutes, and then in the same environment.
- 180 ° peeling adhesive force is measured under the conditions of a peeling angle of 180 degrees and a tensile speed of 300 mm / min.
- a SUS304BA plate is used as in the case of the adhesive strength N 23 .
- an appropriate backing material for example, a PET film having a thickness of about 25 ⁇ m
- the adhesive strength N 60 can be measured according to the method for measuring the adhesive strength after heating described in Examples described later.
- the ratio of the adhesive force N 60 [gf / 25 mm] to the adhesive force N 23 [gf / 25 mm], that is, the adhesive force increase ratio N 60 / N 23 is not particularly limited, and in some embodiments, the N 60 / N 23 Is 15 or more, preferably 2.0 or more, more preferably 2.5 or more, still more preferably 3.0 or more (for example, 3.5 or more), and 5 It may be more than 0.0 (for example, more than 7.0). According to the reinforcing film having a large N 60 / N 23 , good reworkability is exhibited at the initial stage of application, and the adhesive strength can be greatly increased by subsequent heating or the like.
- the upper limit of N 60 / N 23 is not particularly limited, and is usually 100 or less.
- N 60 / N 23 may be, for example, 5 or less, 3 or less, or 2 or less.
- the post-heating adhesive force of the reinforcing film disclosed herein represents one characteristic of the reinforcing film, and does not limit the usage mode of the reinforcing film.
- the mode of use of the reinforcing film disclosed herein is not limited to the mode of heating at 60 ° C. for 60 minutes, for example, in the room temperature range (usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., typically 23 ° C. to 23 ° C.). It can also be used in a mode in which the treatment of heating to 25 ° C. or higher is not particularly performed. Even in such a usage mode, the adhesive strength is increased in a long period of time, and a strong bond can be realized.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein promotes an increase in adhesive strength by performing a heat treatment at an arbitrary timing after application at a temperature higher than 30 ° C (for example, about 50 to 70 ° C) or 60 ° C. be able to.
- the heating temperature in such a heat treatment is not particularly limited, and can be set in consideration of workability, economy, heat resistance of the base material of the reinforcing film and the adherend, and the like.
- the heating temperature may be, for example, less than 150 ° C., 120 ° C. or lower, 100 ° C. or lower, 80 ° C. or lower, or 70 ° C. or lower. Further, the heating temperature can be, for example, 40 ° C. or higher, 45 ° C.
- the heating time is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 3 hours or less, 1 hour or less, 30 minutes or less, or 10 minutes or less.
- the heating time may be, for example, 1 minute or longer, 15 minutes or longer, 30 minutes or longer, or 1 hour or longer.
- the heat treatment may be performed for a longer period of time as long as the reinforcing film or the adherend is not significantly deteriorated by heat.
- the heat treatment may be performed at one time or may be performed in a plurality of times.
- the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 1000 ⁇ m or less, 600 ⁇ m or less, or 350 ⁇ m or less. It may be 250 ⁇ m or less. From the viewpoint of miniaturization, weight reduction, thinning, etc. of the product to which the reinforcing film is applied, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 200 ⁇ m or less, even if it is 175 ⁇ m or less, in some embodiments. It may be 140 ⁇ m or less, 120 ⁇ m or less, or 100 ⁇ m or less (for example, less than 100 ⁇ m).
- the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 5 ⁇ m or more, 10 ⁇ m or more, 15 ⁇ m or more, 20 ⁇ m or more, 25 ⁇ m or more, or 30 ⁇ m or more from the viewpoint of handleability and the like. In some embodiments, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 50 ⁇ m or more, 60 ⁇ m or more, 80 ⁇ m or more, 100 ⁇ m or more, or 120 ⁇ m or more. The upper limit of the thickness of the reinforcing film is not particularly limited. The thickness of the reinforcing film means the thickness of the portion to be attached to the adherend. For example, in the reinforcing film 1 having the configuration shown in FIG. 1, it refers to the thickness from the adhesive surface 21A of the reinforcing film 1 to the second surface 10B of the base material 10, and does not include the thickness of the release liner 31.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be suitably implemented, for example, in an embodiment in which the thickness Ts of the supporting base material is larger than the thickness Ta of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, that is, the Ts / Ta is larger than 1.
- Ts / Ta may be, for example, 1.1 or more, 1.2 or more, 1.5 or more, or 1.7 or more. May be good.
- Ts / Ta may be 2 or greater (eg, greater than 2), 2.5 or greater, or 2.8 or greater.
- Ts / Ta may be, for example, 50 or less, or 20 or less.
- the Ts / Ta may be, for example, 10 or less, 8 or less, or 5 or less, from the viewpoint of facilitating the high adhesive strength after heating even if the reinforcing film is made thin.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably adhered to a supporting base material.
- “sticking” means that in a reinforcing film whose adhesive strength has increased after being attached to an adherend, peeling occurs at the interface between the adhesive layer and the supporting base material when the reinforcing film is peeled from the adherend. It means that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer exhibits sufficient anchoring property with respect to the supporting base material to the extent that it does not exist. According to the reinforcing film with a base material in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is fixed to the support base material, the adherend and the support base material can be firmly integrated.
- peeling (anchor failure) between the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the supporting base material does not occur during the above-mentioned measurement of the adhesive force after heating.
- Examples include reinforcing films.
- a reinforcing film in which anchoring failure does not occur when measuring the adhesive force after heating is a suitable example corresponding to a reinforcing film in which the adhesive layer is adhered to a base material.
- a liquid pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is brought into contact with the first surface of a base material, and the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is cured on the first surface to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
- It can be preferably produced by a method including forming and in this order. Curing of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition may involve one or more of drying, cross-linking, polymerization, cooling, etc. of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
- the method of forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by curing the liquid pressure-sensitive adhesive composition on the first surface of the base material the cured pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is bonded to the first surface of the base material.
- the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the base material can be enhanced. Utilizing this, a reinforcing film in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is adhered to the base material can be suitably manufactured.
- a method of directly applying the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to the first surface of the base material can be adopted.
- the first surface (adhesive surface) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer cured on the first surface of the base material into contact with the peeling surface, the second surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is fixed to the first surface of the base material.
- a reinforcing film having a structure in which the first surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is in contact with the peeling surface.
- the peeling surface the surface of the peeling liner, the back surface of the base material that has been peeled off, or the like can be used.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied to a peeling surface and then the applied pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied.
- the uncured adhesive composition is brought into contact with the first surface of the base material, and in that state, it is sandwiched between the first surface of the base material and the peeled surface.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be formed by irradiating the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition with light to cure the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
- an appropriate method capable of fixing the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the first surface of the base material can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- examples of such methods include a method of curing a liquid pressure-sensitive adhesive composition on the first surface of a substrate to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer as described above, and a method of forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the first surface of a substrate.
- Examples thereof include a method of applying a surface treatment that enhances the anchoring property.
- the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the base material can be sufficiently improved by a method such as providing an undercoat layer on the first surface of the base material
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer after curing is used as the first surface of the base material.
- a reinforcing film may be manufactured by a method of adhering to.
- the anchorability of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the base material can be improved by selecting the material of the base material and the composition of the pressure-sensitive adhesive.
- the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the base material can be enhanced.
- the temperature applied to enhance the anchoring property may be, for example, about 35 ° C. to 80 ° C., 40 ° C. to 70 ° C. or higher, or 45 ° C. to 60 ° C.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein is a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having a first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer provided on the first surface of the base material and a second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer provided on the second surface of the base material (that is,).
- the first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may have the same configuration or different configurations.
- the difference may be, for example, a difference in composition or a difference in structure (thickness, surface roughness, formation range, formation pattern, etc.).
- the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer that does not contain the polymer (B).
- the surface of the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may have a surface elastic modulus outside the range of 1 to 20 kPa (for example, more than 20 kPa) at 23 ° C., or may be 30 kPa or more.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein may take the form of an adhesive product in which the surface (adhesive surface) of the adhesive layer is brought into contact with the release surface of the release liner. Accordingly, this specification may provide a reinforcing film with a release liner comprising any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein and a release liner having a release surface that abuts on the adhesive surface of the reinforcement film. ..
- the thickness of the release liner is not particularly limited, but is usually about 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m. When the thickness of the release liner is within the above range, it is preferable because it is excellent in the workability of bonding to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the workability of peeling off from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. In some embodiments, the thickness of the release liner may be, for example, 10 ⁇ m or more, 20 ⁇ m or more, 30 ⁇ m or more, or 40 ⁇ m or more. Further, the thickness of the release liner may be, for example, 100 ⁇ m or less, or 80 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of facilitating the release from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. If necessary, the release liner may be subjected to a known antistatic treatment such as a coating type, a kneading type, and a thin-film deposition type.
- a known antistatic treatment such as a coating type, a kneading type, and a thin-film deposition type.
- the release liner is not particularly limited, and is, for example, a release liner having a release layer on the surface of a liner base material such as a resin film or paper (paper on which a resin such as polyethylene is laminated) or a fluoropolymer.
- a release liner made of a resin film formed of a low adhesive material such as (polytetrafluoroethylene, etc.) or a polyolefin resin (polyethylene, polypropylene, etc.) can be used. Since the surface smoothness is excellent, a release liner having a release layer on the surface of the resin film as a liner base material or a release liner made of a resin film formed of a low adhesive material can be preferably adopted.
- the resin film is not particularly limited as long as it can protect the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and is, for example, a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polybutene film, a polybutadiene film, a polymethylpentene film, a polyvinyl chloride film, or a vinyl chloride copolymer.
- a polyethylene film a polypropylene film
- a polybutene film a polybutadiene film
- a polymethylpentene film a polyvinyl chloride film
- vinyl chloride copolymer examples thereof include films, polyester films (PET films, PBT films, etc.), polyurethane films, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer films, and the like.
- a silicone-based stripping agent for example, a silicone-based stripping agent, a long-chain alkyl-based stripping agent, an olefin-based stripping agent, a fluorine-based stripping agent, a fatty acid amide-based stripping agent, molybdenum sulfide, silica powder, or the like can be used.
- a known stripping agent can be used.
- the use of a silicone-based stripping agent is particularly preferred.
- the thickness of the peeling layer is not particularly limited, but usually about 0.01 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m is appropriate, and about 0.1 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m is preferable.
- the method for forming the release layer is not particularly limited, and a known method according to the type of the release treatment agent to be used can be appropriately adopted.
- the reinforcing film provided by this specification can exhibit good reworkability at the initial stage of being attached to the adherend, for example, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in yield and to increase the height of the product containing the reinforcing film. Can contribute to quality improvement.
- the adhesive strength can be greatly increased by aging or heating.
- the reinforcing film can be firmly adhered to the adherend by heating at an appropriate timing after being attached to the adherend. Taking advantage of these characteristics, the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably used for the purpose of reinforcing members contained in various products in various fields.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein is, for example, an adherend in the form of an adhesive sheet with a substrate having an adhesive layer provided on at least the first surface of a film-like substrate having a first surface and a second surface. It can be preferably used as a reinforcing film which is attached to and reinforces the adherend.
- a film containing a resin film as a base film can be preferably used as the film base material.
- the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is adhered to the first surface of the film-like substrate.
- optical members used in optical products and electronic members used in electronic products advanced integration, miniaturization, weight reduction, and thinning are progressing, and a plurality of thin optical members having different linear expansion coefficients and thicknesses / Electronic members can be stacked.
- the reinforcing film as described above it is possible to impart appropriate rigidity to the optical member / electronic member.
- processing is performed by attaching a reinforcing film to the member. It is possible to alleviate the local stress concentration on the optical member / electronic member and reduce the risk of cracks, cracks, peeling of laminated members, and the like. Handling a reinforcing member by attaching it to an optical member / electronic member also reduces local stress concentration during transportation, stacking, rotation, etc. of the member, and suppresses bending or bending due to the weight of the member. Can be useful.
- devices such as optical products and electronic products containing the above-mentioned reinforcing film collide with flying objects when the device is dropped or placed under a heavy object at the stage of being used by consumers in the market.
- the stress applied to the device can be relieved by including the reinforcing film in the device. Therefore, the inclusion of the reinforcing film in the device can improve the durability of the device.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably used, for example, in a manner of being attached to a member constituting various portable devices (portable devices).
- portable means that it is not enough to be portable, but that an individual (standard adult) has a level of portability that is relatively easy to carry. do.
- portable devices include mobile phones, smartphones, tablet PCs, notebook PCs, various wearable devices, digital cameras, digital video cameras, sound devices (portable music players, IC recorders, etc.), and calculators (portable music players, IC recorders, etc.).
- the portable electronic device may include an optical film or a display panel used for an image display device such as a thin layer display such as a liquid crystal display or a film type display.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein can also be preferably used in a mode of being attached to various members in automobiles, home appliances and the like.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein has bending recovery and bending holding force, it is possible to take advantage of its features to bendable elements (for example, flexible devices such as flexible displays, rollable devices and foldable devices). It can also be preferably used in a manner of being attached to a member constituting a device provided with). Examples of such a device include the above-mentioned various portable devices (portable devices). Examples of the members constituting the portable electronic device may include an optical film, a display panel, or the like used in an image display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein is preferable for reinforcing applications of members constituting the device (typically, an image display device referred to as a flexible device or a foldable device) in such a portable electronic device. Can be used.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein reinforces the optical member used as a component of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, a plasma display panel (PDP), an organic EL display, etc., at the time of manufacturing, transporting, or the like. Suitable for applications. It is useful as a reinforcing film applied to optical members such as polarizing plates (polarizing films) for liquid crystal display panels, wave plates, retardation plates, optical compensation films, brightness improving films, light diffusing sheets, and reflective sheets.
- polarizing plates polarizing films
- the use of the reinforcing film disclosed herein is not particularly limited, and can be used for various purposes such as imparting rigidity and impact resistance.
- the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably used not only for flexible device applications as described above, but also for other applications that do not include flexible devices.
- the fact that the reinforcing film has bending recovery and bending holding force means that the range of application of the reinforcing film is not limited, and this has a great practical advantage.
- MMA is methyl methacrylate (Tg 105 ° C.)
- nBMA is n-butyl methacrylate (Tg 20 ° C.)
- 2EHMA is 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (Tg-10 ° C.)
- iBMA is isobutyl methacrylate (Tg 48 ° C.).
- CHMA is cyclohexyl methacrylate (Tg66 ° C.)
- X-22-174ASX is a polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer (trade name: X-22-174ASX, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., functional group equivalent 900 g / mol)
- KF- 2012 represents a polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer (trade name: KF-2012, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., functional group equivalent of 4600 g / mol).
- composition of the monomer components used in the preparation of the polymers B1 to B6 and the Tg ( TB ) of the polymers B1 to B6 are summarized in Table 1.
- the Mw of each of the above-mentioned polymers was measured under the following conditions using a GPC device (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, HLC-8220GPC), and was determined by polystyrene conversion.
- GPC conditions -Sample concentration: 0.2 wt% (tetrahydrofuran (THF) solution) -Sample injection volume: 10 ⁇ L ⁇ Eluent: THF ⁇ Flow rate: 0.6 mL / min ⁇ Measurement temperature: 40 ° C ⁇ column: Sample column; TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H (1) + TSKgel SuperHZM-H (2) Reference column; TSKgel SuperH-RC (1) -Detector: Differential refractometer (RI)
- Example 1 [Making a reinforcing film] ⁇ Example 1> Add 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1, 2.0 parts of polymer B1, and 0.10 part of isocyanate compound C1 (trade name "Coronate HX", manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content, and add 0.10 part of the total solid content. was diluted with ethyl acetate so as to have a concentration of 30% to obtain an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example.
- isocyanate compound C1 trade name "Coronate HX", manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
- a release liner (trade name "Diafoil MRF75”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a polyester resin having a thickness of 75 ⁇ m and having a silicone treatment on one side was prepared, and the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution obtained above was prepared on the silicone-treated surface. was applied and dried at 130 ° C. for 1 minute to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a thickness of 25 ⁇ m.
- a polyimide base material having a thickness of 50 ⁇ m (trade name “UPIREX 50S”, manufactured by Ube Industries, Ltd.) was bonded to the surface of the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to obtain a reinforcing film according to this example.
- This reinforcing film has an adhesive layer on one side of a base material, and has the form of an adhesive sheet with a release liner in which the release surface of the release liner is in contact with the adhesive surface.
- the molar ratio ([NCO]) of the reinforcing film of this example is based on the amount of OH (the number of moles of hydroxyl groups in the acrylic polymer A1) and the amount of NCO (the number of moles of isocyanate groups of the isocyanate compound) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. / [OH]) was calculated and found to be 0.008.
- Example 2 The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer B2 (Example 2) and the polymer B3 (Example 3) were used instead of the polymer B1.
- a reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
- Example 4 As shown in Table 2, the amount of the isocyanate compound C1 used was 0.015 parts (Example 4), 0.05 parts (Example 5), 0.
- the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the parts were changed to 20 parts (Example 6) and 0.60 parts (Example 7).
- a reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
- Example 8 As shown in Table 2, the amount of the polymer B1 used is 1.0 part (Example 8), 3.0 parts (Example 9), and 6.0 parts (Example) with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A1.
- An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that it was changed to 10).
- a reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
- Example 11 An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the acrylic polymer A2 was used instead of the acrylic polymer A1.
- the reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
- Acrylic polymer A3 is used instead of acrylic polymer A1, and isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Kagaku Co., Ltd.) is used as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content for 100 parts of acrylic polymer A3.
- An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that 0.07 part was used.
- the reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
- Example 13 As shown in Table 2, the amount of the isocyanate compound C2 used was changed to 0.09 part in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A3, and the same as in Example 12, the acrylic according to this example. A system adhesive solution was obtained.
- the reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
- Acrylic polymer A4 is used instead of acrylic polymer A1, and isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Kagaku Co., Ltd.) is used as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content for 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4.
- An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that 0.50 part was used.
- the reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
- Example 14 An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer B4 was used instead of the polymer B1.
- the reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
- a release liner R1 (trade name "Diafoil MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a 75 ⁇ m thick polyester resin with a silicone treatment on one side was prepared, and the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive according to each example was prepared on the silicone-treated surface. The solution was applied and dried at 130 ° C. for 1 minute to form a 25 ⁇ m-thick pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Next, on the surface of the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, a release liner R2 (trade name "Diafoil MRE75”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a polyester resin having a thickness of 75 ⁇ m, which was treated with silicone on one side, was applied to the silicone-treated surface.
- a release liner R2 (trade name "Diafoil MRE75”, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a polyester resin having a thickness of 75 ⁇ m, which was treated with silicone on one side, was applied to the silicone-treated surface.
- the storage elastic modulus G'80 at G " 80/80 ° C. was determined.
- -Measurement mode Shear mode-Temperature range: -70 ° C to 200 ° C ⁇ Temperature rise rate: 5 ° C / min ⁇ Frequency: 1Hz
- the loss elastic modulus G ′′ corresponds to the loss energy portion dissipated by internal friction or the like when the material is deformed, and represents the degree of viscosity.
- the reinforcing film according to each example was aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day, and the release liner was cut into a width of 25 mm and a length of 140 mm as a measurement sample.
- the release liner was peeled off from the measurement sample to expose the adhesive surface, and a 2 kg hand roller was reciprocated once on a stainless steel plate (SUS304BA plate) as an adherend and crimped.
- the measurement sample crimped to the adherend in this way was left at an ambient temperature of 23 ° C. for 30 minutes, and then a tensile tester (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, trade name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm / min high-speed model").
- the bending angle [°] of the above measurement sample was measured to evaluate the bending recovery.
- the bending angle is the opening angle of the measurement sample (the angle on the side where the measurement sample opens from the bent state). The closer it is to 180 °, the better the bending recovery property, and the closer the bending angle is to 0 °. Flexibility is inferior.
- Table 2 shows the evaluation results for the reinforcing films according to Examples 1 to 13 and Comparative Examples 1 to 5.
- Table 2 also shows an outline of the composition of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to each example.
- Example 14 evaluation results of the bending recovery property and the recovery holding power of the reinforcing film according to Example 14 are shown in Table 3 together with the outline of Example 14 (composition and characteristics of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer).
- the pressure-sensitive adhesives according to Examples 1 to 13 contain a polymer (A) and a polymer (B), and the Tg of the polymer (B) is ⁇ 20 ° C. to 5 ° C. It was within range.
- the reinforcing films according to these examples have lower initial adhesive strength and increased adhesive strength after heating as compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2 in which the Tg of the polymer (B) was outside the range of ⁇ 20 ° C. to 5 ° C. It was a better match.
- the elastic modulus at 23 ° C. of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was in the range of 1 to 20 kPa, and the bending recovery property and the bending holding force were good.
- Comparative Examples 3 to 5 in which the surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. was outside the range of 1 to 20 kPa, peeling was observed in the bending retention test.
- Examples 5 to 7 are superior in bending recovery to Example 4, have a surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. of 2 kPa or more, and have a tan ⁇ 80 at 80 ° C. in the range of 0.10 to 0.60. rice field. Further, in Example 7, both the surface elastic modulus and the bulk elastic modulus were high, and the increase in adhesive strength after heating was relatively low as compared with Examples 4 to 6. Further, in Examples 4 to 6, no difference in the bulk elastic modulus G'23 at 23 ° C.
- Examples 1 to 7 the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of Examples 1 to 3, 5 to 6 in which the initial adhesive force, the adhesive force after heating, the bending recovery property and the bending holding force were improved in a more balanced manner.
- the molar ratio with and ([NCO] / [OH]) was in the range of 0.002 to 0.03.
- Example 14 also in Example 14 using the polymer (B) in which the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is in the range of 1 to 20 kPa and the Tg is ⁇ 1.6 ° C. It was confirmed that both bending recovery and bending holding force were compatible.
- the reinforcing film according to Example 14 has an initial adhesive force of less than 400 gf / 25 mm (specifically, less than 200 gf / 25 mm), and an amount of increase in the adhesive force after heating (adhesive force).
- the increase ratio N 60 / N 23 ) was 7 (fold), which realized the effect of the technique disclosed here.
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
- Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
- Adhesives Or Adhesive Processes (AREA)
- Laminated Bodies (AREA)
Abstract
The present invention provides a film for reinforcement, which exhibits easy separability in the initial stage after bonding to an adherend, while being capable of greatly increasing the adhesive force thereafter, and which exhibits recovery from bending and bending retainability. This film for reinforcement is provided with an adhesive layer. The adhesive layer contains a polymer (A) and a polymer (B). The polymer (B) contains a monomer unit that has a polyorganosiloxane skeleton and a (meth)acrylic monomer unit. The adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus of from 1 to 20 kPa at 23°C. In addition, the polymer (B) has a glass transition temperature TB of from -20°C to 5°C.
Description
本発明は、補強用フィルム、ならびに該補強用フィルムが貼着された光学部材および電子部材に関する。本出願は、2020年8月6日に出願された日本国特許出願2020-134188号に基づく優先権を主張しており、その出願の全内容は本明細書中に参照として組み入れられている。
The present invention relates to a reinforcing film, and an optical member and an electronic member to which the reinforcing film is attached. This application claims priority under Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-134188 filed on August 6, 2020, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
粘着剤は、粘着シートの形態で、被着体同士の接着や、被着体への物品の固定等の目的で、携帯電話、スマートフォン、タブレット型パソコン等の携帯電子機器その他の電子機器等の各種用途に広く用いられている。例えば、上記機器を構成する光学部材や電子部材等に剛性や耐衝撃性を付与する補強材(補強用フィルム)として粘着シートは利用されている。この種の従来技術を開示する文献として特許文献1および2が挙げられる。
The adhesive is in the form of an adhesive sheet, and is used for mobile electronic devices such as mobile phones, smartphones, tablet personal computers, and other electronic devices for the purpose of adhering adherends to each other and fixing articles to the adherend. Widely used in various applications. For example, an adhesive sheet is used as a reinforcing material (reinforcing film) that imparts rigidity and impact resistance to optical members, electronic members, and the like constituting the above equipment. Patent Documents 1 and 2 are examples of documents disclosing this type of prior art.
また、近年、折り曲げたり丸めたりすることができる携帯電子機器が注目されており、そのような電子機器に内蔵されるフレキシブルデバイス(典型的には、有機ELや液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置)の固定等に用いることができる粘着シートの開発が進んでいる(特許文献3~6)。
Further, in recent years, portable electronic devices that can be bent and rolled have attracted attention, and flexible devices (typically, image display devices such as organic EL and liquid crystal display devices) built in such electronic devices have been attracting attention. Development of an adhesive sheet that can be used for fixing or the like is in progress (Patent Documents 3 to 6).
一方、粘着剤の性能に目を向けると、最近、被着体への貼付け初期には低い粘着力を示し、その後、粘着力を大きく上昇させることができる粘着シートが提案されている(特許文献7)。このような特性を有する粘着シートによると、粘着力の上昇前には粘着シートの貼り間違いや貼り損ねによる歩留り低下の抑制に有用な貼り直し性(リワーク性)を発揮し、かつ、粘着力の上昇後には粘着シートの本来の使用目的に適した強粘着性を発揮することができる。
On the other hand, looking at the performance of adhesives, recently, an adhesive sheet has been proposed which exhibits low adhesive strength at the initial stage of attachment to an adherend and then can greatly increase the adhesive strength (Patent Documents). 7). According to the adhesive sheet having such characteristics, before the increase in the adhesive force, the adhesive sheet exhibits re-sticking property (reworkability) useful for suppressing a decrease in yield due to an error or failure to attach the adhesive sheet, and also has an adhesive force. After rising, it is possible to exhibit strong adhesiveness suitable for the original purpose of use of the adhesive sheet.
補強用フィルムは、上記フレキシブルデバイスにも用いられ得る。例えば、上記フレキシブルデバイスの製造では、当該デバイスを構成する部材が薄厚であることが多いため、粘着シートを補強用フィルムとして貼り付けて補強し、デバイスの変形を原因とする不具合を防止したり、取扱い性を高めることが望ましい。フレキシブルデバイスは、繰り返し折り曲げられたり、屈曲され得るため、フレキシブルデバイスに用いられる補強用フィルムには、繰り返し屈曲された場合でも、正常に形状を回復する特性(屈曲回復性)を有し、かつ剥がれ等の不具合が生じない特性(屈曲保持力)を有することが求められる。そのような屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を有する補強用フィルムは、フレキシブルデバイスを含む各種用途に用いることができるので、適用範囲の制限が少なく有用である。
The reinforcing film can also be used for the above flexible device. For example, in the manufacture of the above flexible device, since the members constituting the device are often thin, an adhesive sheet is attached as a reinforcing film to reinforce the device to prevent problems caused by deformation of the device. It is desirable to improve the handleability. Since the flexible device can be repeatedly bent or bent, the reinforcing film used for the flexible device has a property of recovering a normal shape (bending recovery property) even when repeatedly bent, and is peeled off. It is required to have characteristics (bending holding force) that do not cause problems such as. Since the reinforcing film having such bending recovery and bending holding force can be used for various applications including flexible devices, the range of application is not limited and it is useful.
例えば、特許文献7で提案されているような、貼付け初期には低粘着力を示し、その後、粘着力が大きく上昇するように構成された粘着剤についても、補強用フィルムとして用いる場合には、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を有することが望ましい。屈曲保持力を改善する一手法として、例えば、粘着剤の貯蔵弾性率を適切に設定する方法が考えられる。しかし、上記のように粘着力が上昇するよう設計された粘着剤において、貯蔵弾性率を変化させると、初期の低粘着力および上昇後粘着力の双方が影響を受ける。また、屈曲保持力に加えて、屈曲回復性を考慮すると、それらの特性をすべて満足することは容易ではない。貼付け初期には低粘着力を示し、その後、粘着力が大きく上昇する粘着剤について、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を改善することができれば、実用上有益である。
For example, when a pressure-sensitive adhesive as proposed in Patent Document 7, which exhibits low adhesive strength at the initial stage of application and is configured to have a large increase in adhesive strength thereafter, is also used as a reinforcing film. It is desirable to have bending recovery and bending holding power. As a method for improving the bending holding force, for example, a method of appropriately setting the storage elastic modulus of the pressure-sensitive adhesive can be considered. However, in a pressure-sensitive adhesive designed to increase the adhesive strength as described above, changing the storage elastic modulus affects both the initial low adhesive strength and the post-increased adhesive strength. Further, considering the bending recovery in addition to the bending holding force, it is not easy to satisfy all of these characteristics. It would be practically beneficial to be able to improve the bending recovery and bending holding power of a pressure-sensitive adhesive that exhibits low adhesive strength at the initial stage of application and then greatly increases the adhesive strength.
本発明は、上記の事情に鑑みて創出されたものであり、被着体に貼り付けた初期においては軽剥離性を示し、その後、粘着力を大きく上昇させることが可能であり、かつ屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を有する補強用フィルムを提供することを目的とする。本発明はまた、上記補強用フィルムが貼着された光学部材および電子部材の提供を他の目的とする。
The present invention was created in view of the above circumstances, and exhibits light peelability at the initial stage of attachment to the adherend, and then can greatly increase the adhesive strength and recover from bending. It is an object of the present invention to provide a reinforcing film having properties and bending holding force. Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical member and an electronic member to which the reinforcing film is attached.
本明細書によると、粘着剤層を備える補強用フィルムが提供される。前記粘着剤層は、ポリマー(A)と、ポリマー(B)とを含む。前記ポリマー(B)は、ポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するモノマー単位と、(メタ)アクリル系モノマー単位と、を含む。また、前記粘着剤層は、23℃での表面弾性率が1~20kPaである。さらに、前記ポリマー(B)のガラス転移温度TBが-20℃~5℃である。
According to the present specification, a reinforcing film provided with an adhesive layer is provided. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a polymer (A) and a polymer (B). The polymer (B) contains a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton and a (meth) acrylic monomer unit. Further, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus of 1 to 20 kPa at 23 ° C. Further, the glass transition temperature TB of the polymer ( B ) is −20 ° C. to 5 ° C.
上記の構成によると、粘着剤層は、ポリマー(A)と、ポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するモノマー単位を含むポリマー(B)とを含むので、被着体に貼り付けた初期においては軽剥離性を示し、その後、粘着力を大きく上昇させることが可能である。また、ポリマー(B)のガラス転移温度(Tg)TBが-20℃以上であることにより、貼付け初期の軽剥離性に優れる傾向があり、上記TBが5℃以下であることにより、粘着力上昇性に優れる傾向がある。また、上記補強用フィルムは、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を有する。具体的には、粘着剤層の23℃での表面弾性率(23℃表面弾性率)が1kPa以上である補強フィルムは、上述の粘着特性を発揮しつつ、良好な屈曲回復性を有する。また、粘着剤層の23℃表面弾性率が20kPa以下であることにより、上記粘着特性を発揮しつつ、良好な屈曲保持力を有するので、繰り返し折り曲げられる態様で使用された場合であっても、剥がれ等の不具合が生じにくい。
According to the above configuration, since the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) containing a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton, it has a light peelability at the initial stage of being attached to the adherend. After that, it is possible to greatly increase the adhesive strength. Further, when the glass transition temperature (Tg) TB of the polymer ( B ) is −20 ° C. or higher, the light peelability at the initial stage of application tends to be excellent, and when the TB is 5 ° C. or lower, the adhesiveness tends to be excellent. It tends to have excellent force-increasing properties. Further, the reinforcing film has bending recovery property and bending holding force. Specifically, the reinforcing film having a surface elastic modulus (23 ° C. surface elastic modulus) at 23 ° C. of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 1 kPa or more, and has good bending recovery while exhibiting the above-mentioned adhesive properties. Further, since the adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. of 20 kPa or less, it has a good bending holding force while exhibiting the above-mentioned adhesive characteristics, so that even when it is used in a mode of repeated bending, it can be used. Problems such as peeling are unlikely to occur.
ここに開示される技術(補強用フィルム、光学部材および電子部材を包含する。以下同じ。)のいくつかの好ましい態様では、前記粘着剤層は、23℃でのバルク弾性率G′23が10~200kPaである。この範囲のバルク弾性率G′23を有する粘着剤によると、貼付け初期の粘着力が軽剥離性に優れた好適な範囲となりやすい。また、加工性に優れ、概して、常温域での歪緩和性と屈曲回復性とを両立しやすい傾向がある。
In some preferred embodiments of the techniques disclosed herein (including reinforcing films, optics and electronic members; the same shall apply hereinafter), the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a bulk modulus G'23 at 23 ° C. of 10. It is ~ 200 kPa. According to the pressure-sensitive adhesive having a bulk elastic modulus G'23 in this range, the adhesive strength at the initial stage of application tends to be in a suitable range excellent in light peelability. In addition, it is excellent in workability, and generally tends to have both strain relaxation property and bending recovery property in a normal temperature range.
いくつかの好ましい態様では、前記粘着剤層は、80℃でのバルク弾性率G′80が5~100kPaである。この範囲のバルク弾性率G′80を有する粘着剤は、概して、屈曲回復性と屈曲保持力とを両立しやすい。例えば、80℃前後の高温条件で使用された場合であっても、屈曲回復に適した弾性を有し、屈曲保持力を実現する接着保持力を有するものであり得る。
In some preferred embodiments, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a bulk modulus G'80 at 80 ° C. of 5-100 kPa. A pressure-sensitive adhesive having a bulk elastic modulus G'80 in this range generally tends to have both bending recovery and bending holding force. For example, even when it is used under a high temperature condition of about 80 ° C., it may have elasticity suitable for bending recovery and have an adhesive holding force for realizing bending holding force.
いくつかの好ましい態様では、前記粘着剤層は、80℃でのtanδ80が0.10~0.60である。上記tanδ80(80℃での損失弾性率G″80/80℃での貯蔵弾性率G′80)が0.10以上である粘着剤は、屈曲保持に適した接着力を発揮しやすい。また、上記tanδ80が0.60以下であることにより、粘着剤の塑性変形が抑制され、良好な屈曲回復性が得られやすい。また、補強用フィルムを屈曲状態で長時間保持した場合にも、被着体から剥がれが生じない保持力(屈曲保持力)を発揮しやすい。
In some preferred embodiments, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a tan δ 80 of 0.10 to 0.60 at 80 ° C. A pressure-sensitive adhesive having a tan δ 80 (loss elastic modulus G at 80 ° C. G ″ 80 / storage elastic modulus G '80 at 80 ° C.) of 0.10 or more tends to exhibit an adhesive force suitable for bending retention. When the tan δ 80 is 0.60 or less, the plastic deformation of the adhesive is suppressed and good bending recovery is easily obtained. Further, even when the reinforcing film is held in the bent state for a long time, It is easy to exert a holding force (bending holding force) that does not cause peeling from the adherend.
前記ポリマー(A)は、好ましくはアクリル系ポリマーである。アクリル系ポリマーであるポリマー(A)と、ポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するモノマー単位を含むポリマー(B)とを含む粘着剤層によると、ここに開示される技術による効果が好ましく実現される。
The polymer (A) is preferably an acrylic polymer. According to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing the polymer (A) which is an acrylic polymer and the polymer (B) containing a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton, the effects of the techniques disclosed herein are preferably realized.
いくつかの好ましい態様では、前記粘着剤層中の前記ポリマー(B)の含有量は、前記ポリマー(A)100重量部に対して0.5~5重量部である。ポリマー(A)100重量部に対するポリマー(B)の量を0.5重量部以上とすることで、貼付け初期の軽剥離性が得られやすい。上記ポリマー(B)の量を5重量部以下とすることで、目的とする粘着力上昇を実現しやすい。また、ポリマー(B)の使用量を上記の範囲とすることで、良好な屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を実現しやすい。
In some preferred embodiments, the content of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.5 to 5 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). By setting the amount of the polymer (B) to 0.5 parts by weight or more with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), it is easy to obtain light peelability at the initial stage of application. By setting the amount of the polymer (B) to 5 parts by weight or less, it is easy to realize the desired increase in adhesive strength. Further, by setting the amount of the polymer (B) used in the above range, it is easy to realize good bending recovery and bending holding force.
いくつかの好ましい態様では、前記粘着剤層に含まれるイソシアネート基と水酸基とのモル比([NCO]/[OH])は0.002~0.03である。上記モル比([NCO]/[OH])が0.002以上である粘着剤層は、屈曲回復性に優れる傾向があり、加工性にも優れる傾向がある。また、上記モル比([NCO]/[OH])を0.03以下とすることにより、好適な粘着力上昇を実現しやすい傾向がある。なお、粘着剤層において、イソシアネート基と水酸基は、それらの少なくとも一部が化学的に結合(架橋)した状態で存在し得る。上記粘着剤層は、例えば架橋剤を含むものであり、かかる構成において、上記イソシアネート基は、例えば架橋剤の一部であり、上記水酸基は、例えばポリマー(A)の一部であり得る。
In some preferred embodiments, the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) of the isocyanate group to the hydroxyl group contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.002 to 0.03. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) of 0.002 or more tends to be excellent in bending recovery property and processability. Further, by setting the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) to 0.03 or less, it tends to be easy to realize a suitable increase in adhesive strength. In the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group may exist in a state where at least a part thereof is chemically bonded (crosslinked). The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains, for example, a cross-linking agent, and in such a configuration, the isocyanate group may be, for example, a part of the cross-linking agent, and the hydroxyl group may be, for example, a part of the polymer (A).
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、例えば、偏光板、波長板等の光学部材の加工時や搬送時に、該光学部材に剛性や耐衝撃性を付与する補強用フィルムとして好適である。したがって、本明細書によると、ここに開示されるいずれかの補強用フィルムが貼着された光学部材が提供される。
The reinforcing film disclosed here is suitable as a reinforcing film that imparts rigidity and impact resistance to the optical member, for example, during processing or transportation of an optical member such as a polarizing plate or a wave plate. Accordingly, according to the present specification, there is provided an optical member to which any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein is attached.
また、ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、例えば、携帯電子機器等の機器の電子部材の補強用フィルムとしても好適である。したがって、本明細書によると、ここに開示されるいずれかの補強用フィルムが貼着された電子部材が提供される。
Further, the reinforcing film disclosed herein is also suitable as a reinforcing film for an electronic member of a device such as a portable electronic device. Therefore, according to the present specification, there is provided an electronic member to which any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein is attached.
以下、本発明の好適な実施形態を説明する。本明細書において特に言及している事項以外の事柄であって本発明の実施に必要な事柄は、本明細書に記載された発明の実施についての教示と出願時の技術常識とに基づいて当業者に理解され得る。本発明は、本明細書に開示されている内容と当該分野における技術常識とに基づいて実施することができる。
なお、以下の図面において、同じ作用を奏する部材・部位には同じ符号を付して説明することがあり、重複する説明は省略または簡略化することがある。また、図面に記載の実施形態は、本発明を明瞭に説明するために模式化されており、実際に提供される製品のサイズや縮尺を必ずしも正確に表したものではない。 Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described. Matters other than those specifically mentioned in the present specification and necessary for the implementation of the present invention are based on the teachings regarding the implementation of the invention described in the present specification and the common general knowledge at the time of filing. Can be understood by those skilled in the art. The present invention can be carried out based on the contents disclosed in the present specification and the common general technical knowledge in the art.
In the following drawings, members / parts having the same function may be described with the same reference numerals, and duplicate description may be omitted or simplified. In addition, the embodiments described in the drawings are schematically for the purpose of clearly explaining the present invention, and do not necessarily accurately represent the size or scale of the actually provided product.
なお、以下の図面において、同じ作用を奏する部材・部位には同じ符号を付して説明することがあり、重複する説明は省略または簡略化することがある。また、図面に記載の実施形態は、本発明を明瞭に説明するために模式化されており、実際に提供される製品のサイズや縮尺を必ずしも正確に表したものではない。 Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described. Matters other than those specifically mentioned in the present specification and necessary for the implementation of the present invention are based on the teachings regarding the implementation of the invention described in the present specification and the common general knowledge at the time of filing. Can be understood by those skilled in the art. The present invention can be carried out based on the contents disclosed in the present specification and the common general technical knowledge in the art.
In the following drawings, members / parts having the same function may be described with the same reference numerals, and duplicate description may be omitted or simplified. In addition, the embodiments described in the drawings are schematically for the purpose of clearly explaining the present invention, and do not necessarily accurately represent the size or scale of the actually provided product.
また、この明細書において「アクリル系ポリマー」とは、(メタ)アクリル系モノマーに由来するモノマー単位をポリマー構造中に含む重合物をいい、典型的には(メタ)アクリル系モノマーに由来するモノマー単位を50重量%を超える割合で含む重合物をいう。また、(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとは、1分子中に少なくとも一つの(メタ)アクリロイル基を有するモノマーをいう。ここで、「(メタ)アクリロイル基」とは、アクリロイル基およびメタクリロイル基を包括的に指す意味である。したがって、ここでいう(メタ)アクリル系モノマーの概念には、アクリロイル基を有するモノマー(アクリル系モノマー)とメタクリロイル基を有するモノマー(メタクリル系モノマー)との両方が包含され得る。同様に、この明細書において「(メタ)アクリル酸」とはアクリル酸およびメタクリル酸を、「(メタ)アクリレート」とはアクリレートおよびメタクリレートを、それぞれ包括的に指す意味である。
Further, in the present specification, the "acrylic polymer" refers to a polymer containing a monomer unit derived from a (meth) acrylic monomer in a polymer structure, and is typically a monomer derived from a (meth) acrylic monomer. A polymer containing a unit of more than 50% by weight. Further, the (meth) acrylic monomer means a monomer having at least one (meth) acryloyl group in one molecule. Here, the "(meth) acryloyl group" has the meaning of comprehensively referring to an acryloyl group and a methacryloyl group. Therefore, the concept of the (meth) acrylic monomer here may include both a monomer having an acryloyl group (acrylic monomer) and a monomer having a methacryloyl group (methacrylic monomer). Similarly, in this specification, "(meth) acrylic acid" means acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, and "(meth) acrylate" means acrylate and methacrylate, respectively.
<補強用フィルムの構造例>
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、粘着剤により形成された粘着面を有する粘着シートの形態を有する。補強用フィルムとして用いられる粘着シートは、粘着剤層を含んで構成されている。ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、上記粘着剤層が支持基材の片面または両面に積層された基材付き粘着シートの形態であってもよく、支持基材を有しない基材レス粘着シートの形態であってもよい。
なお、本明細書において、「補強用フィルム」とは、後述するように被着体の補強に用いられる粘着シート(補強用粘着フィルム)をいう。補強用フィルムは、例えば基材レス粘着シートの形態で、一方の粘着面に支持材等を貼り付けた後、他方の粘着面を、補強対象である被着体に貼り付けて補強することができるので、基材付き粘着シートの形態に限定されるものではない。この点で、基材付き粘着シートの形態を有する後述の「補強フィルム」よりも広義の概念として把握される。 <Structural example of reinforcing film>
The reinforcing film disclosed herein has the form of an adhesive sheet having an adhesive surface formed by an adhesive. The pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet used as a reinforcing film is configured to include a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. The reinforcing film disclosed herein may be in the form of a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is laminated on one side or both sides of a support base material, and is a base material-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having no support base material. It may be in the form of.
In addition, in this specification, a "reinforcing film" means an adhesive sheet (adhesive film for reinforcement) used for reinforcing an adherend as described later. The reinforcing film is, for example, in the form of a base material-less adhesive sheet, in which a support material or the like is attached to one adhesive surface and then the other adhesive surface is attached to an adherend to be reinforced to reinforce the film. Therefore, it is not limited to the form of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material. In this respect, it is understood as a concept in a broader sense than the "reinforcing film" described later, which has the form of an adhesive sheet with a base material.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、粘着剤により形成された粘着面を有する粘着シートの形態を有する。補強用フィルムとして用いられる粘着シートは、粘着剤層を含んで構成されている。ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、上記粘着剤層が支持基材の片面または両面に積層された基材付き粘着シートの形態であってもよく、支持基材を有しない基材レス粘着シートの形態であってもよい。
なお、本明細書において、「補強用フィルム」とは、後述するように被着体の補強に用いられる粘着シート(補強用粘着フィルム)をいう。補強用フィルムは、例えば基材レス粘着シートの形態で、一方の粘着面に支持材等を貼り付けた後、他方の粘着面を、補強対象である被着体に貼り付けて補強することができるので、基材付き粘着シートの形態に限定されるものではない。この点で、基材付き粘着シートの形態を有する後述の「補強フィルム」よりも広義の概念として把握される。 <Structural example of reinforcing film>
The reinforcing film disclosed herein has the form of an adhesive sheet having an adhesive surface formed by an adhesive. The pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet used as a reinforcing film is configured to include a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. The reinforcing film disclosed herein may be in the form of a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is laminated on one side or both sides of a support base material, and is a base material-less pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having no support base material. It may be in the form of.
In addition, in this specification, a "reinforcing film" means an adhesive sheet (adhesive film for reinforcement) used for reinforcing an adherend as described later. The reinforcing film is, for example, in the form of a base material-less adhesive sheet, in which a support material or the like is attached to one adhesive surface and then the other adhesive surface is attached to an adherend to be reinforced to reinforce the film. Therefore, it is not limited to the form of the pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material. In this respect, it is understood as a concept in a broader sense than the "reinforcing film" described later, which has the form of an adhesive sheet with a base material.
一実施形態に係る補強用フィルムの構造を図1に模式的に示す。この補強用フィルム1は、第一面10Aおよび第二面10Bを有するシート状の支持基材10と、その第一面10A側に設けられた粘着剤層21とを備える基材付き片面粘着シートとして構成されている。粘着剤層21は、支持基材10の第一面10A側に固着している。補強用フィルム1は、粘着剤層21を被着体に貼り付けて用いられる。使用前(すなわち、被着体への貼付け前)の補強用フィルム1は、図1に示すように、粘着剤層21の表面(粘着面)21Aが、少なくとも粘着剤層21に対向する側が剥離性表面(剥離面)となっている剥離ライナー31に当接した形態の剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルム100の構成要素であり得る。剥離ライナー31としては、例えば、シート状の基材(ライナー基材)の片面に剥離処理剤による剥離層を設けることで該片面が剥離面となるように構成されたものを好ましく使用し得る。あるいは、剥離ライナー31を省略し、第二面10Bが剥離面となっている支持基材10を用い、補強用フィルム1を巻回することにより粘着面21Aを支持基材10の第二面10Bに当接させた形態(ロール形態)であってもよい。補強用フィルム1を被着体に貼り付ける際には、粘着面21Aから剥離ライナー31または支持基材10の第二面10Bを剥がし、露出した粘着面21Aを被着体に圧着する。
FIG. 1 schematically shows the structure of the reinforcing film according to one embodiment. The reinforcing film 1 is a single-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material including a sheet-shaped support base material 10 having a first surface 10A and a second surface 10B, and an adhesive layer 21 provided on the first surface 10A side thereof. It is configured as. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21 is fixed to the first surface 10A side of the support base material 10. The reinforcing film 1 is used by attaching the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21 to the adherend. As shown in FIG. 1, the reinforcing film 1 before use (that is, before being attached to the adherend) has the surface (adhesive surface) 21A of the adhesive layer 21 peeled off at least on the side facing the adhesive layer 21. It may be a component of the reinforcing film 100 with a peeling liner in a form of being in contact with the peeling liner 31 which is a property surface (peeling surface). As the peeling liner 31, for example, a sheet-like base material (liner base material) having a peeling layer provided on one side thereof so that one side becomes a peeling surface can be preferably used. Alternatively, the release liner 31 is omitted, the support base material 10 having the second surface 10B as the release surface is used, and the adhesive surface 21A is wound around the reinforcing film 1 so that the adhesive surface 21A is the second surface 10B of the support base material 10. It may be in contact with the (roll form). When the reinforcing film 1 is attached to the adherend, the release liner 31 or the second surface 10B of the support base material 10 is peeled off from the adhesive surface 21A, and the exposed adhesive surface 21A is pressure-bonded to the adherend.
他の一実施形態に係る補強用フィルムの構造を図2に模式的に示す。この補強用フィルム2は、第一面10Aおよび第二面10Bを有するシート状の支持基材10と、その第一面10A側に設けられた粘着剤層21と、第二面10B側に設けられた粘着剤層22と、を備える基材付き両面粘着シートとして構成されている。粘着剤層(第一粘着剤層)21は支持基材10の第一面10Aに、粘着剤層(第二粘着剤層)22は支持基材10の第二面10Bに、それぞれ固着している。補強用フィルム2は、粘着剤層21,22を、被着体の異なる箇所に貼り付けて用いられる。粘着剤層21,22が貼り付けられる箇所は、異なる部材のそれぞれの箇所であってもよく、単一の部材内の異なる箇所であってもよい。使用前の補強用フィルム2は、図2に示すように、粘着剤層21の表面(第一粘着面)21Aおよび粘着剤層22の表面(第二粘着面)22Aが、少なくとも粘着剤層21,22に対向する側がそれぞれ剥離面となっている剥離ライナー31,32に当接した形態の剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルム200の構成要素であり得る。剥離ライナー31,32としては、例えば、シート状の基材(ライナー基材)の片面に剥離処理剤による剥離層を設けることで該片面が剥離面となるように構成されたものを好ましく使用し得る。あるいは、剥離ライナー32を省略し、両面が剥離面となっている剥離ライナー31を用い、これと補強用フィルム2とを重ね合わせて渦巻き状に巻回することにより第二粘着面22Aが剥離ライナー31の背面に当接した形態(ロール形態)の剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルムを構成していてもよい。
FIG. 2 schematically shows the structure of the reinforcing film according to the other embodiment. The reinforcing film 2 is provided on the sheet-shaped support base material 10 having the first surface 10A and the second surface 10B, the adhesive layer 21 provided on the first surface 10A side thereof, and the second surface 10B side. It is configured as a double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet with a base material comprising the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 22. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) 21 is fixed to the first surface 10A of the support base material 10, and the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer) 22 is fixed to the second surface 10B of the support base material 10. There is. The reinforcing film 2 is used by attaching the pressure-sensitive adhesive layers 21 and 22 to different parts of the adherend. The locations where the pressure-sensitive adhesive layers 21 and 22 are attached may be the respective locations of different members, or may be different locations within a single member. As shown in FIG. 2, in the reinforcing film 2 before use, the surface (first adhesive surface) 21A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21 and the surface (second adhesive surface) 22A of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 22 are at least the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21. , 22 may be a component of the reinforcing film 200 with a release liner in a form of being in contact with the release lines 31 and 32 whose sides facing the release lines are the release surfaces, respectively. As the release liners 31 and 32, for example, those configured by providing a release layer with a release treatment agent on one side of a sheet-shaped base material (liner base material) so that one side becomes a release surface are preferably used. obtain. Alternatively, the release liner 32 is omitted, a release liner 31 having both sides as release surfaces is used, and the release liner 31 is overlapped with the reinforcing film 2 and wound in a spiral shape so that the second adhesive surface 22A becomes a release liner. A reinforcing film with a release liner in a form (roll form) in contact with the back surface of 31 may be configured.
さらに他の一実施形態に係る補強用フィルムの構造を図3に模式的に示す。この補強用フィルム3は、粘着剤層21からなる基材レスの両面粘着シートとして構成されている。補強用フィルム3は、粘着剤層21の一方の表面(第一面)により構成された第一粘着面21Aと、粘着剤層21の他方の表面(第二面)により構成された第二粘着面21Bとを被着体の異なる箇所に貼り付けて用いられる。使用前の補強用フィルム3は、図3に示すように、第一粘着面21Aおよび第二粘着面)21Bが、少なくとも粘着剤層21に対向する側がそれぞれ剥離面となっている剥離ライナー31,32に当接した形態の剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルム300の構成要素であり得る。あるいは、剥離ライナー32を省略し、両面が剥離面となっている剥離ライナー31を用い、これと補強用フィルム3とを重ね合わせて渦巻き状に巻回することにより第二粘着面21Bが剥離ライナー31の背面に当接した形態(ロール形態)の剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルムを構成していてもよい。
The structure of the reinforcing film according to still another embodiment is schematically shown in FIG. The reinforcing film 3 is configured as a base-less double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet composed of a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 21. The reinforcing film 3 has a first adhesive surface 21A composed of one surface (first surface) of the adhesive layer 21 and a second adhesive surface composed of the other surface (second surface) of the adhesive layer 21. It is used by attaching the surface 21B to different parts of the adherend. As shown in FIG. 3, the reinforcing film 3 before use has a release liner 31, in which the first adhesive surface 21A and the second adhesive surface) 21B have peeling surfaces at least on the sides facing the adhesive layer 21. It may be a component of the reinforcing film 300 with a release liner in the form of abutting on 32. Alternatively, the release liner 32 is omitted, a release liner 31 having both sides as release surfaces is used, and the release liner 31 is overlapped with the reinforcing film 3 and wound in a spiral shape so that the second adhesive surface 21B becomes a release liner. A reinforcing film with a release liner in a form (roll form) in contact with the back surface of 31 may be configured.
なお、補強用フィルムは、ロール形態であってもよく、枚葉形態であってもよく、用途や使用態様に応じて適宜な形状に切断、打ち抜き加工等されたものであってもよい。ここに開示される技術における粘着剤層は、典型的には連続的に形成されるが、これに限定されず、例えば点状、ストライプ状等の規則的あるいはランダムなパターンに形成されていてもよい。
The reinforcing film may be in a roll form, a single-wafer form, or may be cut or punched into an appropriate shape according to the intended use and usage mode. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the technique disclosed herein is typically formed continuously, but is not limited to this, even if it is formed in a regular or random pattern such as a dot shape or a striped shape. good.
<粘着剤層>
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、ポリマー(A)と、ポリマー(B)と、を含む粘着剤層を備える。このような粘着剤層は、モノマー原料Aの完全重合物または部分重合物であるポリマー(A)と、ポリマー(B)と、を含有する粘着剤組成物から形成されたものであり得る。粘着剤組成物の形態は特に制限されず、例えば溶剤型、水分散型、ホットメルト型、活性エネルギー線硬化型(例えば光硬化型)等の、各種の形態であり得る。 <Adhesive layer>
The reinforcing film disclosed herein comprises a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer comprising the polymer (A) and the polymer (B). Such a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be formed from a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the polymer (A), which is a complete polymer or a partial polymer of the monomer raw material A, and the polymer (B). The form of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is not particularly limited, and may be various forms such as a solvent type, a water-dispersed type, a hot melt type, and an active energy ray-curable type (for example, a photocurable type).
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、ポリマー(A)と、ポリマー(B)と、を含む粘着剤層を備える。このような粘着剤層は、モノマー原料Aの完全重合物または部分重合物であるポリマー(A)と、ポリマー(B)と、を含有する粘着剤組成物から形成されたものであり得る。粘着剤組成物の形態は特に制限されず、例えば溶剤型、水分散型、ホットメルト型、活性エネルギー線硬化型(例えば光硬化型)等の、各種の形態であり得る。 <Adhesive layer>
The reinforcing film disclosed herein comprises a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer comprising the polymer (A) and the polymer (B). Such a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be formed from a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the polymer (A), which is a complete polymer or a partial polymer of the monomer raw material A, and the polymer (B). The form of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is not particularly limited, and may be various forms such as a solvent type, a water-dispersed type, a hot melt type, and an active energy ray-curable type (for example, a photocurable type).
(23℃表面弾性率)
ここに開示される粘着剤層は、その表面(粘着面)の23℃での表面弾性率(23℃表面弾性率)が1~20kPaの範囲内であることによって特徴づけられる。上記23℃表面弾性率が1kPa以上であることにより、ポリマー(A)とポリマー(B)との含有に基づく粘着特性を実現しつつ、良好な屈曲回復性を有することができる。また、上記表面弾性率が20kPa以下であることにより、上記粘着特性を実現しつつ、良好な屈曲保持力を発揮することができる。 (23 ° C surface elastic modulus)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is characterized by having a surface elastic modulus (23 ° C. surface elastic modulus) of its surface (adhesive surface) at 23 ° C. in the range of 1 to 20 kPa. When the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus is 1 kPa or more, it is possible to have good bending recovery while realizing the adhesive property based on the content of the polymer (A) and the polymer (B). Further, when the surface elastic modulus is 20 kPa or less, it is possible to exhibit a good bending holding force while realizing the above-mentioned adhesive characteristics.
ここに開示される粘着剤層は、その表面(粘着面)の23℃での表面弾性率(23℃表面弾性率)が1~20kPaの範囲内であることによって特徴づけられる。上記23℃表面弾性率が1kPa以上であることにより、ポリマー(A)とポリマー(B)との含有に基づく粘着特性を実現しつつ、良好な屈曲回復性を有することができる。また、上記表面弾性率が20kPa以下であることにより、上記粘着特性を実現しつつ、良好な屈曲保持力を発揮することができる。 (23 ° C surface elastic modulus)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein is characterized by having a surface elastic modulus (23 ° C. surface elastic modulus) of its surface (adhesive surface) at 23 ° C. in the range of 1 to 20 kPa. When the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus is 1 kPa or more, it is possible to have good bending recovery while realizing the adhesive property based on the content of the polymer (A) and the polymer (B). Further, when the surface elastic modulus is 20 kPa or less, it is possible to exhibit a good bending holding force while realizing the above-mentioned adhesive characteristics.
屈曲回復性向上の観点から、上記23℃表面弾性率は、好ましくは2kPa以上、より好ましくは3kPa以上、さらに好ましくは4kPa以上(例えば5kPa以上)であり、8kPa以上であってもよく、10kPa以上でもよく、12kPa以上(例えば14kPa以上)でもよい。上記表面弾性率が高くなるほど、初期の軽剥離性は優れる傾向がある。また、良好な屈曲回復性と屈曲保持力を両立しつつ、粘着力上昇を好ましく発現する観点から、上記23℃表面弾性率は、15kPa以下が適当であり、好ましくは12kPa以下、より好ましくは9kPa以下、さらに好ましくは7kPa以下(例えば6kPa以下)であり、4kPa以下であってもよい。
From the viewpoint of improving bending recovery, the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus is preferably 2 kPa or more, more preferably 3 kPa or more, further preferably 4 kPa or more (for example, 5 kPa or more), and may be 8 kPa or more, and may be 10 kPa or more. However, it may be 12 kPa or more (for example, 14 kPa or more). The higher the surface elastic modulus, the better the initial light peelability tends to be. Further, from the viewpoint of preferably exhibiting an increase in adhesive strength while achieving both good bending recovery and bending holding power, the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus is preferably 15 kPa or less, preferably 12 kPa or less, and more preferably 9 kPa. Hereinafter, it is more preferably 7 kPa or less (for example, 6 kPa or less), and may be 4 kPa or less.
粘着剤層の23℃表面弾性率は、ポリマー(A)の種類や特性(分子量やガラス転移温度、分子構造等)、ポリマー(B)の種類(化学構造等)や特性(分子量やガラス転移温度等)、使用量、架橋剤の種類や使用量等によって調節することができる。粘着剤層の23℃表面弾性率は後述の実施例に記載の方法で測定される。
The 23 ° C surface elasticity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is determined by the type and characteristics (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.) of the polymer (A), and the type (chemical structure, etc.) and characteristics (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, etc.) of the polymer (B). Etc.), the amount used, the type of cross-linking agent, the amount used, etc. can be adjusted. The 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is measured by the method described in Examples described later.
(23℃バルク弾性率G′23)
粘着剤層の23℃でのバルク弾性率G′23(23℃バルク弾性率G′23)は、上記23℃表面弾性率の範囲を満足する範囲内で適切に設定され、特定の範囲に限定されるものではない。いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の23℃バルク弾性率G′23は、10kPa以上とすることが適当である。上記バルク弾性率G′23を所定値以上とすることにより、貼付け初期の粘着力が軽剥離性に優れた好適な範囲となりやすい。また、加工性に優れ、概して、常温域での屈曲回復性にも優れる傾向がある。上記バルク弾性率G′23は、好ましくは15kPa以上、より好ましくは20kPa以上、さらに好ましくは25kPa以上、特に好ましくは30kPa以上である。他のいくつかの態様において、上記バルク弾性率G′23は、50kPa以上であってもよく、80kPa以上でもよく、100kPa以上でもよい。 ( 23 ° C bulk elastic modulus G'23)
The bulk elastic modulus G'23 ( 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 23 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus and is limited to a specific range. It is not something that will be done. In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 10 kPa or more. By setting the bulk elastic modulus G'23 to a predetermined value or more, the adhesive force at the initial stage of application tends to be in a suitable range excellent in light peelability. In addition, it is excellent in workability and generally tends to be excellent in bending recovery in the normal temperature range. The bulk elastic modulus G'23 is preferably 15 kPa or more, more preferably 20 kPa or more, still more preferably 25 kPa or more, and particularly preferably 30 kPa or more. In some other embodiments, the bulk modulus G'23 may be 50 kPa or higher, 80 kPa or higher, or 100 kPa or higher.
粘着剤層の23℃でのバルク弾性率G′23(23℃バルク弾性率G′23)は、上記23℃表面弾性率の範囲を満足する範囲内で適切に設定され、特定の範囲に限定されるものではない。いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の23℃バルク弾性率G′23は、10kPa以上とすることが適当である。上記バルク弾性率G′23を所定値以上とすることにより、貼付け初期の粘着力が軽剥離性に優れた好適な範囲となりやすい。また、加工性に優れ、概して、常温域での屈曲回復性にも優れる傾向がある。上記バルク弾性率G′23は、好ましくは15kPa以上、より好ましくは20kPa以上、さらに好ましくは25kPa以上、特に好ましくは30kPa以上である。他のいくつかの態様において、上記バルク弾性率G′23は、50kPa以上であってもよく、80kPa以上でもよく、100kPa以上でもよい。 ( 23 ° C bulk elastic modulus G'23)
The bulk elastic modulus G'23 ( 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 23 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus and is limited to a specific range. It is not something that will be done. In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 10 kPa or more. By setting the bulk elastic modulus G'23 to a predetermined value or more, the adhesive force at the initial stage of application tends to be in a suitable range excellent in light peelability. In addition, it is excellent in workability and generally tends to be excellent in bending recovery in the normal temperature range. The bulk elastic modulus G'23 is preferably 15 kPa or more, more preferably 20 kPa or more, still more preferably 25 kPa or more, and particularly preferably 30 kPa or more. In some other embodiments, the bulk modulus G'23 may be 50 kPa or higher, 80 kPa or higher, or 100 kPa or higher.
いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の23℃バルク弾性率G′23は、200kPa以下とすることが適当である。上記バルク弾性率G′23が所定値以下である粘着剤は、概して、常温域での歪緩和性に優れる傾向があり、また、粘着力上昇を発現しやすい。上記バルク弾性率G′23は、好ましくは150kPa以下、より好ましくは90kPa以下である。いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記バルク弾性率G′23は、60kPa以下であってもよく、40kPa以下(例えば35kPa以下)でもよい。
In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 200 kPa or less. The pressure-sensitive adhesive having a bulk elastic modulus G'23 of less than or equal to a predetermined value generally tends to have excellent strain-relieving properties in the normal temperature range, and tends to exhibit an increase in adhesive strength. The bulk elastic modulus G'23 is preferably 150 kPa or less, more preferably 90 kPa or less. In some preferred embodiments, the bulk modulus G'23 may be 60 kPa or less, or 40 kPa or less (eg, 35 kPa or less).
(80℃バルク弾性率G′80)
粘着剤層の80℃でのバルク弾性率G′80(80℃バルク弾性率G′80)は、上記23℃表面弾性率の範囲を満足する範囲内で適切に設定され、特定の範囲に限定されるものではない。いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の80℃バルク弾性率G′80は、5kPa以上であることが好ましい。上記バルク弾性率G′80を所定値以上とすることにより、概して、屈曲回復性が向上しやすく、高温条件で使用された場合であっても、屈曲回復に適した弾性を有するものとなり得る。いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記バルク弾性率G′80は、7kPa以上であってもよく、9kPa以上でもよく、10kPa以上でもよい。他のいくつかの態様において、上記バルク弾性率G′80は、15kPa以上であってもよく、30kPa以上でもよく、50kPa以上でもよい。 (80 ° C bulk elastic modulus G'80 )
The bulk elastic modulus G'80 ( 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 80 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus and is limited to a specific range. It is not something that will be done. In some embodiments, the 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably 5 kPa or higher. By setting the bulk elastic modulus G'80 to a predetermined value or more, the bending recovery property is generally easy to improve, and even when used under high temperature conditions, the elastic modulus suitable for bending recovery can be obtained. In some preferred embodiments, the bulk modulus G'80 may be 7 kPa or higher, 9 kPa or higher, or 10 kPa or higher. In some other embodiments, the bulk modulus G'80 may be 15 kPa or higher, 30 kPa or higher, or 50 kPa or higher.
粘着剤層の80℃でのバルク弾性率G′80(80℃バルク弾性率G′80)は、上記23℃表面弾性率の範囲を満足する範囲内で適切に設定され、特定の範囲に限定されるものではない。いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の80℃バルク弾性率G′80は、5kPa以上であることが好ましい。上記バルク弾性率G′80を所定値以上とすることにより、概して、屈曲回復性が向上しやすく、高温条件で使用された場合であっても、屈曲回復に適した弾性を有するものとなり得る。いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記バルク弾性率G′80は、7kPa以上であってもよく、9kPa以上でもよく、10kPa以上でもよい。他のいくつかの態様において、上記バルク弾性率G′80は、15kPa以上であってもよく、30kPa以上でもよく、50kPa以上でもよい。 (80 ° C bulk elastic modulus G'80 )
The bulk elastic modulus G'80 ( 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 80 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus and is limited to a specific range. It is not something that will be done. In some embodiments, the 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably 5 kPa or higher. By setting the bulk elastic modulus G'80 to a predetermined value or more, the bending recovery property is generally easy to improve, and even when used under high temperature conditions, the elastic modulus suitable for bending recovery can be obtained. In some preferred embodiments, the bulk modulus G'80 may be 7 kPa or higher, 9 kPa or higher, or 10 kPa or higher. In some other embodiments, the bulk modulus G'80 may be 15 kPa or higher, 30 kPa or higher, or 50 kPa or higher.
いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の80℃バルク弾性率G′80は、100kPa以下とすることが適当である。上記バルク弾性率G′80を所定値以下に制限することにより、概して、良好な屈曲保持力を得やすく、屈曲回復性と屈曲保持力とを両立しやすい。例えば、高温条件を含む様々な環境において、屈曲回復に適した弾性を有し、屈曲保持力を実現する接着保持力を有するものとなり得る。上記バルク弾性率G′80は、好ましくは90kPa以下であり、より好ましくは60kPa以下である。いくつかの態様において、上記バルク弾性率G′80は、20kPa以下であってもよく、16kPa以下でもよく、14kPa以下(例えば12kPa以下)でもよい。
In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 100 kPa or less. By limiting the bulk elastic modulus G'80 to a predetermined value or less, it is generally easy to obtain a good bending holding force, and it is easy to achieve both bending recovery and bending holding force. For example, in various environments including high temperature conditions, it may have elasticity suitable for bending recovery and have adhesive holding force to realize bending holding force. The bulk elastic modulus G'80 is preferably 90 kPa or less, more preferably 60 kPa or less. In some embodiments, the bulk modulus G'80 may be 20 kPa or less, 16 kPa or less, or 14 kPa or less (eg, 12 kPa or less).
(80℃tanδ80)
粘着剤層の80℃でのtanδ80(80℃tanδ80)は、上記23℃表面弾性率の範囲を満足する範囲内で適切に設定され、特定の範囲に限定されるものではない。いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の80℃tanδ80は0.10以上であることが適当である。上記tanδ80が高いほど、粘着剤は、屈曲保持に適した接着力を発揮しやすい。上記tanδ80は、好ましくは0.20以上である。いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記tanδ80は、0.30以上であってもよく、0.40以上でもよく、0.45以上でもよい。 (80 ° C tanδ 80 )
The tanδ 80 (80 ° C. tanδ 80 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 80 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus, and is not limited to a specific range. In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the 80 ° C. tan δ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.10 or higher. The higher the tan δ 80 , the easier it is for the pressure-sensitive adhesive to exhibit an adhesive force suitable for bending and holding. The tan δ 80 is preferably 0.20 or more. In some preferred embodiments, the tan δ 80 may be 0.30 or higher, 0.40 or higher, or 0.45 or higher.
粘着剤層の80℃でのtanδ80(80℃tanδ80)は、上記23℃表面弾性率の範囲を満足する範囲内で適切に設定され、特定の範囲に限定されるものではない。いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の80℃tanδ80は0.10以上であることが適当である。上記tanδ80が高いほど、粘着剤は、屈曲保持に適した接着力を発揮しやすい。上記tanδ80は、好ましくは0.20以上である。いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記tanδ80は、0.30以上であってもよく、0.40以上でもよく、0.45以上でもよい。 (80 ° C tanδ 80 )
The tanδ 80 (80 ° C. tanδ 80 ) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at 80 ° C. is appropriately set within a range satisfying the above range of the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus, and is not limited to a specific range. In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the 80 ° C. tan δ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.10 or higher. The higher the tan δ 80 , the easier it is for the pressure-sensitive adhesive to exhibit an adhesive force suitable for bending and holding. The tan δ 80 is preferably 0.20 or more. In some preferred embodiments, the tan δ 80 may be 0.30 or higher, 0.40 or higher, or 0.45 or higher.
いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の80℃tanδ80は、0.60以下であることが好ましい。上記tanδ80が0.60以下であることにより、粘着剤の塑性変形が抑制され、良好な屈曲回復性が得られやすい。また、補強用フィルムを屈曲状態で長時間保持した場合にも、被着体から剥がれが生じない保持力を発揮しやすい。さらに、粘着力上昇も好適な範囲となりやすい。上記80℃tanδ80は、0.55以下であってもよい。他のいくつかの態様において、上記80℃tanδ80は、0.50以下であってもよく、0.35以下でもよい。
In some embodiments, the 80 ° C. tan δ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably 0.60 or less. When the tan δ 80 is 0.60 or less, the plastic deformation of the pressure-sensitive adhesive is suppressed, and good bending recovery is easily obtained. Further, even when the reinforcing film is held in a bent state for a long time, it is easy to exert a holding force that does not cause peeling from the adherend. Further, the increase in adhesive strength tends to be in a suitable range. The 80 ° C. tan δ 80 may be 0.55 or less. In some other embodiments, the 80 ° C. tan δ 80 may be 0.50 or less, or 0.35 or less.
粘着剤層の23℃バルク弾性率G′23、80℃バルク弾性率G′80および80℃tanδ80は、ポリマー(A)の種類や特性(分子量やガラス転移温度、分子構造等)、ポリマー(B)の種類(化学構造等)や特性(分子量やガラス転移温度等)、使用量、架橋剤の種類や使用量等によって調節することができる。粘着剤層の23℃バルク弾性率G′23、80℃バルク弾性率G′80および80℃tanδ80は、後述の実施例に記載の方法で測定される。
The 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23, 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 and 80 ° C. tanδ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer are the types and characteristics of the polymer (A) (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.) and the polymer (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, molecular structure, etc.). It can be adjusted according to the type (chemical structure, etc.) and characteristics (molecular weight, glass transition temperature, etc.) of B), the amount used, the type of the cross-linking agent, the amount used, and the like. The 23 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'23, the 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 and the 80 ° C. tanδ 80 of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer are measured by the methods described in Examples described later.
(ポリマー(A))
ポリマー(A)としては、粘着剤の分野において公知のアクリル系ポリマー、ゴム系ポリマー、ポリエステル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、ポリエーテル系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、ポリアミド系ポリマー、フッ素系ポリマー等の、室温域においてゴム弾性を示す各種のポリマーの一種または二種以上を用いることができる。ここに開示される補強用フィルムにおいて、ポリマー(A)は、典型的には粘着剤層に含まれるポリマー成分の主成分、すなわち50重量%超を占める成分であり、例えば上記ポリマー成分のうち75重量%以上を占める成分であり得る。いくつかの態様において、上記ポリマー(A)は、粘着剤層全体の50重量%超を占める成分であり、70重量%以上を占める成分であってもよく、80重量%以上を占める成分でもよく、90重量%以上を占める成分でもよく、95重量%以上(例えば97重量%以上)を占める成分でもよい。 (Polymer (A))
Examples of the polymer (A) include acrylic polymers, rubber polymers, polyester polymers, urethane polymers, polyether polymers, silicone polymers, polyamide polymers, and fluoropolymers known in the field of pressure-sensitive adhesives at room temperature. One or more of various polymers showing rubber elasticity in the region can be used. In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, the polymer (A) is typically the main component of the polymer component contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, that is, a component occupying more than 50% by weight, for example, 75 of the above polymer components. It can be a component that accounts for more than% by weight. In some embodiments, the polymer (A) is a component that occupies more than 50% by weight of the entire pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, may be a component that occupies 70% by weight or more, or may be a component that occupies 80% by weight or more. , 90% by weight or more, or 95% by weight or more (for example, 97% by weight or more) may be used.
ポリマー(A)としては、粘着剤の分野において公知のアクリル系ポリマー、ゴム系ポリマー、ポリエステル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、ポリエーテル系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、ポリアミド系ポリマー、フッ素系ポリマー等の、室温域においてゴム弾性を示す各種のポリマーの一種または二種以上を用いることができる。ここに開示される補強用フィルムにおいて、ポリマー(A)は、典型的には粘着剤層に含まれるポリマー成分の主成分、すなわち50重量%超を占める成分であり、例えば上記ポリマー成分のうち75重量%以上を占める成分であり得る。いくつかの態様において、上記ポリマー(A)は、粘着剤層全体の50重量%超を占める成分であり、70重量%以上を占める成分であってもよく、80重量%以上を占める成分でもよく、90重量%以上を占める成分でもよく、95重量%以上(例えば97重量%以上)を占める成分でもよい。 (Polymer (A))
Examples of the polymer (A) include acrylic polymers, rubber polymers, polyester polymers, urethane polymers, polyether polymers, silicone polymers, polyamide polymers, and fluoropolymers known in the field of pressure-sensitive adhesives at room temperature. One or more of various polymers showing rubber elasticity in the region can be used. In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, the polymer (A) is typically the main component of the polymer component contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, that is, a component occupying more than 50% by weight, for example, 75 of the above polymer components. It can be a component that accounts for more than% by weight. In some embodiments, the polymer (A) is a component that occupies more than 50% by weight of the entire pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, may be a component that occupies 70% by weight or more, or may be a component that occupies 80% by weight or more. , 90% by weight or more, or 95% by weight or more (for example, 97% by weight or more) may be used.
ポリマー(A)のガラス転移温度TAは、特に限定されず、ここに開示される補強用フィルムにおいて好ましい特性が得られるように選択することができる。いくつかの態様において、TAが0℃未満であるポリマー(A)を好ましく採用し得る。このようなポリマー(A)を含む粘着剤は、適度な流動性(例えば、該粘着剤に含まれるポリマー鎖の運動性)を示すことから、加熱によって粘着力が所定値以上に上昇する補強用フィルムの実現に適している。ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、TAが-10℃未満、-20℃未満、-30℃未満または-35℃未満のポリマー(A)を用いて好ましく実施され得る。いくつかの態様において、TAは、-40℃未満でもよく、-50℃未満でもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、TAは、-55℃以下であり、より好ましくは-58℃以下、さらに好ましくは-62℃以下であり、-65℃以下(例えば-66℃以下)でもよい。TAの下限は特に制限されない。材料の入手容易性や粘着剤層の凝集力向上の観点から、通常は、TAが-80℃以上、-70℃以上のポリマー(A)を好ましく採用し得る。いくつかの態様において、TAは、例えば-63℃以上であってよく、-55℃以上でもよく、-50℃以上でもよく、-45℃以上でもよい。
The glass transition temperature TA of the polymer ( A ) is not particularly limited and can be selected so as to obtain preferable properties in the reinforcing film disclosed herein. In some embodiments, the polymer ( A ) having a TA of less than 0 ° C. may be preferably employed. Since the pressure-sensitive adhesive containing the polymer (A) exhibits appropriate fluidity (for example, the motility of the polymer chains contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive), it is used for reinforcement in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive strength increases to a predetermined value or more by heating. Suitable for realization of film. The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably carried out using a polymer ( A ) having a TA of less than −10 ° C., less than −20 ° C., less than −30 ° C. or less than −35 ° C. In some embodiments, TA may be below −40 ° C. or below −50 ° C. In some preferred embodiments, the TA is −55 ° C. or lower, more preferably −58 ° C. or lower, even more preferably −62 ° C. or lower, and may be −65 ° C. or lower (eg, −66 ° C. or lower). The lower limit of TA is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of easy availability of the material and improvement of the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, a polymer ( A ) having a TA of −80 ° C. or higher and −70 ° C. or higher can be preferably adopted. In some embodiments, TA may be, for example, −63 ° C. or higher, −55 ° C. or higher, −50 ° C. or higher, or −45 ° C. or higher.
ここで、この明細書において、ポリマーのガラス転移温度(Tg)(例えば、ポリマー(A)、後述のポリマー(B)等のガラス転移温度)とは、文献やカタログ等に記載された公称値か、または該ポリマーの調製に用いられるモノマー原料の組成に基づいてFoxの式により求められるTgをいう。Foxの式とは、以下に示すように、共重合体のTgと、該共重合体を構成するモノマーのそれぞれを単独重合したホモポリマーのガラス転移温度Tgiとの関係式である。
1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi)
上記Foxの式において、Tgは共重合体のガラス転移温度(単位:K)、Wiは該共重合体におけるモノマーiの重量分率(重量基準の共重合割合)、Tgiはモノマーiのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度(単位:K)を表す。Tgの特定に係る対象のポリマーがホモポリマーである場合、該ホモポリマーのTgと対象のポリマーのTgとは一致する。 Here, in this specification, is the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer (for example, the glass transition temperature of the polymer (A), the polymer (B) described later, etc.) a nominal value described in documents, catalogs, and the like? , Or Tg determined by the Fox formula based on the composition of the monomer raw material used in the preparation of the polymer. As shown below, the Fox formula is a relational formula between the Tg of the copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of the homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing each of the monomers constituting the copolymer.
1 / Tg = Σ (Wi / Tgi)
In the Fox formula, Tg is the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of the copolymer, Wi is the weight fraction of the monomer i in the copolymer (copolymerization ratio based on the weight), and Tgi is the homopolymer of the monomer i. Represents the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of. When the target polymer for specifying Tg is a homopolymer, the Tg of the homopolymer and the Tg of the target polymer are the same.
1/Tg=Σ(Wi/Tgi)
上記Foxの式において、Tgは共重合体のガラス転移温度(単位:K)、Wiは該共重合体におけるモノマーiの重量分率(重量基準の共重合割合)、Tgiはモノマーiのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度(単位:K)を表す。Tgの特定に係る対象のポリマーがホモポリマーである場合、該ホモポリマーのTgと対象のポリマーのTgとは一致する。 Here, in this specification, is the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer (for example, the glass transition temperature of the polymer (A), the polymer (B) described later, etc.) a nominal value described in documents, catalogs, and the like? , Or Tg determined by the Fox formula based on the composition of the monomer raw material used in the preparation of the polymer. As shown below, the Fox formula is a relational formula between the Tg of the copolymer and the glass transition temperature Tgi of the homopolymer obtained by homopolymerizing each of the monomers constituting the copolymer.
1 / Tg = Σ (Wi / Tgi)
In the Fox formula, Tg is the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of the copolymer, Wi is the weight fraction of the monomer i in the copolymer (copolymerization ratio based on the weight), and Tgi is the homopolymer of the monomer i. Represents the glass transition temperature (unit: K) of. When the target polymer for specifying Tg is a homopolymer, the Tg of the homopolymer and the Tg of the target polymer are the same.
Tgの算出に使用するホモポリマーのガラス転移温度としては、公知資料に記載の値を用いるものとする。具体的には、「Polymer Handbook」(第3版、John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989年)に数値が挙げられている。上記Polymer Handbookに複数種類の値が記載されているモノマーについては、最も高い値を採用する。
As the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer used for calculating Tg, the value described in the publicly known material shall be used. Specifically, the figures are listed in the "Polymer Handbook" (3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1989). For the monomers for which multiple types of values are described in the above Polymer Handbook, the highest value is adopted.
上記Polymer Handbookに記載のないモノマーのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度としては、以下の測定方法により得られる値を用いるものとする。
具体的には、温度計、攪拌機、窒素導入管および還流冷却管を備えた反応器に、モノマー100重量部、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル0.2重量部および重合溶媒として酢酸エチル200重量部を投入し、窒素ガスを流通させながら1時間攪拌する。このようにして重合系内の酸素を除去した後、63℃に昇温し10時間反応させる。次いで、室温まで冷却し、固形分濃度33重量%のホモポリマー溶液を得る。次いで、このホモポリマー溶液を剥離ライナー上に流延塗布し、乾燥して厚さ約2mmの試験サンプル(シート状のホモポリマー)を作製する。この試験サンプルを直径7.9mmの円盤状に打ち抜き、パラレルプレートで挟み込み、粘弾性試験機(ティー・エイ・インスツルメント・ジャパン社製、機種名「ARES」)を用いて周波数1Hzのせん断歪みを与えながら、温度領域-70℃~150℃、5℃/分の昇温速度でせん断モードにより粘弾性を測定し、tanδのピークトップ温度に相当する温度をホモポリマーのTgとする。 As the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of the monomer not described in the above Polymer Handbook, the value obtained by the following measuring method shall be used.
Specifically, in a reactor equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, a nitrogen introduction tube and a reflux condenser, 100 parts by weight of a monomer, 0.2 parts by weight of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile and acetic acid as a polymerization solvent. Add 200 parts by weight of ethyl and stir for 1 hour while flowing nitrogen gas. After removing oxygen in the polymerization system in this way, the temperature is raised to 63 ° C. and the reaction is carried out for 10 hours. Then, the mixture is cooled to room temperature to obtain a homopolymer solution having a solid content concentration of 33% by weight. Next, this homopolymer solution is cast-coated on a release liner and dried to prepare a test sample (sheet-shaped homopolymer) having a thickness of about 2 mm. This test sample is punched into a disk shape with a diameter of 7.9 mm, sandwiched between parallel plates, and shear strain with a frequency of 1 Hz using a viscoelasticity tester (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, model name "ARES"). The viscoelasticity is measured in a shear mode at a temperature range of −70 ° C. to 150 ° C. and a temperature rise rate of 5 ° C./min, and the temperature corresponding to the peak top temperature of tan δ is defined as Tg of the homopolymer.
具体的には、温度計、攪拌機、窒素導入管および還流冷却管を備えた反応器に、モノマー100重量部、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル0.2重量部および重合溶媒として酢酸エチル200重量部を投入し、窒素ガスを流通させながら1時間攪拌する。このようにして重合系内の酸素を除去した後、63℃に昇温し10時間反応させる。次いで、室温まで冷却し、固形分濃度33重量%のホモポリマー溶液を得る。次いで、このホモポリマー溶液を剥離ライナー上に流延塗布し、乾燥して厚さ約2mmの試験サンプル(シート状のホモポリマー)を作製する。この試験サンプルを直径7.9mmの円盤状に打ち抜き、パラレルプレートで挟み込み、粘弾性試験機(ティー・エイ・インスツルメント・ジャパン社製、機種名「ARES」)を用いて周波数1Hzのせん断歪みを与えながら、温度領域-70℃~150℃、5℃/分の昇温速度でせん断モードにより粘弾性を測定し、tanδのピークトップ温度に相当する温度をホモポリマーのTgとする。 As the glass transition temperature of the homopolymer of the monomer not described in the above Polymer Handbook, the value obtained by the following measuring method shall be used.
Specifically, in a reactor equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, a nitrogen introduction tube and a reflux condenser, 100 parts by weight of a monomer, 0.2 parts by weight of 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile and acetic acid as a polymerization solvent. Add 200 parts by weight of ethyl and stir for 1 hour while flowing nitrogen gas. After removing oxygen in the polymerization system in this way, the temperature is raised to 63 ° C. and the reaction is carried out for 10 hours. Then, the mixture is cooled to room temperature to obtain a homopolymer solution having a solid content concentration of 33% by weight. Next, this homopolymer solution is cast-coated on a release liner and dried to prepare a test sample (sheet-shaped homopolymer) having a thickness of about 2 mm. This test sample is punched into a disk shape with a diameter of 7.9 mm, sandwiched between parallel plates, and shear strain with a frequency of 1 Hz using a viscoelasticity tester (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, model name "ARES"). The viscoelasticity is measured in a shear mode at a temperature range of −70 ° C. to 150 ° C. and a temperature rise rate of 5 ° C./min, and the temperature corresponding to the peak top temperature of tan δ is defined as Tg of the homopolymer.
特に限定するものではないが、ポリマー(A)の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、通常、凡そ20×104以上であることが適当である。かかるMwのポリマー(A)によると、良好な凝集性を示す粘着剤が得られやすい。より高い凝集力を得る観点から、いくつかの好ましい態様において、ポリマー(A)のMwは、例えば30×104以上であってよく、40×104以上でもよく、50×104以上でもよく、60×104以上でもよく、80×104以上でもよい。また、ポリマー(A)のMwは、通常、凡そ500×104以下であることが適当である。かかるMwのポリマー(A)は、適度な流動性(ポリマー鎖の運動性)を示す粘着剤を形成しやすいことから、貼付け初期の粘着力が低く、かつ粘着力上昇の大きい補強用フィルムの実現に適している。ポリマー(A)のMwが高すぎないことは、ポリマー(B)との相溶性向上の観点からも好ましい。いくつかの好ましい態様において、ポリマー(A)のMwは、例えば250×104以下であってよく、200×104以下でもよく、150×104以下でもよく、100×104以下でもよく、70×104以下でもよい。
Although not particularly limited, it is generally appropriate that the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (A) is about 20 × 104 or more. According to the polymer (A) of Mw, it is easy to obtain a pressure-sensitive adhesive showing good cohesiveness. From the viewpoint of obtaining higher cohesive force, in some preferred embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (A) may be, for example, 30 × 10 4 or more, 40 × 10 4 or more, or 50 × 10 4 or more. , 60 × 10 4 or more, or 80 × 10 4 or more. Further, it is usually appropriate that the Mw of the polymer (A) is about 500 × 104 or less. Since the polymer (A) of Mw easily forms a pressure-sensitive adhesive exhibiting appropriate fluidity (movement of polymer chains), a reinforcing film having a low adhesive strength at the initial stage of application and a large increase in adhesive strength can be realized. Suitable for. It is preferable that the Mw of the polymer (A) is not too high from the viewpoint of improving the compatibility with the polymer (B). In some preferred embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (A) may be, for example, 250 × 10 4 or less, 200 × 10 4 or less, 150 × 10 4 or less, 100 × 10 4 or less. It may be 70 × 10 4 or less.
なお、この明細書において、ポリマー(A)および後述のポリマー(B)のMwは、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)によりポリスチレン換算して求めることができる。より具体的には、後述する実施例において記載する方法および条件に準じてMwを測定することができる。
In this specification, the Mw of the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) described later can be determined by polystyrene conversion by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). More specifically, Mw can be measured according to the methods and conditions described in the examples described later.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムにおけるポリマー(A)としては、アクリル系ポリマーを好ましく採用することができる。ポリマー(A)としてアクリル系ポリマーを用いると、ポリマー(B)との良好な相溶性が得られやすくなる傾向にある。ポリマー(A)とポリマー(B)との相溶性が良いことは、粘着剤層内におけるポリマー(B)の移動性向上を通じて、初期粘着力の低減および加熱後粘着力の向上に寄与し得るので好ましい。また、分子設計の自由度が高いアクリル系ポリマーは、粘着特性、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力をバランスよく改善し得る粘着剤材料として好適である。
As the polymer (A) in the reinforcing film disclosed here, an acrylic polymer can be preferably adopted. When an acrylic polymer is used as the polymer (A), good compatibility with the polymer (B) tends to be easily obtained. The good compatibility between the polymer (A) and the polymer (B) can contribute to the reduction of the initial adhesive force and the improvement of the adhesive force after heating by improving the mobility of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. preferable. Further, an acrylic polymer having a high degree of freedom in molecular design is suitable as a pressure-sensitive adhesive material capable of improving adhesive properties, bending recovery and bending holding power in a well-balanced manner.
アクリル系ポリマーは、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来するモノマー単位を50重量%以上含有するポリマー、すなわち該アクリル系ポリマーを調製するためのモノマー成分(モノマー原料A)の全量のうち50重量%以上が(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルであるポリマーであり得る。(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルとしては、炭素数1~20の(すなわち、C1-20の)直鎖または分岐鎖状のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが好ましく用いられ得る。特性のバランスをとりやすいことから、モノマー原料Aのうち(メタ)アクリル酸C1-20アルキルエステルの割合は、例えば50重量%以上であってよく、60重量%以上でもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、モノマー原料Aのうち(メタ)アクリル酸C1-20アルキルエステルの割合は、70重量%以上であり、より好ましくは80重量%以上、さらに好ましくは85重量%以上、特に好ましくは90重量%以上である。かかるモノマー組成のアクリル系ポリマーを用いることで、粘着力上昇と、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力とをバランスよく両立する粘着剤が得られやすい。また、モノマー原料Aのうち(メタ)アクリル酸C1-20アルキルエステルの割合は、例えば99.9重量%以下であってよく、98重量%以下でもよく、95重量%以下でもよい。いくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Aのうち(メタ)アクリル酸C1-20アルキルエステルの割合は、例えば90重量%以下であってよく、85重量%以下でもよく、80重量%以下でもよい。
The acrylic polymer is, for example, a polymer containing 50% by weight or more of a monomer unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, that is, 50 out of the total amount of the monomer component (monomer raw material A) for preparing the acrylic polymer. It can be a polymer in which% by weight or more is a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester. As the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (that is, C 1-20 ) can be preferably used. Since it is easy to balance the characteristics, the ratio of the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 50% by weight or more, or 60% by weight or more. In some preferred embodiments, the proportion of (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A is 70% by weight or more, more preferably 80% by weight or more, still more preferably 85% by weight or more. Particularly preferably, it is 90% by weight or more. By using an acrylic polymer having such a monomer composition, it is easy to obtain a pressure-sensitive adhesive having both an increase in adhesive strength and a bending recovery property and a bending holding force in a well-balanced manner. The proportion of the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 99.9% by weight or less, 98% by weight or less, or 95% by weight or less. In some embodiments, the proportion of the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 90% by weight or less, 85% by weight or less, or 80% by weight or less.
(メタ)アクリル酸C1-20アルキルエステルの非限定的な具体例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸s-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸t-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ペンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソペンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソオクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ノニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソノニル、(メタ)アクリル酸デシル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ウンデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ドデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸トリデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸テトラデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ペンタデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘキサデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘプタデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ステアリル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソステアリル、(メタ)アクリル酸ノナデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸エイコシル等が挙げられる。
Non-limiting specific examples of the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-20 alkyl ester include methyl (meth) acrylic acid, ethyl (meth) acrylic acid, propyl (meth) acrylic acid, and isopropyl (meth) acrylic acid. N-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, isopentyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Hexyl acrylate, (meth) heptyl acrylate, (meth) octyl acrylate, (meth) 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, (meth) isooctyl acrylate, (meth) nonyl acrylate, (meth) isononyl acrylate, (meth) ) Decyl acrylate, (meth) isodecyl acrylate, (meth) undecyl acrylate, (meth) dodecyl acrylate, (meth) tridecyl acrylate, (meth) tetradecyl acrylate, (meth) pentadecyl acrylate, (meth) Examples thereof include hexadecyl acrylate, heptadecyl (meth) acrylate, stearyl (meth) acrylate, isostearyl (meth) acrylate, nonadecil (meth) acrylate, and eicocil (meth) acrylate.
これらのうち、少なくとも(メタ)アクリル酸C1-18アルキルエステルを用いることが好ましく、少なくとも(メタ)アクリル酸C1-14アルキルエステルを用いることがより好ましい。いくつかの態様において、アクリル系ポリマーは、(メタ)アクリル酸C4-12アルキルエステル(好ましくはアクリル酸C4-10アルキルエステル、例えばアクリル酸C6-10アルキルエステル)から選択される少なくとも一種を、モノマー単位として含有し得る。例えば、アクリル酸n-ブチル(BA)およびアクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル(2EHA)の一方または両方を含むアクリル系ポリマーが好ましく、少なくとも2EHAを含むアクリル系ポリマーが特に好ましい。
Of these, it is preferable to use at least (meth) acrylic acid C 1-18 alkyl ester, and it is more preferable to use at least (meth) acrylic acid C 1-14 alkyl ester. In some embodiments, the acrylic polymer is at least one selected from (meth) acrylic acid C 4-12 alkyl esters (preferably acrylic acid C 4-10 alkyl esters, eg acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl esters). Can be contained as a monomer unit. For example, an acrylic polymer containing one or both of n-butyl acrylate (BA) and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) is preferable, and an acrylic polymer containing at least 2EHA is particularly preferable.
いくつかの好ましい態様において、アクリル系ポリマーを調製するためのモノマー原料Aのうちアクリル酸C6-10アルキルエステル(好適にはアクリル酸C8-9アルキルエステル、典型的には2EHA)の割合は、70重量%以上であり、より好ましくは80重量%以上、さらに好ましくは85重量%以上、特に好ましくは90重量%以上である。かかるモノマー組成のアクリル系ポリマーは、ここに開示される技術による効果の実現に特に好適である。また、モノマー原料Aのうちアクリル酸C6-10アルキルエステル(好適にはアクリル酸C8-9アルキルエステル、典型的には2EHA)の割合は、例えば99.9重量%以下であってよく、初期の低粘着力、屈曲回復性等の観点から、98重量%以下でもよく、95重量%以下でもよい。
In some preferred embodiments, the proportion of acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl ester (preferably acrylic acid C 8-9 alkyl ester, typically 2EHA) in the monomer raw material A for preparing the acrylic polymer is , 70% by weight or more, more preferably 80% by weight or more, still more preferably 85% by weight or more, and particularly preferably 90% by weight or more. Acrylic polymers with such a monomer composition are particularly suitable for achieving the effects of the techniques disclosed herein. The proportion of acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl ester (preferably acrylic acid C 8-9 alkyl ester, typically 2EHA) in the monomer raw material A may be, for example, 99.9% by weight or less. From the viewpoint of initial low adhesive strength, bending recovery, etc., it may be 98% by weight or less, or 95% by weight or less.
また、いくつかの好ましい態様において、アクリル系ポリマーを調製するためのモノマー原料A中、(メタ)アクリル酸C1-3アルキルエステル(例えば(メタ)アクリル酸C1アルキルエステル、典型的にはメタクリル酸メチル(MMA))の割合が制限されていることが好ましい。(メタ)アクリル酸C1-3アルキルエステル(例えば(メタ)アクリル酸C1アルキルエステル、典型的にはMMA)は、Tgが相対的に高い傾向があり、上記モノマー成分を使用したアクリル系ポリマーを含む粘着剤は、凝集性が高くなりがちである。(メタ)アクリル酸C1-3アルキルエステルの使用量を制限することにより、粘着剤の凝集力を適度に低減して、屈曲保持力や粘着力上昇の両立に適した弾性率(典型的には表面弾性率)を好ましく実現することができる。そのような観点から、上記モノマー原料Aのうち(メタ)アクリル酸C1-3アルキルエステル(例えば(メタ)アクリル酸C1アルキルエステル、典型的にはMMA)の割合は、8重量%以下とすることが適当であり、好ましくは6重量%以下、より好ましくは3重量%以下、さらに好ましくは1重量%以下(例えば0~0.3重量%)である。
Also, in some preferred embodiments, the (meth) acrylic acid C 1-3 alkyl ester (eg, (meth) acrylic acid C 1 alkyl ester, typically methacrylic) in the monomer raw material A for preparing the acrylic polymer. It is preferable that the proportion of methyl acid (MMA)) is limited. (Meta) acrylic acid C 1-3 alkyl ester (for example, (meth) acrylic acid C 1 alkyl ester, typically MMA) tends to have a relatively high Tg, and is an acrylic polymer using the above-mentioned monomer component. Adhesives containing, tend to be highly cohesive. By limiting the amount of (meth) acrylic acid C 1-3 alkyl ester used, the cohesive force of the adhesive is appropriately reduced, and the elastic modulus suitable for achieving both bending holding force and increasing adhesive force (typically). Is a surface elastic modulus) can be preferably realized. From such a viewpoint, the ratio of (meth) acrylic acid C 1-3 alkyl ester (for example, (meth) acrylic acid C 1 alkyl ester, typically MMA) to the above-mentioned monomer raw material A is 8% by weight or less. It is suitable, preferably 6% by weight or less, more preferably 3% by weight or less, still more preferably 1% by weight or less (for example, 0 to 0.3% by weight).
モノマー原料Aは、主成分としての(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルとともに、必要に応じて、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルと共重合可能な他のモノマー(共重合性モノマー)を含んでいてもよい。共重合性モノマーとしては、極性基(例えば、カルボキシ基、水酸基、窒素原子含有環等)を有するモノマーを好適に使用することができる。極性基を有するモノマーは、アクリル系ポリマーに架橋点を導入したり、アクリル系ポリマーの凝集力を高めたりするために役立ち得る。共重合性モノマーは、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
The monomer raw material A may contain a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester as a main component and, if necessary, another monomer (copolymerizable monomer) copolymerizable with the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester. .. As the copolymerizable monomer, a monomer having a polar group (for example, a carboxy group, a hydroxyl group, a nitrogen atom-containing ring, etc.) can be preferably used. Monomers having polar groups can be useful for introducing cross-linking points in acrylic polymers and for enhancing the cohesive power of acrylic polymers. The copolymerizable monomer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
共重合性モノマーの非限定的な具体例としては、以下のものが挙げられる。
水酸基含有モノマー:例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸4-ヒドロキシブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸6-ヒドロキシヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸8-ヒドロキシオクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸10-ヒドロキシデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸12-ヒドロキシラウリル、(4-ヒドロキシメチルシクロへキシル)メチル(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリル酸ヒドロキシアルキル等。
窒素原子含有環を有するモノマー:例えば、N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、N-メチルビニルピロリドン、N-ビニルピリジン、N-ビニルピペリドン、N-ビニルピリミジン、N-ビニルピペラジン、N-ビニルピラジン、N-ビニルピロール、N-ビニルイミダゾール、N-ビニルオキサゾール、N-(メタ)アクリロイル-2-ピロリドン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピペリジン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピロリジン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルモルホリン、N-ビニルモルホリン、N-ビニル-3-モルホリノン、N-ビニル-2-カプロラクタム、N-ビニル-1,3-オキサジン-2-オン、N-ビニル-3,5-モルホリンジオン、N-ビニルピラゾール、N-ビニルイソオキサゾール、N-ビニルチアゾール、N-ビニルイソチアゾール、N-ビニルピリダジン等;
例えば、N-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシメチレンスクシンイミド、N-(メタ)アクリロイル-6-オキシヘキサメチレンスクシンイミド、N-(メタ)アクリロイル-8-オキシヘキサメチレンスクシンイミド等の、スクシンイミド骨格を有するモノマー;
例えば、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド、N-イソプロピルマレイミド、N-ラウリルマレイミド、N-フェニルマレイミド等の、マレイミド類;および、
例えば、N-メチルイタコンイミド、N-エチルイタコンイミド、N-ブチルイタコンイミド、N-オクチルイタコンイミド、N-2-エチルへキシルイタコンイミド、N-シクロへキシルイタコンイミド、N-ラウリルイタコンイミド等の、イタコンイミド類。
カルボキシ基含有モノマー:例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、カルボキシエチルアクリレート、カルボキシペンチルアクリレート、イタコン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸等。
酸無水物基含有モノマー:例えば、無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸。
エポキシ基含有モノマー:例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジルや(メタ)アクリル酸-2-エチルグリシジルエーテル等のエポキシ基含有アクリレート、アリルグリシジルエーテル、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジルエーテル等。
シアノ基含有モノマー:例えば、アクリロニトリル、メタクリロニトリル等。
イソシアネート基含有モノマー:例えば、2-イソシアナートエチル(メタ)アクリレート等。
アミド基含有モノマー:例えば、(メタ)アクリルアミド;N,N-ジメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジイソプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジ(n-ブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジ(t-ブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド等の、N,N-ジアルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;N-エチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-イソプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-ブチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-n-ブチル(メタ)アクリルアミド等の、N-アルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;N-ビニルアセトアミド等のN-ビニルカルボン酸アミド類;水酸基とアミド基とを有するモノマー、例えば、N-(2-ヒドロキシエチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(2-ヒドロキシプロピル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(1-ヒドロキシプロピル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(3-ヒドロキシプロピル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(2-ヒドロキシブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(3-ヒドロキシブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(4-ヒドロキシブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド等の、N-ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;アルコキシ基とアミド基とを有するモノマー、例えば、N-メトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-メトキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-ブトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド等の、N-アルコキシアルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;その他、N,N-ジメチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド等。
(メタ)アクリル酸アミノアルキル類:例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アミノエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸N,N-ジメチルアミノエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸N,N-ジエチルアミノエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸t-ブチルアミノエチル。
アルコキシ基含有モノマー:例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸2-メトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-メトキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロポキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ブトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エトキシプロピル等の、(メタ)アクリル酸アルコキシアルキル類;(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシエチレングリコール、(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシポリプロピレングリコール等の、(メタ)アクリル酸アルコキシアルキレングリコール類。
スルホン酸基またはリン酸基を含有するモノマー:例えば、スチレンスルホン酸、アリルスルホン酸、ビニルスルホン酸ナトリウム、2-(メタ)アクリルアミド-2-メチルプロパンスルホン酸、(メタ)アクリルアミドプロパンスルホン酸、スルホプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシナフタレンスルホン酸、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリロイルホスフェート等。
脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステル:例えば、シクロペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート等。
芳香族炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステル:例えば、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等。
ビニルエーテル類:例えば、メチルビニルエーテルやエチルビニルエーテル等のビニルアルキルエーテル。
ビニルエステル類:例えば、酢酸ビニル、プロピオン酸ビニル等。
芳香族ビニル化合物:例えば、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン等。
オレフィン類:例えば、エチレン、ブタジエン、イソプレン、イソブチレン等。
その他、(メタ)アクリル酸テトラヒドロフルフリル等の複素環含有(メタ)アクリレート、塩化ビニルやフッ素原子含有(メタ)アクリレート等のハロゲン原子含有(メタ)アクリレート、シリコーン(メタ)アクリレート等のケイ素原子含有(メタ)アクリレート、テルペン化合物誘導体アルコールから得られる(メタ)アクリル酸エステル等。 Non-limiting specific examples of the copolymerizable monomer include the following.
Hydroxyl-containing monomers: For example, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic. 4-Hydroxybutyl acid, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth) acrylic acid, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth) acrylic acid, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth) acrylic acid, 12-hydroxylauryl (meth) acrylic acid, (4-hydroxy) Methylcyclohexyl) Methyl (meth) acrylate and the like (meth) hydroxyalkyl acrylate and the like.
Monomers having a nitrogen atom-containing ring: for example, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-methylvinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylpyridine, N-vinylpiperidone, N-vinylpyrimidine, N-vinylpiperazine, N-vinylpyrazine, N- Vinylpyrrole, N-vinylimidazole, N-vinyloxazole, N- (meth) acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone, N- (meth) acryloyl piperidine, N- (meth) acryloyl pyrrolidine, N- (meth) acryloyl morpholine, N- Vinylmorpholin, N-vinyl-3-morpholinone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactam, N-vinyl-1,3-oxadin-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-morpholindione, N-vinylpyrazole, N -Vinylisoxazole, N-vinylthiazole, N-vinylisothiazole, N-vinylpyridazine, etc .;
Monomers having a succinimide skeleton, such as N- (meth) acryloyloxymethylene succinimide, N- (meth) acryloyl-6-oxyhexamethylene succinimide, N- (meth) acryloyl-8-oxyhexamethylene succinimide;
Maleimides such as, for example, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-isopropylmaleimide, N-laurylmaleimide, N-phenylmaleimide; and
For example, N-methylitaconimide, N-ethylitaconimide, N-butylitaconimide, N-octylitaconimide, N-2-ethylhexylitaconimide, N-cyclohexylitaconimide, N-laurylitaconimide, etc. Itaconimides.
Monomer containing carboxy group: For example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, carboxyethyl acrylate, carboxypentyl acrylate, itaconic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid and the like.
Acid anhydride group-containing monomer: For example, maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride.
Epoxide group-containing monomer: For example, epoxy group-containing acrylate such as (meth) glycidyl acrylate and (meth) -2-ethyl glycidyl ether, allyl glycidyl ether, glycidyl ether (meth) acrylate and the like.
Cyano group-containing monomer: For example, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, etc.
Isocyanate group-containing monomer: For example, 2-isocyanatoethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
Amide group-containing monomers: For example, (meth) acrylamide; N, N-dimethyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-diethyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-dipropyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-diisopropyl (meth). N, N-dialkyl (meth) acrylamide, such as acrylamide, N, N-di (n-butyl) (meth) acrylamide, N, N-di (t-butyl) (meth) acrylamide; N-ethyl (meth) N-alkyl (meth) acrylamide such as acrylamide, N-isopropyl (meth) acrylamide, N-butyl (meth) acrylamide, Nn-butyl (meth) acrylamide; N-vinylcarboxylic acid amide such as N-vinylacetamide. Classes; monomers having a hydroxyl group and an amide group, such as N- (2-hydroxyethyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (2-hydroxypropyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (1-hydroxypropyl) (meth). Acrylamide, N- (3-hydroxypropyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (2-hydroxybutyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (3-hydroxybutyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (4-hydroxybutyl) ( N-hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylamide, such as meta) acrylamide; monomers with an alkoxy group and an amide group, such as N-methoxymethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-butoxymethyl ( N-alkoxyalkyl (meth) acrylamide such as meta) acrylamide; and N, N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylamide and the like.
Aminoalkyl (meth) acrylates: For example, aminoethyl (meth) acrylate, N, N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, N, N-diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, t (meth) acrylate. -Butyl aminoethyl.
Alkoxy group-containing monomers: for example, 2-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-methoxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, propoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid. Alkoxyalkyls (meth) acrylates such as butoxyethyl, ethoxypropyl (meth) acrylates; alkoxyalkylene glycols (meth) acrylates such as methoxyethylene glycol (meth) acrylates, methoxypolypropylene glycols (meth) acrylates, etc. Kind.
Monomer containing a sulfonic acid group or a phosphate group: for example, styrene sulfonic acid, allyl sulfonic acid, sodium vinyl sulfonic acid, 2- (meth) acrylamide-2-methyl propane sulfonic acid, (meth) acrylamide propane sulfonic acid, sulfo. Propyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acryloyloxynaphthalene sulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethyl acryloyl phosphate, etc.
(Meta) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group: For example, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
(Meta) acrylic acid ester having an aromatic hydrocarbon group: For example, phenyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
Vinyl ethers: For example, vinyl alkyl ethers such as methyl vinyl ether and ethyl vinyl ether.
Vinyl esters: For example, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, etc.
Aromatic vinyl compounds: For example, styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene and the like.
Olefins: For example, ethylene, butadiene, isoprene, isobutylene and the like.
In addition, heterocyclic-containing (meth) acrylates such as tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate, halogen atom-containing (meth) acrylates such as vinyl chloride and fluorine atom-containing (meth) acrylates, and silicon atom-containing silicone (meth) acrylates. (Meta) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid ester obtained from terpene compound derivative alcohol, etc.
水酸基含有モノマー:例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸4-ヒドロキシブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸6-ヒドロキシヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸8-ヒドロキシオクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸10-ヒドロキシデシル、(メタ)アクリル酸12-ヒドロキシラウリル、(4-ヒドロキシメチルシクロへキシル)メチル(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリル酸ヒドロキシアルキル等。
窒素原子含有環を有するモノマー:例えば、N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、N-メチルビニルピロリドン、N-ビニルピリジン、N-ビニルピペリドン、N-ビニルピリミジン、N-ビニルピペラジン、N-ビニルピラジン、N-ビニルピロール、N-ビニルイミダゾール、N-ビニルオキサゾール、N-(メタ)アクリロイル-2-ピロリドン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピペリジン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピロリジン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルモルホリン、N-ビニルモルホリン、N-ビニル-3-モルホリノン、N-ビニル-2-カプロラクタム、N-ビニル-1,3-オキサジン-2-オン、N-ビニル-3,5-モルホリンジオン、N-ビニルピラゾール、N-ビニルイソオキサゾール、N-ビニルチアゾール、N-ビニルイソチアゾール、N-ビニルピリダジン等;
例えば、N-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシメチレンスクシンイミド、N-(メタ)アクリロイル-6-オキシヘキサメチレンスクシンイミド、N-(メタ)アクリロイル-8-オキシヘキサメチレンスクシンイミド等の、スクシンイミド骨格を有するモノマー;
例えば、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド、N-イソプロピルマレイミド、N-ラウリルマレイミド、N-フェニルマレイミド等の、マレイミド類;および、
例えば、N-メチルイタコンイミド、N-エチルイタコンイミド、N-ブチルイタコンイミド、N-オクチルイタコンイミド、N-2-エチルへキシルイタコンイミド、N-シクロへキシルイタコンイミド、N-ラウリルイタコンイミド等の、イタコンイミド類。
カルボキシ基含有モノマー:例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、カルボキシエチルアクリレート、カルボキシペンチルアクリレート、イタコン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸等。
酸無水物基含有モノマー:例えば、無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸。
エポキシ基含有モノマー:例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジルや(メタ)アクリル酸-2-エチルグリシジルエーテル等のエポキシ基含有アクリレート、アリルグリシジルエーテル、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジルエーテル等。
シアノ基含有モノマー:例えば、アクリロニトリル、メタクリロニトリル等。
イソシアネート基含有モノマー:例えば、2-イソシアナートエチル(メタ)アクリレート等。
アミド基含有モノマー:例えば、(メタ)アクリルアミド;N,N-ジメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジイソプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジ(n-ブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N,N-ジ(t-ブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド等の、N,N-ジアルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;N-エチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-イソプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-ブチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-n-ブチル(メタ)アクリルアミド等の、N-アルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;N-ビニルアセトアミド等のN-ビニルカルボン酸アミド類;水酸基とアミド基とを有するモノマー、例えば、N-(2-ヒドロキシエチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(2-ヒドロキシプロピル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(1-ヒドロキシプロピル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(3-ヒドロキシプロピル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(2-ヒドロキシブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(3-ヒドロキシブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(4-ヒドロキシブチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド等の、N-ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;アルコキシ基とアミド基とを有するモノマー、例えば、N-メトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-メトキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-ブトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド等の、N-アルコキシアルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;その他、N,N-ジメチルアミノプロピル(メタ)アクリルアミド等。
(メタ)アクリル酸アミノアルキル類:例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アミノエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸N,N-ジメチルアミノエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸N,N-ジエチルアミノエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸t-ブチルアミノエチル。
アルコキシ基含有モノマー:例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸2-メトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-メトキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロポキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ブトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エトキシプロピル等の、(メタ)アクリル酸アルコキシアルキル類;(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシエチレングリコール、(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシポリプロピレングリコール等の、(メタ)アクリル酸アルコキシアルキレングリコール類。
スルホン酸基またはリン酸基を含有するモノマー:例えば、スチレンスルホン酸、アリルスルホン酸、ビニルスルホン酸ナトリウム、2-(メタ)アクリルアミド-2-メチルプロパンスルホン酸、(メタ)アクリルアミドプロパンスルホン酸、スルホプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシナフタレンスルホン酸、2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリロイルホスフェート等。
脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステル:例えば、シクロペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート等。
芳香族炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステル:例えば、フェニル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等。
ビニルエーテル類:例えば、メチルビニルエーテルやエチルビニルエーテル等のビニルアルキルエーテル。
ビニルエステル類:例えば、酢酸ビニル、プロピオン酸ビニル等。
芳香族ビニル化合物:例えば、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン等。
オレフィン類:例えば、エチレン、ブタジエン、イソプレン、イソブチレン等。
その他、(メタ)アクリル酸テトラヒドロフルフリル等の複素環含有(メタ)アクリレート、塩化ビニルやフッ素原子含有(メタ)アクリレート等のハロゲン原子含有(メタ)アクリレート、シリコーン(メタ)アクリレート等のケイ素原子含有(メタ)アクリレート、テルペン化合物誘導体アルコールから得られる(メタ)アクリル酸エステル等。 Non-limiting specific examples of the copolymerizable monomer include the following.
Hydroxyl-containing monomers: For example, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic. 4-Hydroxybutyl acid, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth) acrylic acid, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth) acrylic acid, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth) acrylic acid, 12-hydroxylauryl (meth) acrylic acid, (4-hydroxy) Methylcyclohexyl) Methyl (meth) acrylate and the like (meth) hydroxyalkyl acrylate and the like.
Monomers having a nitrogen atom-containing ring: for example, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-methylvinylpyrrolidone, N-vinylpyridine, N-vinylpiperidone, N-vinylpyrimidine, N-vinylpiperazine, N-vinylpyrazine, N- Vinylpyrrole, N-vinylimidazole, N-vinyloxazole, N- (meth) acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone, N- (meth) acryloyl piperidine, N- (meth) acryloyl pyrrolidine, N- (meth) acryloyl morpholine, N- Vinylmorpholin, N-vinyl-3-morpholinone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactam, N-vinyl-1,3-oxadin-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-morpholindione, N-vinylpyrazole, N -Vinylisoxazole, N-vinylthiazole, N-vinylisothiazole, N-vinylpyridazine, etc .;
Monomers having a succinimide skeleton, such as N- (meth) acryloyloxymethylene succinimide, N- (meth) acryloyl-6-oxyhexamethylene succinimide, N- (meth) acryloyl-8-oxyhexamethylene succinimide;
Maleimides such as, for example, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-isopropylmaleimide, N-laurylmaleimide, N-phenylmaleimide; and
For example, N-methylitaconimide, N-ethylitaconimide, N-butylitaconimide, N-octylitaconimide, N-2-ethylhexylitaconimide, N-cyclohexylitaconimide, N-laurylitaconimide, etc. Itaconimides.
Monomer containing carboxy group: For example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, carboxyethyl acrylate, carboxypentyl acrylate, itaconic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid and the like.
Acid anhydride group-containing monomer: For example, maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride.
Epoxide group-containing monomer: For example, epoxy group-containing acrylate such as (meth) glycidyl acrylate and (meth) -2-ethyl glycidyl ether, allyl glycidyl ether, glycidyl ether (meth) acrylate and the like.
Cyano group-containing monomer: For example, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, etc.
Isocyanate group-containing monomer: For example, 2-isocyanatoethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
Amide group-containing monomers: For example, (meth) acrylamide; N, N-dimethyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-diethyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-dipropyl (meth) acrylamide, N, N-diisopropyl (meth). N, N-dialkyl (meth) acrylamide, such as acrylamide, N, N-di (n-butyl) (meth) acrylamide, N, N-di (t-butyl) (meth) acrylamide; N-ethyl (meth) N-alkyl (meth) acrylamide such as acrylamide, N-isopropyl (meth) acrylamide, N-butyl (meth) acrylamide, Nn-butyl (meth) acrylamide; N-vinylcarboxylic acid amide such as N-vinylacetamide. Classes; monomers having a hydroxyl group and an amide group, such as N- (2-hydroxyethyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (2-hydroxypropyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (1-hydroxypropyl) (meth). Acrylamide, N- (3-hydroxypropyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (2-hydroxybutyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (3-hydroxybutyl) (meth) acrylamide, N- (4-hydroxybutyl) ( N-hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylamide, such as meta) acrylamide; monomers with an alkoxy group and an amide group, such as N-methoxymethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-butoxymethyl ( N-alkoxyalkyl (meth) acrylamide such as meta) acrylamide; and N, N-dimethylaminopropyl (meth) acrylamide and the like.
Aminoalkyl (meth) acrylates: For example, aminoethyl (meth) acrylate, N, N-dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, N, N-diethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, t (meth) acrylate. -Butyl aminoethyl.
Alkoxy group-containing monomers: for example, 2-methoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-methoxypropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, propoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid. Alkoxyalkyls (meth) acrylates such as butoxyethyl, ethoxypropyl (meth) acrylates; alkoxyalkylene glycols (meth) acrylates such as methoxyethylene glycol (meth) acrylates, methoxypolypropylene glycols (meth) acrylates, etc. Kind.
Monomer containing a sulfonic acid group or a phosphate group: for example, styrene sulfonic acid, allyl sulfonic acid, sodium vinyl sulfonic acid, 2- (meth) acrylamide-2-methyl propane sulfonic acid, (meth) acrylamide propane sulfonic acid, sulfo. Propyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acryloyloxynaphthalene sulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethyl acryloyl phosphate, etc.
(Meta) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group: For example, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
(Meta) acrylic acid ester having an aromatic hydrocarbon group: For example, phenyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
Vinyl ethers: For example, vinyl alkyl ethers such as methyl vinyl ether and ethyl vinyl ether.
Vinyl esters: For example, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, etc.
Aromatic vinyl compounds: For example, styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene and the like.
Olefins: For example, ethylene, butadiene, isoprene, isobutylene and the like.
In addition, heterocyclic-containing (meth) acrylates such as tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate, halogen atom-containing (meth) acrylates such as vinyl chloride and fluorine atom-containing (meth) acrylates, and silicon atom-containing silicone (meth) acrylates. (Meta) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid ester obtained from terpene compound derivative alcohol, etc.
このような共重合性モノマーを使用する場合、その使用量は特に限定されないが、通常はモノマー原料Aの0.01重量%以上とすることが適当である。共重合性モノマーの使用による効果をよりよく発揮する観点から、共重合性モノマーの使用量をモノマー原料Aの0.1重量%以上としてもよく、1重量%以上としてもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、モノマー原料A中の共重合性モノマーの含有量は、3重量%以上であり、より好ましくは5重量%以上、さらに好ましくは7重量%以上(例えば8重量%以上)である。共重合性モノマーの使用量が多くなるほど、凝集性が高まり、屈曲回復性が向上する傾向がある。また、共重合性モノマーの使用量は、モノマー原料Aの50重量%以下とすることができ、30重量%以下とすることが好ましい。これにより、粘着剤の凝集力が高くなり過ぎることを防ぎ、常温(25℃)でのタック感を向上させ得る。いくつかの好ましい態様において、共重合性モノマーの使用量は、モノマー原料Aの20重量%以下であり、より好ましくは15重量%以下(例えば12重量%以下)であり、10重量%以下であってもよい。共重合性モノマーの使用量を制限することにより、粘着剤の凝集力が低下し、弾性率(典型的には表面弾性率)が好適な範囲となり、優れた屈曲保持力が得られやすく、粘着力上昇を実現しやすい。
When such a copolymerizable monomer is used, the amount used is not particularly limited, but it is usually appropriate to use 0.01% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A. From the viewpoint of better exerting the effect of using the copolymerizable monomer, the amount of the copolymerizable monomer used may be 0.1% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A or 1% by weight or more. In some preferred embodiments, the content of the copolymerizable monomer in the monomer raw material A is 3% by weight or more, more preferably 5% by weight or more, still more preferably 7% by weight or more (for example, 8% by weight or more). Is. As the amount of the copolymerizable monomer used increases, the cohesiveness tends to increase and the bending recovery property tends to improve. Further, the amount of the copolymerizable monomer used can be 50% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, and is preferably 30% by weight or less. This prevents the cohesive force of the adhesive from becoming too high, and can improve the tackiness at room temperature (25 ° C.). In some preferred embodiments, the amount of the copolymerizable monomer used is 20% by weight or less, more preferably 15% by weight or less (eg, 12% by weight or less), and 10% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A. You may. By limiting the amount of the copolymerizable monomer used, the cohesive force of the adhesive is reduced, the elastic modulus (typically the surface elastic modulus) is in a suitable range, and excellent bending holding force is easily obtained, and the adhesive is adhered. It is easy to realize an increase in power.
いくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Aは、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーを含み得る。窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーの使用により、粘着剤の凝集力や極性を調整し、加熱後の粘着力を好適に向上させ得る。モノマー原料Aに窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーを含ませることによって、上記モノマー原料Aから形成されたポリマー(A)と、上記ポリマー(B)との相溶性が向上する傾向にある。これにより、加熱で粘着力を大きく上昇させることのできる補強用フィルムが得られやすくなる。
In some embodiments, the monomer raw material A may contain a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring. By using a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring, the cohesive force and polarity of the adhesive can be adjusted, and the adhesive force after heating can be suitably improved. By including the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring in the monomer raw material A, the compatibility between the polymer (A) formed from the monomer raw material A and the polymer (B) tends to be improved. This makes it easier to obtain a reinforcing film that can greatly increase the adhesive strength by heating.
窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーは、例えば上記例示のなかから適宜選択して、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。いくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Aは、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーとして、N-ビニル環状アミド、および(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する環状アミドからなる群から選ばれる少なくとも一種のモノマーを含有することが好ましい。
The monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring can be appropriately selected from the above examples, and can be used alone or in combination of two or more. In some embodiments, the monomer raw material A contains, as the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring, at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of an N-vinyl cyclic amide and a cyclic amide having a (meth) acryloyl group. Is preferable.
N-ビニル環状アミドの具体例としては、N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、N-ビニル-2-ピペリドン、N-ビニル-3-モルホリノン、N-ビニル-2-カプロラクタム、N-ビニル-1,3-オキサジン-2-オン、N-ビニル-3,5-モルホリンジオン等が挙げられる。特に好ましくはN-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、N-ビニル-2-カプロラクタムである。
(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する環状アミドの具体例としては、N-(メタ)アクリロイル-2-ピロリドン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピペリジン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピロリジン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルモルホリン等が挙げられる。好適例としては、N-アクリロイルモルホリン(ACMO)が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the N-vinyl cyclic amide include N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-2-piperidone, N-vinyl-3-morpholinone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactam, and N-vinyl-1,3. -Oxazine-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-morpholindione and the like can be mentioned. Particularly preferred are N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-vinyl-2-caprolactam.
Specific examples of the cyclic amide having a (meth) acryloyl group include N- (meth) acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone, N- (meth) acryloylpiperidin, N- (meth) acryloylpyrrolidine, N- (meth) acryloylmorpholine and the like. Can be mentioned. Preferable examples include N-acryloyl morpholine (ACMO).
(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する環状アミドの具体例としては、N-(メタ)アクリロイル-2-ピロリドン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピペリジン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルピロリジン、N-(メタ)アクリロイルモルホリン等が挙げられる。好適例としては、N-アクリロイルモルホリン(ACMO)が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the N-vinyl cyclic amide include N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-2-piperidone, N-vinyl-3-morpholinone, N-vinyl-2-caprolactam, and N-vinyl-1,3. -Oxazine-2-one, N-vinyl-3,5-morpholindione and the like can be mentioned. Particularly preferred are N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-vinyl-2-caprolactam.
Specific examples of the cyclic amide having a (meth) acryloyl group include N- (meth) acryloyl-2-pyrrolidone, N- (meth) acryloylpiperidin, N- (meth) acryloylpyrrolidine, N- (meth) acryloylmorpholine and the like. Can be mentioned. Preferable examples include N-acryloyl morpholine (ACMO).
窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーの使用量は、特に制限されず、通常、モノマー原料Aの40重量%以下とすることが適当であり、30重量%以下としてもよく、20重量%以下としてもよく、10重量%以下としてもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、凝集力を下げて弾性率(典型的には表面弾性率)を低下する観点から、モノマー原料A中、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーの含有量は、7重量%以下であり、より好ましくは5重量%以下、さらに好ましくは3重量%以下(例えば1.5重量%以下)である。また、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーの使用量は、通常、モノマー原料Aの0.01重量%以上(好ましくは0.1重量%以上、例えば0.5重量%以上)とすることが適当である。適度な凝集力、弾性率を得る観点から、いくつかの態様において、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーの使用量は、モノマー原料Aの0.8重量%以上としてもよく、1.0重量%以上としてもよい。
The amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring is not particularly limited, and is usually appropriately 40% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, 30% by weight or less, or 20% by weight or less. It may be 10% by weight or less. In some preferred embodiments, the content of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring in the monomer raw material A is 7% by weight or less from the viewpoint of lowering the cohesive force and lowering the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus). It is more preferably 5% by weight or less, still more preferably 3% by weight or less (for example, 1.5% by weight or less). Further, it is usually appropriate that the amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring used is 0.01% by weight or more (preferably 0.1% by weight or more, for example 0.5% by weight or more) of the monomer raw material A. be. From the viewpoint of obtaining an appropriate cohesive force and elastic modulus, in some embodiments, the amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring may be 0.8% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A, 1.0% by weight or more. May be.
いくつかの好ましい態様において、モノマー原料Aは、水酸基含有モノマーを含む。水酸基含有モノマーの使用により、粘着剤の凝集力や極性、ひいては弾性率(典型的には表面弾性率)を調整し、ここに開示される技術による効果を好ましく実現することができる。また、水酸基含有モノマーは、後述する架橋剤(例えば、イソシアネート系架橋剤)との反応点を提供し、架橋反応によって粘着剤の凝集力を高め得る。
In some preferred embodiments, the monomer raw material A comprises a hydroxyl group-containing monomer. By using the hydroxyl group-containing monomer, the cohesive force and polarity of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, and thus the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus) can be adjusted, and the effect of the technique disclosed herein can be preferably realized. Further, the hydroxyl group-containing monomer provides a reaction point with a cross-linking agent (for example, an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent) described later, and the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive can be enhanced by the cross-linking reaction.
水酸基含有モノマーとしては、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸4-ヒドロキシブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸6-ヒドロキシヘキシル、N-(2-ヒドロキシエチル)(メタ)アクリルアミド等を好適に使用することができる。なかでも好ましい例として、アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル(HEA)、アクリル酸4-ヒドロキシブチル(4HBA)、N-(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アクリルアミド(HEAA)が挙げられる。屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力に適した凝集力を得る観点から、4HBAが特に好ましい。
Examples of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth) acrylate, and N- (2-hydroxyethyl) (meth) acrylamide. It can be suitably used. Among them, preferred examples include 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA), 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate (4HBA), and N- (2-hydroxyethyl) acrylamide (HEAA). 4HBA is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of obtaining a cohesive force suitable for bending recovery and bending holding force.
水酸基含有モノマーの使用量は、特に制限されず、通常、モノマー原料Aの40重量%以下とすることが適当であり、30重量%以下としてもよく、20重量%以下としてもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、凝集力、ひいては弾性率(典型的には表面弾性率)を低下する観点から、モノマー原料A中、水酸基含有モノマーの含有量は、15重量%以下であり、より好ましくは12重量%以下(例えば10重量%以下)である。水酸基含有モノマーの使用量を制限することにより、ポリマー(B)の粘着剤層内での移動性が向上し、粘着力上昇を実現しやすい。他のいくつかの態様において、水酸基含有モノマーの含有量は、モノマー原料Aの5重量%以下としてもよい。また、水酸基含有モノマーの使用量は、モノマー原料Aの0.01重量%以上(好ましくは0.1重量%以上、例えば0.5重量%以上)とすることが適当である。適度な凝集力、弾性率を得る観点から、いくつかの好ましい態様において、水酸基含有モノマーの使用量は、モノマー原料Aの1重量%以上であり、より好ましくは3重量%以上、さらに好ましくは5重量%以上、特に好ましくは7重量%以上(例えば8重量%以上)である。
The amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer used is not particularly limited, and is usually appropriately 40% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, 30% by weight or less, or 20% by weight or less. In some preferred embodiments, the content of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in the monomer raw material A is 15% by weight or less, more preferably, from the viewpoint of reducing the cohesive force and thus the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus). Is 12% by weight or less (for example, 10% by weight or less). By limiting the amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer used, the mobility of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is improved, and it is easy to realize an increase in the pressure-sensitive adhesive force. In some other embodiments, the content of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer may be 5% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A. Further, it is appropriate that the amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer used is 0.01% by weight or more (preferably 0.1% by weight or more, for example, 0.5% by weight or more) of the monomer raw material A. From the viewpoint of obtaining an appropriate cohesive force and elastic modulus, in some preferred embodiments, the amount of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer used is 1% by weight or more, more preferably 3% by weight or more, still more preferably 5 of the monomer raw material A. It is 7% by weight or more, particularly preferably 7% by weight or more (for example, 8% by weight or more).
いくつかの態様において、共重合性モノマーとして、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーと水酸基含有モノマーとを併用することができる。この場合、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーと水酸基含有モノマーとの合計量は、例えば、モノマー原料Aの0.1重量%以上とすることができ、好ましくは1重量%以上、より好ましくは3重量%以上、さらに好ましくは5重量%以上、特に好ましくは7重量%以上(例えば9重量%以上)であり、10重量%以上としてもよく、15重量%以上としてもよく、20重量%以上としてもよく、25重量%以上としてもよい。また、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーと水酸基含有モノマーとの合計量は、例えば、モノマー原料Aの50重量%以下とすることができ、30重量%以下とすることが好ましい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーと水酸基含有モノマーとの合計量は、モノマー原料Aの20重量%以下であり、より好ましくは15重量%以下(例えば12重量%以下)である。
In some embodiments, a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and a hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be used in combination as the copolymerizable monomer. In this case, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be, for example, 0.1% by weight or more of the monomer raw material A, preferably 1% by weight or more, and more preferably 3% by weight. % Or more, more preferably 5% by weight or more, particularly preferably 7% by weight or more (for example, 9% by weight or more), 10% by weight or more, 15% by weight or more, or 20% by weight or more. It may be 25% by weight or more. Further, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer can be, for example, 50% by weight or less of the monomer raw material A, and is preferably 30% by weight or less. In some preferred embodiments, the total amount of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is 20% by weight or less, more preferably 15% by weight or less (for example, 12% by weight or less) of the monomer raw material A. be.
モノマー原料Aが窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーと水酸基含有モノマーとを組み合わせて含む態様において、該モノマー原料Aにおける窒素原子含有環を有するモノマーの含有量(WN)と水酸基含有モノマーの含有量(WOH)との関係(重量基準)は、特に限定されない。WN/WOHは、例えば0.01以上であってよく、通常は0.05以上が適当であり、0.10以上でもよく、0.12以上でもよい。また、WN/WOHは、例えば10以下であってよく、通常は1以下が適当であり、好ましくは0.50以下であり、0.30以下でもよく、0.20以下でもよく、0.15以下でもよい。
In an embodiment in which the monomer raw material A contains a monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and a hydroxyl group-containing monomer in combination, the content (WN) of the monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring and the content of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in the monomer raw material A (WN). The relationship (weight basis) with WOH ) is not particularly limited. W N / W OH may be, for example, 0.01 or more, usually 0.05 or more, 0.10 or more, or 0.12 or more. Further, W N / W OH may be, for example, 10 or less, usually 1 or less is appropriate, preferably 0.50 or less, 0.30 or less, 0.20 or less, and 0. It may be .15 or less.
いくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Aは、後述するモノマー原料Bの構成成分として好ましく用いられるようなポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するモノマー(モノマーS1)を含まないか、該モノマーの含有量がモノマー原料Aの10重量%未満(より好ましくは5重量%未満、例えば2重量%未満)であることが好ましい。このような組成のモノマー原料Aによると、初期のリワーク性と、粘着力上昇後の強粘着性とを好適に両立する補強用フィルムが好適に実現され得る。同様の理由から、他のいくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Aは、モノマーS1を含有しないか、モノマーS1を含有する場合はその含有量(重量基準)がモノマー原料BにおけるモノマーS1の含有量より低いことが好ましい。
In some embodiments, the monomer raw material A does not contain a monomer having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton (monomer S1) which is preferably used as a constituent component of the monomer raw material B described later, or the content of the monomer is the monomer raw material A. It is preferably less than 10% by weight (more preferably less than 5% by weight, for example, less than 2% by weight). According to the monomer raw material A having such a composition, a reinforcing film having a good balance between initial reworkability and strong adhesiveness after an increase in adhesive strength can be preferably realized. For the same reason, in some other embodiments, the monomer raw material A does not contain the monomer S1 or, if it contains the monomer S1, its content (weight basis) is higher than the content of the monomer S1 in the monomer raw material B. Low is preferable.
ポリマー(A)を得る方法は特に限定されず、例えば溶液重合法、エマルション重合法、バルク重合法、懸濁重合法、光重合法等の、各種の重合方法を適宜採用することができる。いくつかの態様において、溶液重合法を好ましく採用し得る。溶液重合を行う際の重合温度は、使用するモノマーおよび溶媒の種類、重合開始剤の種類等に応じて適宜選択することができ、例えば20℃~170℃程度(典型的には40℃~140℃程度)とすることができる。
The method for obtaining the polymer (A) is not particularly limited, and various polymerization methods such as a solution polymerization method, an emulsion polymerization method, a bulk polymerization method, a suspension polymerization method, and a photopolymerization method can be appropriately adopted. In some embodiments, the solution polymerization method may be preferably employed. The polymerization temperature at the time of solution polymerization can be appropriately selected depending on the type of the monomer and solvent used, the type of the polymerization initiator and the like, and is, for example, about 20 ° C. to 170 ° C. (typically 40 ° C. to 140 ° C.). ℃).
重合に用いる開始剤は、重合方法に応じて、従来公知の熱重合開始剤や光重合開始剤等から適宜選択することができる。重合開始剤は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
The initiator used for the polymerization can be appropriately selected from conventionally known thermal polymerization initiators, photopolymerization initiators and the like, depending on the polymerization method. The polymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
熱重合開始剤としては、例えば、アゾ系重合開始剤(例えば、2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル、2,2’-アゾビス-2-メチルブチロニトリル、2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオン酸)ジメチル、4,4’-アゾビス-4-シアノバレリアン酸、アゾビスイソバレロニトリル、2,2’-アゾビス(2-アミジノプロパン)ジヒドロクロライド、2,2’-アゾビス[2-(5-メチル-2-イミダゾリン-2-イル)プロパン]ジヒドロクロライド、2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオンアミジン)二硫酸塩、2,2’-アゾビス(N,N’-ジメチレンイソブチルアミジン)ジヒドロクロライド等);過硫酸カリウム等の過硫酸塩;過酸化物系重合開始剤(例えば、ジベンゾイルペルオキシド、t-ブチルペルマレエート、過酸化ラウロイル等);レドックス系重合開始剤等が挙げられる。熱重合開始剤の使用量は、特に制限されないが、例えば、ポリマー(A)の調製に用いられるモノマー成分(モノマー原料A)100重量部に対して0.01重量部~5重量部、好ましくは0.05重量部~3重量部の範囲内の量とすることができる。
Examples of the thermal polymerization initiator include azo-based polymerization initiators (for example, 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile, 2,2'-azobis (for example). 2-Methylpropionic acid) dimethyl, 4,4'-azobis-4-cyanovalerian acid, azobisisobutyvaleronitrile, 2,2'-azobis (2-amidinopropane) dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis [2 -(5-Methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl) propane] dihydrochloride, 2,2'-azobis (2-methylpropionamidine) disulfate, 2,2'-azobis (N, N'-dimethylene) Isobutylamidin) dihydrochloride, etc.); Persulfate such as potassium persulfate; Peroxide-based polymerization initiator (for example, dibenzoylperoxide, t-butylpermalate, lauroyl peroxide, etc.); Redox-based polymerization initiator, etc. Can be mentioned. The amount of the thermal polymerization initiator used is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 0.01 to 5 parts by weight, preferably 0.01 parts by weight, preferably 5 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the monomer component (monomer raw material A) used for preparing the polymer (A). The amount can be in the range of 0.05 parts by weight to 3 parts by weight.
光重合開始剤としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、ベンゾインエーテル系光重合開始剤、アセトフェノン系光重合開始剤、α-ケトール系光重合開始剤、芳香族スルホニルクロリド系光重合開始剤、光活性オキシム系光重合開始剤、ベンゾイン系光重合開始剤、ベンジル系光重合開始剤、ベンゾフェノン系光重合開始剤、ケタール系光重合開始剤、チオキサントン系光重合開始剤、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド系光重合開始剤等を用いることができる。光重合開始剤の使用量は、特に制限されないが、例えば、モノマー原料A100重量部に対して0.01重量部~5重量部、好ましくは0.05重量部~3重量部の範囲内の量とすることができる。
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and is, for example, a benzoin ether-based photopolymerization initiator, an acetophenone-based photopolymerization initiator, an α-ketol-based photopolymerization initiator, an aromatic sulfonyl chloride-based photopolymerization initiator, and photoactivity. Oxym-based photopolymerization initiator, benzoin-based photopolymerization initiator, benzyl-based photopolymerization initiator, benzophenone-based photopolymerization initiator, Ketal-based photopolymerization initiator, thioxanthone-based photopolymerization initiator, acylphosphine oxide-based photopolymerization initiator Agents and the like can be used. The amount of the photopolymerization initiator used is not particularly limited, but is, for example, an amount in the range of 0.01 parts by weight to 5 parts by weight, preferably 0.05 parts by weight to 3 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the monomer raw material A. Can be.
いくつかの態様において、ポリマー(A)は、上述のようなモノマー原料Aに重合開始剤を配合した混合物に紫外線(UV)を照射して該モノマー成分の一部を重合させた部分重合物(ポリマーシロップ)の形態で、粘着剤層を形成するための粘着剤組成物に含まれ得る。かかるポリマーシロップを含む粘着剤組成物を所定の被塗布体に塗布し、紫外線を照射させて重合を完結させることができる。すなわち、上記ポリマーシロップは、ポリマー(A)の前駆体として把握され得る。ここに開示される粘着剤層は、例えば、上記ポリマーシロップとポリマー(B)とを含む粘着剤組成物を用いて形成され得る。
In some embodiments, the polymer (A) is a partial polymer obtained by irradiating a mixture of the above-mentioned monomer raw material A with a polymerization initiator with ultraviolet rays (UV) to polymerize a part of the monomer component (a partial polymer). In the form of a polymer syrup), it may be included in a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition for forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. A pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing such a polymer syrup can be applied to a predetermined object to be coated and irradiated with ultraviolet rays to complete the polymerization. That is, the polymer syrup can be grasped as a precursor of the polymer (A). The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer disclosed herein can be formed, for example, by using a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition containing the polymer syrup and the polymer (B).
(ポリマー(B))
ここに開示される技術におけるポリマー(B)は、ポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するモノマー(以下、「モノマーS1」ともいう。)と(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとを含むモノマー成分(モノマー原料B)の重合物である。ポリマー(B)は、モノマーS1と(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとの共重合体ということができる。ポリマー(B)は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。ポリマー(B)は、モノマーS1に由来するポリオルガノシロキサン構造の低極性および運動性によって、被着体への貼付け初期の粘着力を抑制し、かつ、加熱によって被着体に対する粘着力を上昇させる粘着力上昇遅延剤として機能し得る。モノマーS1としては、特に限定されず、ポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を含有する任意のモノマーを用いることができる。モノマーS1は、その構造に由来する極性の低さにより、使用前(被着体への貼付け前)の補強用フィルムにおいてポリマー(B)の粘着剤層表面への偏在を促進し、貼り合わせ初期の軽剥離性(低粘着性)を発現する。モノマーS1としては、片末端に重合性反応基を有する構造のものを好ましく用いることができる。このようなモノマーS1単位と(メタ)アクリル系モノマー単位とを含む構成によると、側鎖にポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するポリマー(B)が形成される。かかる構造のポリマー(B)は、側鎖の運動性および移動容易性により、初期粘着力が低く、かつ加熱後粘着力の高いものとなりやすい。また、いくつかの態様において、モノマーS1としては、片末端に重合性反応基を有し、かつ他の末端にポリマー(A)と架橋反応を生じる官能基を有しないものを好ましく採用し得る。このような構造のモノマーS1が共重合されたポリマー(B)は、モノマーS1に由来するポリオルガノシロキサン構造の運動性により、初期粘着力が低く、かつ加熱後粘着力の高いものとなりやすい。 (Polymer (B))
The polymer (B) in the technique disclosed herein is the polymerization of a monomer component (monomer raw material B) containing a monomer having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton (hereinafter, also referred to as “monomer S1”) and a (meth) acrylic monomer. It is a thing. The polymer (B) can be said to be a copolymer of the monomer S1 and the (meth) acrylic monomer. The polymer (B) can be used alone or in combination of two or more. The polymer (B) suppresses the adhesive force at the initial stage of attachment to the adherend due to the low polarity and motility of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from the monomer S1, and increases the adhesive force to the adherend by heating. It can function as an adhesive force increase retarder. The monomer S1 is not particularly limited, and any monomer containing a polyorganosiloxane skeleton can be used. Due to the low polarity derived from the structure of the monomer S1, the polymer (B) is unevenly distributed on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the reinforcing film before use (before being attached to the adherend), and the initial bonding period. (Low adhesiveness) is exhibited. As the monomer S1, a monomer having a structure having a polymerizable reactive group at one end can be preferably used. According to the configuration including such a monomer S1 unit and a (meth) acrylic monomer unit, a polymer (B) having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton in the side chain is formed. The polymer (B) having such a structure tends to have a low initial adhesive force and a high adhesive force after heating due to the motility and mobility of the side chains. Further, in some embodiments, the monomer S1 preferably has a polymerizable reactive group at one end and does not have a functional group that causes a cross-linking reaction with the polymer (A) at the other end. The polymer (B) in which the monomer S1 having such a structure is copolymerized tends to have a low initial adhesive force and a high adhesive force after heating due to the motility of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from the monomer S1.
ここに開示される技術におけるポリマー(B)は、ポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するモノマー(以下、「モノマーS1」ともいう。)と(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとを含むモノマー成分(モノマー原料B)の重合物である。ポリマー(B)は、モノマーS1と(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとの共重合体ということができる。ポリマー(B)は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。ポリマー(B)は、モノマーS1に由来するポリオルガノシロキサン構造の低極性および運動性によって、被着体への貼付け初期の粘着力を抑制し、かつ、加熱によって被着体に対する粘着力を上昇させる粘着力上昇遅延剤として機能し得る。モノマーS1としては、特に限定されず、ポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を含有する任意のモノマーを用いることができる。モノマーS1は、その構造に由来する極性の低さにより、使用前(被着体への貼付け前)の補強用フィルムにおいてポリマー(B)の粘着剤層表面への偏在を促進し、貼り合わせ初期の軽剥離性(低粘着性)を発現する。モノマーS1としては、片末端に重合性反応基を有する構造のものを好ましく用いることができる。このようなモノマーS1単位と(メタ)アクリル系モノマー単位とを含む構成によると、側鎖にポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するポリマー(B)が形成される。かかる構造のポリマー(B)は、側鎖の運動性および移動容易性により、初期粘着力が低く、かつ加熱後粘着力の高いものとなりやすい。また、いくつかの態様において、モノマーS1としては、片末端に重合性反応基を有し、かつ他の末端にポリマー(A)と架橋反応を生じる官能基を有しないものを好ましく採用し得る。このような構造のモノマーS1が共重合されたポリマー(B)は、モノマーS1に由来するポリオルガノシロキサン構造の運動性により、初期粘着力が低く、かつ加熱後粘着力の高いものとなりやすい。 (Polymer (B))
The polymer (B) in the technique disclosed herein is the polymerization of a monomer component (monomer raw material B) containing a monomer having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton (hereinafter, also referred to as “monomer S1”) and a (meth) acrylic monomer. It is a thing. The polymer (B) can be said to be a copolymer of the monomer S1 and the (meth) acrylic monomer. The polymer (B) can be used alone or in combination of two or more. The polymer (B) suppresses the adhesive force at the initial stage of attachment to the adherend due to the low polarity and motility of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from the monomer S1, and increases the adhesive force to the adherend by heating. It can function as an adhesive force increase retarder. The monomer S1 is not particularly limited, and any monomer containing a polyorganosiloxane skeleton can be used. Due to the low polarity derived from the structure of the monomer S1, the polymer (B) is unevenly distributed on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the reinforcing film before use (before being attached to the adherend), and the initial bonding period. (Low adhesiveness) is exhibited. As the monomer S1, a monomer having a structure having a polymerizable reactive group at one end can be preferably used. According to the configuration including such a monomer S1 unit and a (meth) acrylic monomer unit, a polymer (B) having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton in the side chain is formed. The polymer (B) having such a structure tends to have a low initial adhesive force and a high adhesive force after heating due to the motility and mobility of the side chains. Further, in some embodiments, the monomer S1 preferably has a polymerizable reactive group at one end and does not have a functional group that causes a cross-linking reaction with the polymer (A) at the other end. The polymer (B) in which the monomer S1 having such a structure is copolymerized tends to have a low initial adhesive force and a high adhesive force after heating due to the motility of the polyorganosiloxane structure derived from the monomer S1.
モノマーS1としては、例えば、下記一般式(1)または(2)で表される化合物を用いることができる。より具体的には、信越化学工業社製の片末端反応性シリコーンオイルとして、X-22-174ASX、X-22-2426、X-22-2475、KF-2012などが挙げられる。モノマーS1は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
ここで、上記一般式(1),(2)中のR3は水素またはメチルであり、R4はメチル基または1価の有機基であり、mおよびnは0以上の整数である。
As the monomer S1, for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (1) or (2) can be used. More specifically, examples of the one-ended reactive silicone oil manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. include X-22-174ASX, X-22-2426, X-22-2475, and KF-22. Monomer S1 can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Here, R 3 in the above general formulas (1) and (2) is hydrogen or methyl, R 4 is a methyl group or a monovalent organic group, and m and n are integers of 0 or more.
モノマーS1の官能基当量は、該モノマーS1を用いて所望の効果が発揮される範囲で適切な値を採用することができ、特定の範囲に限定されない。初期粘着力を十分に抑制する観点から、上記官能基当量は、例えば100g/mol以上、または200g/mol以上であり、300g/mol以上(例えば500g/mol以上)であることが適当であり、800g/mol以上であることが好ましく、1500g/mol以上であることがより好ましい。特に好ましい態様では、貼付け初期における低粘着性と加熱後の粘着力上昇との両立の観点から、上記官能基当量は、2000g/mol以上であり、さらに特に好ましくは2500g/mol以上であり、3000g/mol以上でもよく、4000g/mol以上でもよく、5000g/mol以上でもよい。他のいくつかの態様では、上記官能基当量は、9000g/mol以上でもよく、12000g/mol以上でもよく、15000g/mol以上でもよい。モノマーS1の官能基当量において、上記官能基とは、重合性官能基(例えば、(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、アリル基等のエチレン性不飽和基)を意味する。
The functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 can be an appropriate value within a range in which the desired effect is exhibited by using the monomer S1, and is not limited to a specific range. From the viewpoint of sufficiently suppressing the initial adhesive force, the functional group equivalent is, for example, 100 g / mol or more, 200 g / mol or more, and 300 g / mol or more (for example, 500 g / mol or more). It is preferably 800 g / mol or more, and more preferably 1500 g / mol or more. In a particularly preferable embodiment, the functional group equivalent is 2000 g / mol or more, more preferably 2500 g / mol or more, and 3000 g, from the viewpoint of achieving both low adhesiveness at the initial stage of application and increase in adhesive strength after heating. It may be / mol or more, 4000 g / mol or more, or 5000 g / mol or more. In some other embodiments, the functional group equivalent may be 9000 g / mol or more, 12000 g / mol or more, or 15000 g / mol or more. In terms of the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1, the functional group means a polymerizable functional group (for example, an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group or an allylic group).
粘着力を十分に上昇させる観点から、上記官能基当量は、例えば30000g/mol以下であることが適当であり、20000g/mol以下であってもよく、15000g/mol未満でもよく、10000g/mol未満でもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様において、モノマーS1の官能基当量は、7000g/mol以下であり、より好ましくは5500g/mol以下、さらに好ましくは4500g/mol以下であり、4200g/mol以下でもよく、3500g/mol以下でもよい。モノマーS1の官能基当量が上記範囲内であると、粘着剤層内における相溶性(例えば、ベースポリマーとの相溶性)が良好となりやすく、またポリマー(B)のポリオルガノシロキサン骨格(鎖)の運動性がよく、さらにポリマー(B)の移動性を適度な範囲に調節しやすく、初期の低粘着性と加熱後の粘着力上昇とを両立する粘着剤層を実現しやすくなる。
From the viewpoint of sufficiently increasing the adhesive strength, the functional group equivalent is preferably, for example, 30,000 g / mol or less, may be 20,000 g / mol or less, may be less than 15,000 g / mol, and may be less than 10,000 g / mol. But it may be. In some preferred embodiments, the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 is 7000 g / mol or less, more preferably 5500 g / mol or less, still more preferably 4500 g / mol or less, and may be 4200 g / mol or less, 3500 g / mol or less. It may be as follows. When the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 is within the above range, the compatibility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (for example, compatibility with the base polymer) tends to be good, and the polyorganosiloxane skeleton (chain) of the polymer (B) tends to be good. It has good motility, and it is easy to adjust the mobility of the polymer (B) to an appropriate range, and it is easy to realize a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer that achieves both initial low adhesiveness and an increase in adhesive strength after heating.
ここで、「官能基当量」とは、官能基1個当たりに結合している主骨格(例えばポリジメチルシロキサン)の重量を意味する。標記単位g/molに関しては、官能基1molと換算している。モノマーS1の官能基当量は、例えば、核磁気共鳴(NMR)に基づく1H-NMR(プロトンNMR)のスペクトル強度から算出することができる。1H-NMRのスペクトル強度に基づくモノマーS1の官能基当量(g/mol)の算出は、1H-NMRスペクトル解析に係る一般的な構造解析手法に基づいて、必要であれば日本国特許第5951153号公報の記載を参照して行うことができる。
Here, the "functional group equivalent" means the weight of the main skeleton (for example, polydimethylsiloxane) bonded to each functional group. The title unit g / mol is converted to 1 mol of functional group. The functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 can be calculated, for example, from the spectral intensity of 1 H-NMR (proton NMR) based on nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR). 1 The calculation of the functional group equivalent (g / mol) of the monomer S1 based on the spectral intensity of 1 H-NMR is based on the general structural analysis method related to 1 1 H-NMR spectral analysis, and if necessary, the Japanese Patent No. 1 This can be done with reference to the description in JP-A-591153.
なお、モノマーS1として官能基当量が異なる二種類以上のモノマーを用いる場合、モノマーS1の官能基当量としては、算術平均値を用いることができる。すなわち、官能基当量が異なるn種類のモノマー(モノマーS11,モノマーS12・・・モノマーS1n)からなるモノマーS1の官能基当量は、下記式により計算することができる。
モノマーS1の官能基当量(g/mol)=(モノマーS11の官能基当量×モノマーS11の配合量+モノマーS12の官能基当量×モノマーS12の配合量+・・・+モノマーS1nの官能基当量×モノマーS1nの配合量)/(モノマーS11の配合量+モノマーS12の配合量+・・・+モノマーS1nの配合量) When two or more kinds of monomers having different functional group equivalents are used as the monomer S1, an arithmetic mean value can be used as the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1. That is, the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 composed of n kinds of monomers having different functional group equivalents (monomer S1 1 , monomer S1 2 ... Monomer S1 n ) can be calculated by the following formula.
Functional group equivalent of monomer S1 (g / mol) = (functional equivalent of monomer S1 1 × compounding amount of monomer S1 1 + functional group equivalent of monomer S1 2 × compounding amount of monomer S1 2 + ... + monomer S1 n Functional group equivalent amount × amount of monomer S1 n ) / (amount of monomer S1 1 + amount of monomer S1 2 + ... + amount of monomer S1 n )
モノマーS1の官能基当量(g/mol)=(モノマーS11の官能基当量×モノマーS11の配合量+モノマーS12の官能基当量×モノマーS12の配合量+・・・+モノマーS1nの官能基当量×モノマーS1nの配合量)/(モノマーS11の配合量+モノマーS12の配合量+・・・+モノマーS1nの配合量) When two or more kinds of monomers having different functional group equivalents are used as the monomer S1, an arithmetic mean value can be used as the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1. That is, the functional group equivalent of the monomer S1 composed of n kinds of monomers having different functional group equivalents (monomer S1 1 , monomer S1 2 ... Monomer S1 n ) can be calculated by the following formula.
Functional group equivalent of monomer S1 (g / mol) = (functional equivalent of monomer S1 1 × compounding amount of monomer S1 1 + functional group equivalent of monomer S1 2 × compounding amount of monomer S1 2 + ... + monomer S1 n Functional group equivalent amount × amount of monomer S1 n ) / (amount of monomer S1 1 + amount of monomer S1 2 + ... + amount of monomer S1 n )
モノマーS1の含有量は、該モノマーS1を用いて所望の効果が発揮される範囲で適切な値を採用することができ、特定の範囲に限定されない。初期粘着力を十分に抑制する観点から、いくつかの態様において、ポリマー(B)を調製するためのモノマー成分(モノマー原料B)の全量のうち、モノマーS1の含有量は、例えば5重量%以上であってよく、粘着力上昇遅延剤としての効果をよりよく発揮する観点から10重量%以上とすることが好ましく、より好ましくは12重量%以上、さらに好ましくは15重量%以上、特に好ましくは18重量%以上であり、20重量%以上としてもよい。また、モノマー原料BにおけるモノマーS1の含有量は、重合反応性や相溶性の観点から、例えば80重量%以下であってよく、60重量%以下とすることが適当であり、好ましくは50重量%以下、より好ましくは40重量%以下、さらに好ましくは30重量%以下としてもよい。モノマーS1の重合割合を適当な範囲とすることにより、粘着力の上昇が好適に発現し得る。
The content of the monomer S1 can be an appropriate value within a range in which the desired effect is exhibited by using the monomer S1, and is not limited to a specific range. From the viewpoint of sufficiently suppressing the initial adhesive force, in some embodiments, the content of the monomer S1 is, for example, 5% by weight or more among the total amount of the monomer component (monomer raw material B) for preparing the polymer (B). It is preferable that the content is 10% by weight or more, more preferably 12% by weight or more, still more preferably 15% by weight or more, and particularly preferably 18% by weight, from the viewpoint of better exerting the effect as an adhesive force increase retarder. It is 20% by weight or more, and may be 20% by weight or more. Further, the content of the monomer S1 in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 80% by weight or less, preferably 60% by weight or less, preferably 50% by weight, from the viewpoint of polymerization reactivity and compatibility. Hereinafter, it may be more preferably 40% by weight or less, still more preferably 30% by weight or less. By setting the polymerization ratio of the monomer S1 to an appropriate range, an increase in adhesive strength can be suitably exhibited.
モノマー原料Bは、モノマーS1に加えて、モノマーS1と共重合可能な(メタ)アクリル系モノマーを含む。一種または二種以上の(メタ)アクリル系モノマーを用いることにより、粘着剤層内におけるポリマー(B)の移動性を好適に調節し得る。また、ポリマー(B)とポリマー(A)との相溶性の改善にも役立ち得る。(メタ)アクリル系モノマー単位を含むポリマー(B)は、アクリル系ポリマーに良好に相溶し得るので、粘着剤層内におけるポリマー(B)の移動性向上を通じて、初期粘着力の低減および加熱後粘着力の向上を実現しやすい。
The monomer raw material B contains a (meth) acrylic monomer copolymerizable with the monomer S1 in addition to the monomer S1. By using one or more (meth) acrylic monomers, the mobility of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be suitably adjusted. It can also help improve the compatibility between the polymer (B) and the polymer (A). Since the polymer (B) containing the (meth) acrylic monomer unit can be well compatible with the acrylic polymer, the initial adhesive strength is reduced and after heating through the improvement of the mobility of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. It is easy to improve the adhesive strength.
ここに開示される技術で用いられるポリマー(B)において、モノマー原料Bに含まれる(メタ)アクリル系モノマーの組成は、ポリマー(B)のガラス転移温度TBが-20℃~5℃となる範囲で適切に設定され得る。上記(メタ)アクリル系モノマーの組成に基づくガラス転移温度TB1も、上記TBを満足する範囲で適切に設定され、特定の範囲に限定されない。典型的には、TB1は、ポリマー(A)のガラス転移温度TAよりも高くなるように設定されていることが好ましい。TB1は、例えば、0℃より高くなるように設定することができる。ここで、(メタ)アクリル系モノマーの組成に基づくガラス転移温度TB1とは、ポリマー(B)の調製に用いられるモノマー成分のうち(メタ)アクリル系モノマーのみの組成に基づいて、Foxの式により求められるTgをいう。TB1は、ポリマー(B)の調製に用いられるモノマー成分のうち(メタ)アクリル系モノマーのみを対象として、上述したFoxの式を適用し、各(メタ)アクリル系モノマーのホモポリマーのガラス転移温度と、該(メタ)アクリル系モノマーの合計量に占める各(メタ)アクリル系モノマー重量分率とから算出することができる。ガラス転移温度TB1が相対的に高い(典型的には0℃より高い)ポリマー(B)によると、初期粘着力が抑制されやすい。また、ガラス転移温度TB1が相対的に高い(典型的には0℃より高い)ポリマー(B)によると、粘着力上昇比の大きい補強用フィルムが得られやすい。
In the polymer (B) used in the technique disclosed herein, the composition of the (meth) acrylic monomer contained in the monomer raw material B is such that the glass transition temperature TB of the polymer ( B ) is −20 ° C. to 5 ° C. It can be set appropriately in the range. The glass transition temperature TB1 based on the composition of the (meth) acrylic monomer is also appropriately set within a range satisfying the above TB , and is not limited to a specific range. Typically, TB1 is preferably set to be higher than the glass transition temperature TA of the polymer ( A ). TB1 can be set to be higher than 0 ° C., for example. Here, the glass transition temperature TB1 based on the composition of the (meth) acrylic monomer is a Fox formula based on the composition of only the (meth) acrylic monomer among the monomer components used for the preparation of the polymer ( B ). It means Tg obtained by. For TB1, the Fox formula described above is applied only to the (meth) acrylic monomer among the monomer components used in the preparation of the polymer ( B ), and the glass transition of the homopolymer of each (meth) acrylic monomer is applied. It can be calculated from the temperature and the weight fraction of each (meth) acrylic monomer in the total amount of the (meth) acrylic monomer. According to the polymer ( B ) having a relatively high glass transition temperature TB1 (typically higher than 0 ° C.), the initial adhesive force is likely to be suppressed. Further, according to the polymer ( B ) having a relatively high glass transition temperature TB1 (typically higher than 0 ° C.), it is easy to obtain a reinforcing film having a large adhesive force increase ratio.
いくつかの好ましい態様において、TB1は、10℃以上であり、より好ましくは30℃以上、さらに好ましくは40℃以上であり、45℃以上でもよい。TB1が高くなると、貼付け初期の粘着力は、概して、よりよく抑制される傾向にある。これは、TB1が所定温度以上であるポリマー(B)によると、室温あるいは室温よりもある程度の高温領域までの温度上昇に伴うポリオルガノシロキサン構造部分の運動性や移動性の向上が、ポリマー(B)に含まれる(メタ)アクリル系モノマー由来のモノマー単位によって効果的に抑制され、上記ポリオルガノシロキサン構造部分の存在に起因する低粘着性をよりよく維持し得るためと考えられる。貼付け初期の低粘着性をより安定性よく維持する観点から、いくつかの態様において、TB1は、例えば50℃以上であってよく、55℃以上でもよく、60℃以上でもよい。また、TB1は、例えば120℃以下であってよく、100℃以下でもよい。TB1が低くなると、加熱による粘着力上昇が容易化する傾向にある。いくつかの好ましい態様において、TB1は、例えば90℃以下であり、より好ましくは70℃以下、さらに好ましくは60℃以下、特に好ましくは55℃以下(例えば50℃以下)である。
In some preferred embodiments, TB1 is 10 ° C. or higher, more preferably 30 ° C. or higher, still more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, and may be 45 ° C. or higher. As TB1 increases, the adhesive strength at the initial stage of application generally tends to be better suppressed. This is because, according to the polymer ( B ) in which TB1 is above a predetermined temperature, the improvement of the mobility and mobility of the polyorganosiloxane structural portion with the temperature rise to room temperature or a temperature region higher than room temperature is improved. It is considered that it is effectively suppressed by the monomer unit derived from the (meth) acrylic monomer contained in B), and the low adhesiveness due to the presence of the polyorganosiloxane structural portion can be better maintained. From the viewpoint of maintaining low adhesiveness at the initial stage of application more stably, in some embodiments, TB1 may be, for example, 50 ° C. or higher, 55 ° C. or higher, or 60 ° C. or higher. Further, TB1 may be, for example, 120 ° C. or lower, or 100 ° C. or lower. When TB1 becomes low, the increase in adhesive strength due to heating tends to be easy. In some preferred embodiments, TB1 is, for example, 90 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or lower, still more preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 55 ° C. or lower (eg, 50 ° C. or lower).
TB1を適切に設定することによる効果を発揮しやすくする観点から、ポリマー(B)を調製するための全モノマー成分に占めるモノマーS1と(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとの合計量は、例えば50重量%以上であってよく、70重量%以上でもよく、85重量%以上でもよく、90重量%以上でもよく、95重量%以上でもよく、実質的に100重量%でもよい。
From the viewpoint of facilitating the effect by appropriately setting TB1 , the total amount of the monomer S1 and the (meth) acrylic monomer in all the monomer components for preparing the polymer (B) is, for example, 50 weight by weight. % Or more, 70% by weight or more, 85% by weight or more, 90% by weight or more, 95% by weight or more, and substantially 100% by weight.
ここに開示される技術で使用されるポリマー(B)のガラス転移温度TBは、-20℃~5℃の範囲内である。ポリマー(B)のTBが5℃以下であることによって、ポリマー(B)の移動性(典型的には感温運動性)が向上し、粘着力を大きく上昇させることができる。いくつかの好ましい態様では、ポリマー(B)のTBは、0℃未満であってもよく、-5℃以下でもよく、-10℃以下でもよい。また、TBが-20℃以上であることにより、被着体への貼り付け時に粘着剤層表面側に偏在するポリマー(B)が初期粘着力低下に寄与し、貼付け初期の軽剥離性に優れる傾向がある。いくつかの好ましい態様では、ポリマー(B)のTBは、-15℃以上であってもよい。TBを適当な範囲に設定することにより、貼付け初期の軽剥離性と加熱後の粘着力上昇を好ましい範囲に制御することができる。
The glass transition temperature TB of the polymer ( B ) used in the technique disclosed herein is in the range of −20 ° C. to 5 ° C. When the TB of the polymer ( B ) is 5 ° C. or lower, the mobility (typically, temperature-sensitive motility) of the polymer (B) is improved, and the adhesive strength can be greatly increased. In some preferred embodiments, the TB of the polymer ( B ) may be below 0 ° C, below −5 ° C, or below −10 ° C. Further, when TB is -20 ° C or higher, the polymer (B) unevenly distributed on the surface side of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer at the time of sticking to the adherend contributes to a decrease in initial adhesive strength, resulting in light peelability at the initial stage of sticking. Tends to be better. In some preferred embodiments, the TB of the polymer ( B ) may be -15 ° C or higher. By setting TB in an appropriate range, it is possible to control the light peelability at the initial stage of application and the increase in adhesive strength after heating within a preferable range.
いくつかの態様において、ポリマー(B)を調製するためのモノマー成分の組成は、TB1がTBより高くなるように、すなわちTB1-TBが0℃より大きくなるように設定することができる。このような組成によると、上記モノマー成分に含まれる(メタ)アクリル系モノマーの組成によってポリマー(B)の移動性を調節する効果が好適に発揮されやすい。TB1-TBは、例えば40℃~100℃程度であってよく、50℃~90℃程度でもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、TB1-TBは、45℃以上であり、より好ましくは50℃以上、さらに好ましくは55℃以上(例えば58℃以上)である。また、ポリマー(B)含有の効果を好適に発現させる観点から、TB1-TBは、80℃以下が好ましく、より好ましくは70℃以下、さらに好ましくは65℃以下(例えば62℃以下)である。
In some embodiments, the composition of the monomer component for preparing the polymer ( B ) may be set such that TB1 is higher than TB , i.e. TB1 - TB is greater than 0 ° C. can. According to such a composition, the effect of adjusting the mobility of the polymer (B) is likely to be suitably exhibited by the composition of the (meth) acrylic monomer contained in the monomer component. TB1 - TB may be, for example, about 40 ° C to 100 ° C, or may be about 50 ° C to 90 ° C. In some preferred embodiments, TB1 - TB is 45 ° C. or higher, more preferably 50 ° C. or higher, still more preferably 55 ° C. or higher (eg, 58 ° C. or higher). Further, from the viewpoint of preferably expressing the effect of containing the polymer ( B ), TB1- TB is preferably 80 ° C. or lower, more preferably 70 ° C. or lower, still more preferably 65 ° C. or lower (for example, 62 ° C. or lower). be.
粘着剤層内におけるポリマー(B)の移動性を制御しやすくする観点から、いくつかの態様において、ポリマー(B)を調製するためのモノマー成分の組成は、ポリマー(A)のガラス転移温度TAとの関係で、TBがTAより20℃以上高くなるように、すなわちTB-TAが20℃以上となるように設定することができる。いくつかの好ましい態様において、TB-TAは、例えば30℃以上であり、より好ましくは40℃以上、さらに好ましくは50℃以上であり、60℃以上であってもよく、70℃以上でもよい。また、粘着力上昇の観点から、TB-TAは、例えば130℃以下であってよく、120℃以下でもよく、好ましくは100℃以下、より好ましくは80℃以下、さらに好ましくは65℃以下であり、55℃以下でもよく、45℃以下でもよい。
From the viewpoint of facilitating control of the mobility of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, in some embodiments, the composition of the monomer component for preparing the polymer (B) is the glass transition temperature T of the polymer (A). In relation to A , TB can be set to be 20 ° C. or higher higher than TA , that is, TB −TA can be set to 20 ° C. or higher. In some preferred embodiments, TB - TA is, for example, 30 ° C. or higher, more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, still more preferably 50 ° C. or higher, 60 ° C. or higher, or 70 ° C. or higher. good. Further, from the viewpoint of increasing the adhesive strength, TB - TA may be, for example, 130 ° C. or lower, 120 ° C. or lower, preferably 100 ° C. or lower, more preferably 80 ° C. or lower, still more preferably 65 ° C. or lower. It may be 55 ° C. or lower, or 45 ° C. or lower.
モノマー原料Bに使用し得る(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが挙げられる。ここでいう「アルキル」は、鎖状(直鎖状、分岐鎖状を包含する。)のアルキル(基)をいい、後述の脂環式炭化水素基を含まない。例えば、ポリマー(A)に用いられ得る(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルとして上記で例示したモノマーの一種または二種以上を、モノマー原料Bの構成成分として用いることができる。いくつかの好ましい態様において、モノマー原料Bは、(メタ)アクリル酸C4-12アルキルエステル(好ましくは(メタ)アクリル酸C4-10アルキルエステル、例えば(メタ)アクリル酸C6-10アルキルエステル)の少なくとも一種を含有し得る。他のいくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Bは、メタクリル酸C1-18アルキルエステル(好ましくはメタクリル酸C1-14アルキルエステル、例えばメタクリル酸C1-10アルキルエステル)の少なくとも一種を含有し得る。モノマー原料Bは、(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとして、例えば、MMA、メタクリル酸n-ブチル(nBMA)およびメタクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル(2EHMA)から選択される一種または二種以上を含み得る。
Examples of the (meth) acrylic monomer that can be used for the monomer raw material B include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters. The term "alkyl" as used herein refers to a chain-like (including linear and branched chain-like) alkyls (groups), and does not include the alicyclic hydrocarbon group described later. For example, one or more of the monomers exemplified above as the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester that can be used for the polymer (A) can be used as a constituent component of the monomer raw material B. In some preferred embodiments, the monomer raw material B is a (meth) acrylic acid C 4-12 alkyl ester (preferably a (meth) acrylic acid C 4-10 alkyl ester, eg, a (meth) acrylic acid C 6-10 alkyl ester. ) Can be contained. In some other embodiments, the monomer raw material B may contain at least one of a methacrylic acid C 1-18 alkyl ester (preferably a methacrylic acid C 1-14 alkyl ester, such as a methacrylic acid C 1-10 alkyl ester). .. The monomer raw material B may contain, as the (meth) acrylic monomer, one or more selected from, for example, MMA, n-butyl methacrylate (nBMA) and 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (2EHMA).
上記(メタ)アクリル系モノマーの他の例として、脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステルが挙げられる。例えば、シクロペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、1-アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート等を用いることができる。いくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Bは、(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとして、ジシクロペンタニルメタクリレート、イソボルニルメタクリレートおよびシクロヘキシルメタクリレートから選択される少なくとも一種を含有し得る。
Another example of the above (meth) acrylic monomer is a (meth) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group. For example, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, 1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate and the like can be used. In some embodiments, the monomer raw material B may contain, as the (meth) acrylic monomer, at least one selected from dicyclopentanyl methacrylate, isobornyl methacrylate and cyclohexyl methacrylate.
モノマー原料Bにおける上記(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルおよび上記脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステルの含有量は、例えば10重量%以上95重量%以下であってよく、20重量%以上95重量%以下であってもよく、30重量%以上90重量%以下であってもよく、40重量%以上90重量%以下であってもよく、50重量%以上85重量%以下であってもよい。加熱による粘着力の上昇容易性の観点から、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルの使用が有利となり得る。いくつかの態様において、脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステルの含有量は、モノマー原料Bの50重量%未満であってよく、30重量%未満でもよく、15重量%未満でもよく、10重量%未満でもよく、5重量%未満でもよい。脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステルを使用しなくてもよい。
The content of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester and the (meth) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 10% by weight or more and 95% by weight or less, and may be 20% by weight. It may be 95% by weight or less, 30% by weight or more and 90% by weight or less, 40% by weight or more and 90% by weight or less, and 50% by weight or more and 85% by weight or less. May be good. From the viewpoint of easiness of increasing the adhesive force by heating, the use of (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester may be advantageous. In some embodiments, the content of the (meth) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group may be less than 50% by weight, less than 30% by weight, or less than 15% by weight of the monomer raw material B. It may be less than 10% by weight or less than 5% by weight. It is not necessary to use a (meth) acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group.
いくつかの好ましい態様において、モノマー原料Bの構成成分である上記(メタ)アクリル系モノマーは、ホモポリマーのTgが50℃以上のモノマーM2を含み得る。ポリマー(B)において、モノマーS1とモノマーM2とを共重合させることにより、温度上昇に伴うポリオルガノシロキサン構造部分の運動性や移動性が好適に制御され、初期軽剥離性(リワーク性)と加熱後の粘着力上昇との両立を実現しやすい。いくつかの態様において、モノマーM2のホモポリマーのTgは、60℃以上でもよく、70℃以上でもよく、80℃以上でもよく、90℃以上でもよい。また、モノマーM2のホモポリマーのTgの上限は特に制限されないが、ポリマー(B)の合成容易性等の観点から、通常は200℃以下であることが適当である。いくつかの態様において、モノマーM2のホモポリマーのTgは、例えば180℃以下であってよく、150℃以下でもよく、120℃以下でもよい。
In some preferred embodiments, the (meth) acrylic monomer, which is a constituent of the monomer raw material B, may contain a monomer M2 having a homopolymer Tg of 50 ° C. or higher. In the polymer (B), by copolymerizing the monomer S1 and the monomer M2, the motility and mobility of the polyorganosiloxane structural portion with increasing temperature are suitably controlled, and the initial light peelability (reworkability) and heating are performed. It is easy to achieve both the later increase in adhesive strength. In some embodiments, the Tg of the homopolymer of the monomer M2 may be 60 ° C. or higher, 70 ° C. or higher, 80 ° C. or higher, or 90 ° C. or higher. The upper limit of Tg of the homopolymer of the monomer M2 is not particularly limited, but it is usually appropriate to be 200 ° C. or lower from the viewpoint of easiness of synthesizing the polymer (B). In some embodiments, the Tg of the homopolymer of the monomer M2 may be, for example, 180 ° C or lower, 150 ° C or lower, or 120 ° C or lower.
モノマーM2としては、例えば上記で例示した(メタ)アクリル系モノマーのなかから、ホモポリマーのTgが条件を満たすものを用いることができる。例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルおよび脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステルからなる群から選択される一種または二種以上のモノマーを用いることができる。(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルとしては、アルキル基の炭素原子数が1~4の範囲にあるメタクリル酸アルキルエステルを好ましく採用し得る。
As the monomer M2, for example, among the (meth) acrylic monomers exemplified above, those in which the Tg of the homopolymer satisfies the condition can be used. For example, one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters and (meth) acrylic acid esters having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group can be used. As the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, a methacrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having a carbon atom number in the range of 1 to 4 can be preferably adopted.
モノマー原料BがモノマーM2を含む態様において、モノマーM2の含有量は、例えばモノマー原料Bの5重量%以上であってよく、10重量%以上でもよく、15重量%以上でもよく、20重量%以上でもよく、25重量%以上でもよく、30重量%以上でもよい。いくつかの態様において、上記モノマーM2の含有量は、モノマー原料Bの35重量%以上でもよく、40重量%以上でもよく、45重量%以上でもよく、50重量%以上でもよく、55重量%以上でもよい。また、上記モノマーM2の含有量は、例えば90重量%以下であってよく、通常は80重量%以下であることが適当であり、75重量%以下が好ましく、70重量%以下でもよく、65重量%以下でもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様において、モノマーM2の含有量は60重量%以下(例えば50重量%以下、典型的には42重量%以下)である。ポリマー(B)において、Tg50℃以上のモノマーM2の共重合割合が所定値以下に制限されていることで、50℃付近でのポリマー(B)の移動性に基づき、加熱後の粘着力上昇を好ましく実現することができる。同様の観点から、モノマー原料BにおけるモノマーM2の含有量は35重量%以下でもよく、25重量%以下でもよく、15重量%以下(例えば5重量%以下)でもよい。
In the embodiment in which the monomer raw material B contains the monomer M2, the content of the monomer M2 may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 15% by weight or more, or 20% by weight or more of the monomer raw material B. However, it may be 25% by weight or more, or 30% by weight or more. In some embodiments, the content of the monomer M2 may be 35% by weight or more, 40% by weight or more, 45% by weight or more, 50% by weight or more, 55% by weight or more of the monomer raw material B. But it may be. The content of the monomer M2 may be, for example, 90% by weight or less, usually 80% by weight or less, preferably 75% by weight or less, 70% by weight or less, and 65% by weight. It may be less than%. In some preferred embodiments, the content of the monomer M2 is 60% by weight or less (eg, 50% by weight or less, typically 42% by weight or less). In the polymer (B), the copolymerization ratio of the monomer M2 having a Tg of 50 ° C. or higher is limited to a predetermined value or less, so that the adhesive strength after heating is increased based on the mobility of the polymer (B) at around 50 ° C. It can be preferably realized. From the same viewpoint, the content of the monomer M2 in the monomer raw material B may be 35% by weight or less, 25% by weight or less, or 15% by weight or less (for example, 5% by weight or less).
上記モノマーM2の含有量は、例えば、モノマーM2が(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルおよび上記脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステルからなる群から選択される一種または二種以上のモノマーからなる態様や、モノマーM2が(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル(例えば、メタクリル酸アルキルエステル)から選択される一種または二種以上のモノマーからなる態様において好ましく適用され得る。かかる態様の一好適例として、上記モノマーM2がMMAからなる態様が挙げられる。
The content of the monomer M2 is, for example, one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester and the (meth) acrylic acid ester having the alicyclic hydrocarbon group. It can be preferably applied in an embodiment consisting of one or more monomers in which the monomer M2 is selected from a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester (for example, a methacrylic acid alkyl ester). As a preferred example of such an embodiment, there is an embodiment in which the above-mentioned monomer M2 is composed of MMA.
いくつかの態様において、上記(メタ)アクリル系モノマーは、ホモポリマーのTgが50℃未満(典型的には-20℃以上50℃未満)であるモノマーM3を含んでいてもよい。モノマーM3の使用により、粘着力上昇後において粘着力と凝集力とをバランスよく両立する補強用フィルムが得られやすくなる。かかる効果を発揮しやすくする観点から、モノマーM3は、モノマーM2と組み合わせて用いることが好ましい。
In some embodiments, the (meth) acrylic monomer may contain a monomer M3 in which the Tg of the homopolymer is less than 50 ° C (typically −20 ° C or higher and lower than 50 ° C). By using the monomer M3, it becomes easy to obtain a reinforcing film having both adhesive force and cohesive force in a well-balanced manner after the adhesive force is increased. From the viewpoint of facilitating the exertion of such an effect, the monomer M3 is preferably used in combination with the monomer M2.
モノマーM3としては、例えば上記で例示した(メタ)アクリル系モノマーのなかから、ホモポリマーのTgが条件を満たすものを用いることができる。例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルからなる群から選択される一種または二種以上のモノマーを用いることができる。
As the monomer M3, for example, among the (meth) acrylic monomers exemplified above, those in which the Tg of the homopolymer satisfies the condition can be used. For example, one or more monomers selected from the group consisting of (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters can be used.
モノマー原料BがモノマーM3を含む態様において、モノマーM3の含有量は、例えばモノマー原料Bの5重量%以上であってよく、10重量%以上でもよく、15重量%以上でもよく、20重量%以上でもよく、25重量%以上でもよく、30重量%以上でもよく、35重量%以上でもよい。また、モノマーM3の含有量は、通常、モノマー原料Bの70重量%以下とすることが適当であり、60重量%以下でもよく、50重量%以下でもよい。上記モノマーM3の含有量は、例えば、モノマーM3が(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル(例えば、メタクリル酸アルキルエステル)から選択される一種または二種以上のモノマーからなる態様において好ましく適用され得る。
In the embodiment in which the monomer raw material B contains the monomer M3, the content of the monomer M3 may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 15% by weight or more, or 20% by weight or more of the monomer raw material B. However, it may be 25% by weight or more, 30% by weight or more, or 35% by weight or more. Further, the content of the monomer M3 is usually preferably 70% by weight or less of the monomer raw material B, and may be 60% by weight or less, or 50% by weight or less. The content of the monomer M3 can be preferably applied, for example, in an embodiment in which the monomer M3 consists of one or more monomers selected from (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters (eg, methacrylic acid alkyl esters).
ここに開示される補強用フィルムのいくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Bは、ホモポリマーのTgが170℃より高いモノマーの含有量が30重量%以下であることが好ましい。ここで、本明細書においてモノマーの含有量がX重量%以下であるとは、特記しない場合、該モノマーの含有量が0重量%である態様、すなわち該モノマーを実質的に含まない態様を含む概念である。また、実質的に含まないとは、少なくとも意図的には上記モノマーが用いられていないことをいう。ホモポリマーのTgが170℃より高いモノマーの共重合割合が高くなると、ポリマー(B)の移動性が不足しがちとなって、50℃より高い温度域への加熱による粘着力の上昇が困難となることがあり得る。
In some aspects of the reinforcing film disclosed herein, the monomer raw material B preferably has a monomer content of a homopolymer having a Tg higher than 170 ° C. of 30% by weight or less. Here, the term "monomer content of X% by weight or less" in the present specification includes an embodiment in which the monomer content is 0% by weight, that is, an embodiment in which the monomer is substantially not contained, unless otherwise specified. It is a concept. Further, "substantially free" means that the above-mentioned monomer is not used at least intentionally. When the copolymerization ratio of the monomer having a Tg of homopolymer higher than 170 ° C. is high, the mobility of the polymer (B) tends to be insufficient, and it is difficult to increase the adhesive strength by heating to a temperature range higher than 50 ° C. Can be.
いくつかの態様において、モノマー原料Bは、(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとして、少なくともMMAを含むことが好ましい。MMAが共重合されたポリマー(B)によると、加熱後粘着力が大きい補強用フィルムが得られやすい。モノマー原料Bに含まれる(メタ)アクリル系モノマーの合計量に占めるMMAの割合は、例えば5重量%以上であってよく、10重量%以上でもよく、20重量%以上でもよく、30重量%以上でもよく、40重量%以上でもよい。また、モノマー原料Bの合計量に占めるMMAの割合は、通常、95重量%以下が適当であり、いくつかの好ましい態様において、モノマー原料Bの合計量に占めるMMAの割合は、加熱後の粘着力上昇の観点から、75重量%以下でもよく、65重量%以下でもよく、60重量%以下でもよく、55重量%以下(例えば50重量%以下)でもよい。
In some embodiments, the monomer raw material B preferably contains at least MMA as the (meth) acrylic monomer. According to the polymer (B) in which MMA is copolymerized, it is easy to obtain a reinforcing film having a large adhesive force after heating. The ratio of MMA to the total amount of the (meth) acrylic monomer contained in the monomer raw material B may be, for example, 5% by weight or more, 10% by weight or more, 20% by weight or more, and 30% by weight or more. However, it may be 40% by weight or more. Further, the ratio of MMA to the total amount of the monomer raw material B is usually 95% by weight or less, and in some preferred embodiments, the ratio of MMA to the total amount of the monomer raw material B is adhesion after heating. From the viewpoint of increasing the force, it may be 75% by weight or less, 65% by weight or less, 60% by weight or less, or 55% by weight or less (for example, 50% by weight or less).
ポリマー(B)を構成するモノマー単位としてモノマーS1とともに含まれ得るモノマーの他の例として、ポリマー(A)に用いられ得るモノマーとして上記で例示したカルボキシル基含有モノマー、酸無水物基含有モノマー、水酸基含有モノマー、エポキシ基含有モノマー、シアノ基含有モノマー、イソシアネート基含有モノマー、アミド基含有モノマー、窒素原子含有環を有するモノマー(N-ビニル環状アミド、(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する環状アミド、スクシンイミド骨格を有するモノマー、マレイミド類、イタコンイミド類等)、(メタ)アクリル酸アミノアルキル類、ビニルエステル類、ビニルエーテル類、オレフィン類、芳香族炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステル、複素環含有(メタ)アクリレート、ハロゲン原子含有(メタ)アクリレート、テルペン化合物誘導体アルコールから得られる(メタ)アクリル酸エステル等が挙げられる。
As another example of the monomer that can be contained together with the monomer S1 as the monomer unit constituting the polymer (B), the carboxyl group-containing monomer, the acid anhydride group-containing monomer, and the hydroxyl group exemplified above as the monomers that can be used in the polymer (A). Monomer-containing monomer, epoxy group-containing monomer, cyano group-containing monomer, isocyanate group-containing monomer, amide group-containing monomer, monomer having a nitrogen atom-containing ring (N-vinyl cyclic amide, cyclic amide having a (meth) acryloyl group, succinimide skeleton Monomers, maleimides, itaconimides, etc.), (meth) acrylic acid aminoalkyls, vinyl esters, vinyl ethers, olefins, (meth) acrylic acid esters having aromatic hydrocarbon groups, heterocyclic-containing (meth) Examples thereof include acrylates, halogen atom-containing (meth) acrylates, and (meth) acrylic acid esters obtained from terpene compound derivative alcohols.
ポリマー(B)を構成するモノマー単位としてモノマーS1とともに含まれ得るモノマーのさらに他の例として、エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、プロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート等のオキシアルキレンジ(メタ)アクリレート;ポリオキシアルキレン骨格を有するモノマー、例えばポリエチレングリコールやポリプロピレングリコール等のポリオキシアルキレン鎖の一方の末端に(メタ)アクリロイル基、ビニル基、アリル基等の重合性官能基を有し、他方の末端にエーテル構造(アルキルエーテル、アリールエーテル、アリールアルキルエーテル等)を有する重合性ポリオキシアルキレンエーテル;(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロポキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ブトキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エトキシプロピル等の(メタ)アクリル酸アルコキシアルキル;(メタ)アクリル酸アルカリ金属塩等の塩;トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリル酸エステル等の多価(メタ)アクリレート:塩化ビニリデン、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-クロロエチル等のハロゲン化ビニル化合物;2-ビニル-2-オキサゾリン、2-ビニル-5-メチル-2-オキサゾリン、2-イソプロペニル-2-オキサゾリン等のオキサゾリン基含有モノマー;(メタ)アクリロイルアジリジン、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アジリジニルエチル等のアジリジン基含有モノマー;(メタ)アクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシプロピル、ラクトン類と(メタ)アクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシエチルとの付加物等の水酸基含有ビニルモノマー;フッ素置換(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル等の含フッ素ビニルモノマー;2-クロルエチルビニルエーテル、モノクロロ酢酸ビニル等の反応性ハロゲン含有ビニルモノマー;ビニルトリメトキシシラン、γ-(メタ)アクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、アリルトリメトキシシラン、トリメトキシシリルプロピルアリルアミン、2-メトキシエトキシトリメトキシシランのような有機ケイ素含有ビニルモノマー;その他、ビニル基を重合したモノマー末端にラジカル重合性ビニル基を有するマクロモノマー類;等を挙げることができる。これらは、一種を単独であるいは二種以上を組み合わせてモノマーS1と共重合させることができる。
As yet another example of the monomer that can be contained together with the monomer S1 as the monomer unit constituting the polymer (B), ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, diethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, triethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol. Oxyalkylene di (meth) acrylates such as di (meth) acrylates, propylene glycol di (meth) acrylates, dipropylene glycol di (meth) acrylates, tripropylene glycol di (meth) acrylates; monomers having a polyoxyalkylene skeleton, such as A polyoxyalkylene chain such as polyethylene glycol or polypropylene glycol has a polymerizable functional group such as a (meth) acryloyl group, a vinyl group or an allyl group at one end, and an ether structure (alkyl ether, aryl ether, etc.) at the other end. Polymerizable polyoxyalkylene ethers (such as arylalkyl ethers); methoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, ethoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, propoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, butoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic. (Meta) Acrylic acid alkoxyalkyls such as ethoxypropyl acid; Salts such as (meth) acrylic acid alkali metal salts; Polyvalent (meth) acrylates such as trimethyl propanthry (meth) acrylic acid esters: Vinylidene chloride, (meth) Vinyl halide compounds such as -2-chloroethyl acrylate; oxazolin group-containing monomers such as 2-vinyl-2-oxazoline, 2-vinyl-5-methyl-2-oxazoline and 2-isopropenyl-2-oxazoline; (meth). ) Acryloyl azilysin, aziridin group-containing monomers such as (meth) acrylate-2-aziridinylethyl; (meth) acrylate-2-hydroxyethyl, (meth) acrylate-2-hydroxypropyl, lactones and (meth). ) Hydroxyl-containing vinyl monomer such as an adduct with -2-hydroxyethyl acrylate; Fluorine-containing vinyl monomer such as fluorine-substituted (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester; Containing reactive halogen such as 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether and monochloroethyl vinyl acetate Vinyl monomer; contains organic silicon such as vinyl trimethoxysilane, γ- (meth) acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, allyltrimethoxysilane, trimethoxysilylpropylallylamine, 2-methoxyethoxytrimethoxysilane. Vinyl-containing monomers; In addition, macromonomers having a radically polymerizable vinyl group at the terminal of a monomer polymerized with a vinyl group; and the like can be mentioned. These can be copolymerized with the monomer S1 alone or in combination of two or more.
いくつかの態様において、ポリマー(B)としては、ポリマー(A)と架橋反応を生じる官能基を有しないものを好ましく採用し得る。言い換えると、ポリマー(B)は、ポリマー(A)と化学結合していない形態で粘着剤層に含まれていることが好ましい。このような形態でポリマー(B)を含む粘着剤層は、加熱時におけるポリマー(B)の移動性がよく、粘着力上昇比の向上に適している。ポリマー(A)と架橋反応を生じる官能基は、該ポリマー(A)の有する官能基の種類によって異なり得るが、例えば、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基、カルボキシ基、アルコキシシリル基、アミノ基等であり得る。
In some embodiments, the polymer (B) may preferably be one that does not have a functional group that causes a cross-linking reaction with the polymer (A). In other words, the polymer (B) is preferably contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in a form that is not chemically bonded to the polymer (A). The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer containing the polymer (B) in such a form has good mobility of the polymer (B) at the time of heating, and is suitable for improving the adhesion increase ratio. The functional group that causes a cross-linking reaction with the polymer (A) may differ depending on the type of the functional group of the polymer (A), and may be, for example, an epoxy group, an isocyanate group, a carboxy group, an alkoxysilyl group, an amino group or the like. ..
ポリマー(B)のMwは特に限定されない。ポリマー(B)のMwは、例えば1000以上であってよく、5000以上でもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様において、ポリマー(B)のMwは、加熱後の粘着力上昇を好適に発現する観点から、10,000以上であり、より好ましくは12,000以上であり、15,000以上でもよく、20,000以上でもよく、22,000以上でもよく、25,000以上でもよい。他のいくつかの態様では、ポリマー(B)のMwは、30,000以上でもよく、50,000以上でもよく、70,000以上でもよい。ポリマー(B)のMwの上限は、例えば500,000以下であり、350,000以下でもよく、200,000以下でもよく、150,000以下でもよい。粘着剤層内における相溶性や移動性を適度な範囲に調節し、貼付け初期における低粘着性を好適に発現する観点から、いくつかの好ましい態様において、ポリマー(B)のMwは、100,000以下であり、より好ましくは80,000以下、さらに好ましくは60,000以下、特に好ましくは40,000以下(例えば30,000以下)であり、25,000以下であってもよく、さらには20,000以下でもよい。ポリマー(B)のMwを適当な範囲に設定することにより、貼付け初期の軽剥離性と粘着力上昇性の両立に優れた粘着剤が得られやすい。
The Mw of the polymer (B) is not particularly limited. The Mw of the polymer (B) may be, for example, 1000 or more, and may be 5000 or more. In some preferred embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (B) is 10,000 or more, more preferably 12,000 or more, and 15,000 or more, from the viewpoint of preferably exhibiting an increase in adhesive strength after heating. It may be 20,000 or more, 22,000 or more, or 25,000 or more. In some other embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (B) may be 30,000 or more, 50,000 or more, or 70,000 or more. The upper limit of Mw of the polymer (B) is, for example, 500,000 or less, may be 350,000 or less, may be 200,000 or less, or may be 150,000 or less. In some preferred embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (B) is 100,000 from the viewpoint of adjusting the compatibility and mobility in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to an appropriate range and preferably exhibiting low tackiness at the initial stage of application. It is more preferably 80,000 or less, still more preferably 60,000 or less, particularly preferably 40,000 or less (for example, 30,000 or less), and may be 25,000 or less, further 20 It may be 000 or less. By setting the Mw of the polymer (B) to an appropriate range, it is easy to obtain a pressure-sensitive adhesive having both light peelability and adhesive strength increase at the initial stage of application.
いくつかの好ましい態様において、ポリマー(B)のMwは、ポリマー(A)のMwより低いことが好ましい。これにより、貼付け初期の良好なリワーク性と加熱後の粘着力上昇とを両立する補強用フィルムを実現しやすくなる。いくつかの態様において、ポリマー(B)のMwは、例えば、ポリマー(A)のMwの0.8倍以下であってよく、0.75倍以下でもよく、0.5倍以下でもよく、0.3倍以下でもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様において、ポリマー(A)のMwAに対するポリマー(B)のMwBの比(MwB/MwA)は、0.3以下であり、より好ましくは0.2以下、さらに好ましくは0.1以下、特に好ましくは0.06以下(例えば0.05以下)である。また、比(MwB/MwA)は、例えば0.010以上が適当であり、好ましくは0.020以上、より好ましくは0.03以上、さらに好ましくは0.04以上である。ポリマー(A)のMwとポリマー(B)のMwとを適当な範囲に設定することにより、ここに開示される技術による効果がよりよく実現され得る。他のいくつかの態様において、ポリマー(B)のMwは、ポリマー(A)のMwの0.03倍以下(例えば0.02倍以下)でもよい。
In some preferred embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (B) is preferably lower than the Mw of the polymer (A). This makes it easier to realize a reinforcing film that achieves both good reworkability at the initial stage of application and an increase in adhesive strength after heating. In some embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (B) may be, for example, 0.8 times or less, 0.75 times or less, 0.5 times or less, 0 times the Mw of the polymer (A). It may be 3 times or less. In some preferred embodiments, the ratio of Mw B of the polymer ( B ) to Mw A of the polymer ( A ) is 0.3 or less, more preferably 0.2 or less, still more preferred. Is 0.1 or less, particularly preferably 0.06 or less (for example, 0.05 or less). The ratio (Mw B / Mw A ) is, for example, 0.010 or more, preferably 0.020 or more, more preferably 0.03 or more, and further preferably 0.04 or more. By setting the Mw of the polymer (A) and the Mw of the polymer (B) in an appropriate range, the effects of the techniques disclosed herein can be better realized. In some other embodiments, the Mw of the polymer (B) may be 0.03 times or less (eg, 0.02 times or less) the Mw of the polymer (A).
ポリマー(B)は、例えば、上述したモノマーを、溶液重合法、エマルション重合法、バルク重合法、懸濁重合法、光重合法等の公知の手法により重合させることで作製することができる。
The polymer (B) can be produced, for example, by polymerizing the above-mentioned monomer by a known method such as a solution polymerization method, an emulsion polymerization method, a bulk polymerization method, a suspension polymerization method, or a photopolymerization method.
ポリマー(B)の分子量を調整するために、必要に応じて連鎖移動剤を用いることができる。使用する連鎖移動剤の例としては、オクチルメルカプタン、ラウリルメルカプタン、t-ノニルメルカプタン、t-ドデシルメルカプタン、メルカプトエタノール、α-チオグリセロール等のメルカプト基を有する化合物;チオグリコール酸、チオグリコール酸メチル、チオグリコール酸エチル、チオグリコール酸プロピル、チオグリコール酸ブチル、チオグリコール酸t-ブチル、チオグリコール酸2-エチルヘキシル、チオグリコール酸オクチル、チオグリコール酸イソオクチル、チオグリコール酸デシル、チオグリコール酸ドデシル、エチレングリコールのチオグリコール酸エステル、ネオペンチルグリコールのチオグリコール酸エステル、ペンタエリスリトールのチオグリコール酸エステル等のチオグリコール酸エステル類;α-メチルスチレンダイマー;等が挙げられる。
A chain transfer agent can be used as needed to adjust the molecular weight of the polymer (B). Examples of chain transfer agents used include octyl mercaptan, lauryl mercaptan, t-nonyl mercaptan, t-dodecyl mercaptan, mercaptoethanol, compounds having a mercapto group such as α-thioglycerol; thioglycolic acid, methyl thioglycolate, etc. Ethyl thioglycolate, propyl thioglycolate, butyl thioglycolate, t-butyl thioglycolate, 2-ethylhexyl thioglycolate, octyl thioglycolate, isooctyl thioglycolate, decyl thioglycolate, dodecyl thioglycolate, ethylene Examples thereof include thioglycolic acid esters of glycol, thioglycolic acid esters of neopentyl glycol, thioglycolic acid esters such as pentaerythritol thioglycolic acid ester; α-methylstyrene dimer; and the like.
連鎖移動剤の使用量としては、特に制限されないが、通常、モノマー100重量部に対して、連鎖移動剤を0.05重量部~20重量部、好ましくは、0.1重量部~15重量部、さらに好ましくは0.2重量部~10重量部含有する。このように連鎖移動剤の添加量を調整することで、好適な分子量のポリマー(B)を得ることができる。連鎖移動剤は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
The amount of the chain transfer agent used is not particularly limited, but is usually 0.05 parts by weight to 20 parts by weight, preferably 0.1 parts by weight to 15 parts by weight, based on 100 parts by weight of the monomer. It is more preferably contained in an amount of 0.2 parts by weight to 10 parts by weight. By adjusting the amount of the chain transfer agent added in this way, the polymer (B) having a suitable molecular weight can be obtained. Chain transfer agents can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
ポリマー(B)の分子量を調整する手段としては、上記連鎖移動剤の使用を含む従来公知の各種の手段を、単独でまたは適宜組み合わせて用いることができる。ポリマー(A)の分子量についても同様である。そのような手段の非限定的な例には、重合方法の選択、重合開始剤の種類や使用量の選択、重合温度の選択、溶液重合法における重合溶媒の種類や使用量の選択、光重合法における光照射強度の選択、等が含まれる。当業者であれば、後述する具体例を含む本願明細書の記載および本願出願時の技術常識に基づいて、所望の分子量を有するポリマーをどのようにすれば得られるのかについて理解し得る。
As a means for adjusting the molecular weight of the polymer (B), various conventionally known means including the use of the chain transfer agent can be used alone or in combination as appropriate. The same applies to the molecular weight of the polymer (A). Non-limiting examples of such means include selection of polymerization method, selection of type and amount of polymerization initiator, selection of polymerization temperature, selection of type and amount of polymerization solvent in solution polymerization method, and light weight. Legal selection of light irradiation intensity, etc. are included. A person skilled in the art can understand how to obtain a polymer having a desired molecular weight based on the description of the present specification including the specific examples described later and the common general knowledge as of the filing of the present application.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムにおいて、ポリマー(A)の使用量100重量部に対するポリマー(B)の使用量は、例えば0.1重量部以上とすることができ、より高い効果(好適には、貼付け初期の軽剥離性)を得る観点から0.5重量部以上が好ましく、1重量部以上がより好ましく、1.5重量部以上がさらに好ましく、2重量部以上としてもよい。いくつかの態様において、リワーク性向上等の観点から、上記ポリマー(B)の使用量は、例えば3重量部以上とすることができ、4重量部以上としてもよく、5重量部以上としてもよい。また、ポリマー(A)の使用量100重量部に対するポリマー(B)の使用量は、例えば75重量部以下であってよく、30重量部以下でもよく、10重量部以下でもよく、8重量部以下でもよい。目的とする粘着力上昇を好適に実現する観点から、いくつかの好ましい態様において、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対するポリマー(B)の使用量は、5重量部以下であり、より好ましくは4重量部以下、さらに好ましくは3重量部以下、特に好ましくは2.5重量部以下である。他のいくつかの好ましい態様では、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対するポリマー(B)の使用量は、1.5重量部以下(例えば1.2重量部以下)である。ポリマー(B)の使用量を上記の範囲とすることで、良好な屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を実現しやすい。また、貼付け初期の軽剥離性と粘着力上昇性とをよりよく両立することができる。
In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, the amount of the polymer (B) used can be, for example, 0.1 part by weight or more with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) used, and a higher effect (preferably). From the viewpoint of obtaining (light peelability at the initial stage of application), 0.5 parts by weight or more is preferable, 1 part by weight or more is more preferable, 1.5 parts by weight or more is further preferable, and 2 parts by weight or more may be used. In some embodiments, the amount of the polymer (B) used may be, for example, 3 parts by weight or more, 4 parts by weight or more, or 5 parts by weight or more, from the viewpoint of improving reworkability. .. Further, the amount of the polymer (B) used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) may be, for example, 75 parts by weight or less, 30 parts by weight or less, 10 parts by weight or less, and 8 parts by weight or less. But it may be. From the viewpoint of suitably realizing the desired increase in adhesive strength, in some preferred embodiments, the amount of the polymer (B) used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is 5 parts by weight or less, more preferably 4 parts by weight. Parts or less, more preferably 3 parts by weight or less, and particularly preferably 2.5 parts by weight or less. In some other preferred embodiments, the amount of the polymer (B) used relative to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is 1.5 parts by weight or less (eg, 1.2 parts by weight or less). By setting the amount of the polymer (B) to be in the above range, it is easy to realize good bending recovery and bending holding force. In addition, it is possible to better achieve both the light peelability at the initial stage of application and the adhesive strength increasing property.
粘着剤層は、ここに開示される補強用フィルムの性能を大きく損なわない範囲で、ポリマー(A)およびポリマー(B)以外のポリマー(任意ポリマー)を必要に応じて含有し得る。そのような任意ポリマーの使用量は、通常、粘着剤層に含まれるポリマー成分全体の20重量%以下とすることが適当であり、15重量%以下でもよく、10重量%以下でもよい。いくつかの態様において、上記任意ポリマーの使用量は、上記ポリマー成分全体の5重量%以下であってよく、3重量%以下でもよく、1重量%以下でもよい。ポリマー(A)およびポリマー(B)以外のポリマーを実質的に含有しない粘着剤層であってもよい。
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may contain a polymer (arbitrary polymer) other than the polymer (A) and the polymer (B), if necessary, as long as the performance of the reinforcing film disclosed herein is not significantly impaired. The amount of such arbitrary polymer used is usually 20% by weight or less of the total polymer component contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and may be 15% by weight or less, or 10% by weight or less. In some embodiments, the amount of the optional polymer used may be 5% by weight or less of the total polymer component, 3% by weight or less, or 1% by weight or less. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be substantially free of polymers other than the polymer (A) and the polymer (B).
(架橋剤)
粘着剤層には、凝集力の調整等の目的で、必要に応じて架橋剤が用いられ得る。架橋剤としては、粘着剤の分野において公知の架橋剤を使用することができ、例えば、エポキシ系架橋剤、イソシアネート系架橋剤、シリコーン系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、アジリジン系架橋剤、シラン系架橋剤、アルキルエーテル化メラミン系架橋剤、金属キレート系架橋剤等を挙げることができる。イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤、金属キレート系架橋剤を好適に使用することができる。屈曲回復性と屈曲保持力とを好適に両立する架橋剤として、イソシアネート系架橋剤を好ましく用いることができる。架橋剤は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 (Crosslinking agent)
A cross-linking agent may be used for the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, if necessary, for the purpose of adjusting the cohesive force or the like. As the cross-linking agent, a cross-linking agent known in the field of adhesives can be used. Examples thereof include a cross-linking agent, an alkyl etherified melamine-based cross-linking agent, a metal chelate-based cross-linking agent, and the like. An isocyanate-based cross-linking agent, an epoxy-based cross-linking agent, and a metal chelate-based cross-linking agent can be preferably used. An isocyanate-based cross-linking agent can be preferably used as a cross-linking agent that preferably achieves both bending recovery and bending holding power. The cross-linking agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
粘着剤層には、凝集力の調整等の目的で、必要に応じて架橋剤が用いられ得る。架橋剤としては、粘着剤の分野において公知の架橋剤を使用することができ、例えば、エポキシ系架橋剤、イソシアネート系架橋剤、シリコーン系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、アジリジン系架橋剤、シラン系架橋剤、アルキルエーテル化メラミン系架橋剤、金属キレート系架橋剤等を挙げることができる。イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤、金属キレート系架橋剤を好適に使用することができる。屈曲回復性と屈曲保持力とを好適に両立する架橋剤として、イソシアネート系架橋剤を好ましく用いることができる。架橋剤は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 (Crosslinking agent)
A cross-linking agent may be used for the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, if necessary, for the purpose of adjusting the cohesive force or the like. As the cross-linking agent, a cross-linking agent known in the field of adhesives can be used. Examples thereof include a cross-linking agent, an alkyl etherified melamine-based cross-linking agent, a metal chelate-based cross-linking agent, and the like. An isocyanate-based cross-linking agent, an epoxy-based cross-linking agent, and a metal chelate-based cross-linking agent can be preferably used. An isocyanate-based cross-linking agent can be preferably used as a cross-linking agent that preferably achieves both bending recovery and bending holding power. The cross-linking agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
イソシアネート系架橋剤としては、多官能イソシアネート(1分子当たり平均2個以上のイソシアネート基を有する化合物をいい、イソシアヌレート構造を有するものを包含する。)が好ましく使用され得る。イソシアネート系架橋剤は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
As the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent, polyfunctional isocyanate (a compound having an average of two or more isocyanate groups per molecule, including one having an isocyanurate structure) can be preferably used. The isocyanate-based cross-linking agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
多官能イソシアネートの例として、脂肪族ポリイソシアネート類、脂環族ポリイソシアネート類、芳香族ポリイソシアネート類等が挙げられる。
脂肪族ポリイソシアネート類の具体例としては、1,2-エチレンジイソシアネート;1,2-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート、1,3-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート、1,4-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート等のテトラメチレンジイソシアネート;1,2-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,3-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,4-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,5-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,6-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、2,5-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート等のヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート;2-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジイソシアネート、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジイソシアネート、リジンジイソシアネート、等が挙げられる。 Examples of polyfunctional isocyanates include aliphatic polyisocyanates, alicyclic polyisocyanates, aromatic polyisocyanates and the like.
Specific examples of aliphatic polyisocyanes include 1,2-ethylene diisocyanate; 1,2-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-tetramethylene diisocyanate and other tetramethylene diisocyanates; 1,2. -Hexamethylene diisocyanate such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 2,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate; Examples thereof include 2-methyl-1,5-pentanediisocyanate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediisocyanate, and lysine diisocyanate.
脂肪族ポリイソシアネート類の具体例としては、1,2-エチレンジイソシアネート;1,2-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート、1,3-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート、1,4-テトラメチレンジイソシアネート等のテトラメチレンジイソシアネート;1,2-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,3-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,4-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,5-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,6-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、2,5-ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート等のヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート;2-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジイソシアネート、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジイソシアネート、リジンジイソシアネート、等が挙げられる。 Examples of polyfunctional isocyanates include aliphatic polyisocyanates, alicyclic polyisocyanates, aromatic polyisocyanates and the like.
Specific examples of aliphatic polyisocyanes include 1,2-ethylene diisocyanate; 1,2-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-tetramethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-tetramethylene diisocyanate and other tetramethylene diisocyanates; 1,2. -Hexamethylene diisocyanate such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,3-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,4-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 2,5-hexamethylene diisocyanate; Examples thereof include 2-methyl-1,5-pentanediisocyanate, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediisocyanate, and lysine diisocyanate.
脂環族ポリイソシアネート類の具体例としては、イソホロンジイソシアネート;1,2-シクロヘキシルジイソシアネート、1,3-シクロヘキシルジイソシアネート、1,4-シクロヘキシルジイソシアネート等のシクロヘキシルジイソシアネート;1,2-シクロペンチルジイソシアネート、1,3-シクロペンチルジイソシアネート等のシクロペンチルジイソシアネート;水素添加キシリレンジイソシアネート、水素添加トリレンジイソシアネート、水素添加ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、水素添加テトラメチルキシレンジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジシクロヘキシルメタンジイソシアネート、等が挙げられる。
Specific examples of the alicyclic polyisocyanates include isophorone diisocyanates; 1,2-cyclohexyldiisocyanates, 1,3-cyclohexyldiisocyanates, 1,4-cyclohexyldiisocyanates and other cyclohexyldiisocyanates; 1,2-cyclopentyldiisocyanates, 1,3. -Cyclopentyl diisocyanate such as cyclopentyl diisocyanate; hydrogenated xylylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated tolylene diisocyanate, hydrogenated diphenylmethane diisocyanate, hydrogenated tetramethylxylylene diisocyanate, 4,4'-dicyclohexylmethane diisocyanate, and the like.
芳香族ポリイソシアネート類の具体例としては、2,4-トリレンジイソシアネート、2,6-トリレンジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、2,4’-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、2,2’-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジフェニルエーテルジイソシアネート、2-ニトロジフェニル-4,4’-ジイソシアネート、2,2’-ジフェニルプロパン-4,4’-ジイソシアネート、3,3’-ジメチルジフェニルメタン-4,4’-ジイソシアネート、4,4’-ジフェニルプロパンジイソシアネート、m-フェニレンジイソシアネート、p-フェニレンジイソシアネート、ナフチレン-1,4-ジイソシアネート、ナフチレン-1,5-ジイソシアネート、3,3’-ジメトキシジフェニル-4,4’-ジイソシアネート、キシリレン-1,4-ジイソシアネート、キシリレン-1,3-ジイソシアネート等が挙げられる。
Specific examples of aromatic polyisocyanates include 2,4-toluene diisocyanate, 2,6-toluene diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, 2,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, and 2,2'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate. , 4,4'-diphenyl ether diisocyanate, 2-nitrodiphenyl-4,4'-diisocyanate, 2,2'-diphenylpropane-4,4'-diisocyanate, 3,3'-dimethyldiphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate , 4,4'-Diphenylpropane diisocyanate, m-phenylenediisocyanate, p-phenylenediisocyanate, naphthylene-1,4-diisocyanate, naphthylene-1,5-diisocyanate, 3,3'-dimethoxydiphenyl-4,4'-diisocyanate , Xylylene-1,4-diisocyanate, xylylene-1,3-diisocyanate and the like.
好ましい多官能イソシアネートとして、1分子当たり平均して3個以上のイソシアネート基を有する多官能イソシアネートが例示される。かかる3官能以上のイソシアネートは、2官能または3官能以上のイソシアネートの多量体(例えば、2量体または3量体)、誘導体(例えば、多価アルコールと2分子以上の多官能イソシアネートとの付加反応生成物)、重合物等であり得る。例えば、ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネートの2量体や3量体、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートのイソシアヌレート体(イソシアヌレート構造の3量体付加物)、トリメチロールプロパンとトリレンジイソシアネートとの反応生成物、トリメチロールプロパンとヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートとの反応生成物、キシリレンジイソシアネートのトリメチロールプロパン付加物、イソホロンジイソシアネートのトリメチロールプロパン付加物、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートのトリメチロールプロパン付加物、ポリメチレンポリフェニルイソシアネート、ポリエーテルポリイソシアネート、ポリエステルポリイソシアネート、ならびにこれらと各種のポリオールとの付加物、イソシアヌレート結合、ビューレット結合、アロファネート結合等で多官能化したポリイソシアネート等の多官能イソシアネートが挙げられる。
As a preferable polyfunctional isocyanate, a polyfunctional isocyanate having an average of 3 or more isocyanate groups per molecule is exemplified. Such trifunctional or higher functional isocyanates are addition reactions of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional isocyanate multimers (eg, dimers or trimers), derivatives (eg, polyhydric alcohols and two or more molecules of polyfunctional isocyanates). Product), polymer, etc. For example, diphenylmethane diisocyanate dimer or trimeric, hexamethylene diisocyanate isocyanurate (isocyanurate structure trimer adduct), reaction product of trimethylolpropane and tolylene diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane and hexa. Reaction product with methylene diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane adduct of xylylene diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane adduct of isophorone diisocyanate, trimethylolpropane adduct of hexamethylene diisocyanate, polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate, polyether polyisocyanate, polyester poly Examples thereof include isocyanates, additions of these to various polyols, and polyfunctional isocyanates such as polyisocyanates polyfunctionalized with isocyanurate bonds, burette bonds, allophanate bonds, and the like.
上記多官能イソシアネートの市販品としては、旭化成ケミカルズ社製の商品名「デュラネートTPA-100」、東ソー社製の商品名「コロネートL」、同「コロネートHL」、同「コロネートHK」、同「コロネートHX」、同「コロネート2096」、三井化学社製の商品名「タケネートD110N」、同「タケネートD120N」、同「タケネートD140N」、同「タケネートD160N」等、が挙げられる。
As commercial products of the above-mentioned polyfunctional isocyanate, the product name "Duranate TPA-100" manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Co., Ltd., the product name "Coronate L" manufactured by Tosoh Co., Ltd., "Coronate HL", "Coronate HK", and "Coronate" Examples thereof include "HX", "Coronate 2096", trade names "Takenate D110N", "Takenate D120N", "Takenate D140N", and "Takenate D160N" manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc.
エポキシ系架橋剤としては、ビスフェノールA、エピクロルヒドリン型のエポキシ系樹脂、エチレングリシジルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、グリセリンジグリシジルエーテル、グリセリントリグリシジルエーテル、1,6-ヘキサンジオールグリシジルエーテル、トリメチロールプロパントリグリシジルエーテル、ジグリシジルアニリン、ジアミングリシジルアミン、N,N,N’,N’-テトラグリシジル-m-キシリレンジアミンおよび1,3-ビス(N,N-ジグリシジルアミノメチル)シクロヘキサン等を挙げることができる。これらは一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
Examples of the epoxy-based cross-linking agent include bisphenol A, epichlorohydrin-type epoxy-based resin, ethylene glycidyl ether, polyethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, glycerin diglycidyl ether, glycerin triglycidyl ether, 1,6-hexanediol glycidyl ether, and trimethyl propanetri. Examples include glycidyl ether, diglycidyl aniline, diamine glycidyl amine, N, N, N', N'-tetraglycidyl-m-xylylenediamine and 1,3-bis (N, N-diglycidylaminomethyl) cyclohexane. Can be done. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
金属キレート化合物としては、金属成分としてアルミニウム、鉄、錫、チタン、ニッケルなど、キレート成分としてアセチレン、アセト酢酸メチル、乳酸エチルなどが挙げられる。これらは一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
Examples of the metal chelate compound include aluminum, iron, tin, titanium, nickel and the like as metal components, and acetylene, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl lactate and the like as chelate components. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
架橋剤を使用する場合における使用量は、特に限定されず、例えばポリマー(A)100重量部に対して0重量部を超える量とすることができる。また、架橋剤の使用量は、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対して、例えば0.01重量部以上とすることができ、0.05重量部以上とすることが好ましい。架橋剤の使用量の増大により、貼付け初期の粘着力が抑制され、リワーク性が向上する傾向にある。屈曲回復性、加工性に優れる傾向がある。いくつかの態様において、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対する架橋剤の使用量は、0.1重量部以上であってもよく、0.5重量部以上であってもよく、0.8重量部以上であってもよい。一方、ポリマー(B)の移動性を適度に許容して加熱後の粘着力上昇を得る観点から、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対する架橋剤の使用量は、通常、15重量部以下とすることが適当であり、10重量部以下としてもよく、5重量部以下としてもよい。
The amount used when the cross-linking agent is used is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, an amount exceeding 0 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). The amount of the cross-linking agent used can be, for example, 0.01 parts by weight or more, preferably 0.05 parts by weight or more, based on 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). As the amount of the cross-linking agent used increases, the adhesive strength at the initial stage of application is suppressed, and the reworkability tends to be improved. It tends to be excellent in bending recovery and workability. In some embodiments, the amount of the cross-linking agent used per 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) may be 0.1 parts by weight or more, 0.5 parts by weight or more, or 0.8 parts by weight. It may be the above. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of appropriately allowing the mobility of the polymer (B) to obtain an increase in adhesive strength after heating, the amount of the cross-linking agent used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is usually 15 parts by weight or less. Is appropriate, and may be 10 parts by weight or less, or 5 parts by weight or less.
ここに開示される技術は、架橋剤として少なくともイソシアネート系架橋剤を用いる態様で好ましく実施され得る。貼付け初期の良好なリワーク性と加熱後の粘着力上昇とを両立する観点から、いくつかの態様において、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対するイソシアネート系架橋剤の使用量は、例えば0.01重量部以上とすることができ、好ましくは0.05重量部以上、より好ましくは0.07重量部以上であり、0.10重量部以上としてもよく、0.15重量部以上(例えば0.20重量部以上)としてもよい。イソシアネート系架橋剤の使用量の増大により、適度な凝集力、弾性率が得られ、屈曲回復性、加工性にも優れる傾向がある。また、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対するイソシアネート系架橋剤の使用量は、例えば5重量部以下とすることができ、好ましくは1.0重量部未満、より好ましくは0.5重量部未満、さらに好ましくは0.3重量部未満、特に好ましくは0.2重量部未満(例えば0.15重量部以下)である。これにより、粘着剤の凝集力、ひいては弾性率(典型的には表面弾性率)が適度に低下し、良好な屈曲保持力が得られ、また加熱後粘着力上昇も得られやすい。
The technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out in an embodiment in which at least an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent is used as the cross-linking agent. From the viewpoint of achieving both good reworkability at the initial stage of application and increase in adhesive strength after heating, the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is, for example, 0.01 parts by weight in some embodiments. It can be more than 0.05 parts by weight, more preferably 0.07 parts by weight or more, and may be 0.10 parts by weight or more, and 0.15 parts by weight or more (for example, 0.20 parts by weight). It may be more than a part). By increasing the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used, an appropriate cohesive force and elastic modulus can be obtained, and bending recovery and processability tend to be excellent. The amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) can be, for example, 5 parts by weight or less, preferably less than 1.0 part by weight, more preferably less than 0.5 parts by weight, and further. It is preferably less than 0.3 parts by weight, particularly preferably less than 0.2 parts by weight (for example, 0.15 parts by weight or less). As a result, the cohesive force of the pressure-sensitive adhesive, and thus the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus) is appropriately lowered, a good bending holding force can be obtained, and an increase in the adhesive force after heating can be easily obtained.
特に限定するものではないが、粘着剤層がモノマー単位として水酸基含有モノマーを含む構成においてイソシアネート系架橋剤を用いる場合、粘着剤層に含まれるイソシアネート基と水酸基とのモル比([NCO]/[OH])は、例えば0.001以上とすることができる。このように水酸基含有モノマーに対するイソシアネート系架橋剤の使用量を多くすることにより、粘着剤の弾性率(典型的には表面弾性率)が好適な範囲となり、屈曲回復性が向上する傾向がある。また、加工性にも優れる傾向がある。いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記モル比([NCO]/[OH])は、0.002以上であり、より好ましくは0.004以上、さらに好ましくは0.006以上(例えば0.007以上)であり、0.010以上であってもよく、0.020以上でもよく、0.030以上でもよい。また、上記モル比([NCO]/[OH])は、例えば1.0以下とすることができ、0.10以下であってもよい。上記モル比を所定値以下に制限することにより、貼付け初期の粘着力に対して加熱後粘着力を大きく上昇させるために適した架橋構造が好ましく形成され得る。いくつかの好ましい態様において、上記モル比([NCO]/[OH])は0.030以下であり、より好ましくは0.015以下、さらに好ましくは0.012以下(例えば0.009以下)であり、0.005以下でもよい。なお、粘着剤層において、イソシアネート基と水酸基は、それらの少なくとも一部が化学的に結合(架橋)した状態で存在し得る。より具体的には、上記イソシアネート基は上記水酸基と化学的に結合(架橋)した状態で存在し得る。一方、上記水酸基は、その一部がイソシアネート基と化学的に結合し、他の一部は上記イソシアネート基と化学的に結合(架橋)していない状態で存在し得る。
Although not particularly limited, when an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent is used in a configuration in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a hydroxyl group-containing monomer as a monomer unit, the molar ratio of the isocyanate group contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the hydroxyl group ([NCO] / [ OH]) can be, for example, 0.001 or more. By increasing the amount of the isocyanate-based cross-linking agent used for the hydroxyl group-containing monomer in this way, the elastic modulus (typically, the surface elastic modulus) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive tends to be in a suitable range, and the bending recovery property tends to be improved. It also tends to be excellent in workability. In some preferred embodiments, the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) is 0.002 or greater, more preferably 0.004 or greater, still more preferably 0.006 or greater (eg 0.007 or greater). It may be 0.010 or more, 0.020 or more, or 0.030 or more. Further, the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) can be, for example, 1.0 or less, and may be 0.10 or less. By limiting the molar ratio to a predetermined value or less, a crosslinked structure suitable for greatly increasing the adhesive force after heating with respect to the adhesive force at the initial stage of application can be preferably formed. In some preferred embodiments, the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) is 0.030 or less, more preferably 0.015 or less, still more preferably 0.012 or less (eg 0.009 or less). Yes, it may be 0.005 or less. In the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group may exist in a state where at least a part thereof is chemically bonded (crosslinked). More specifically, the isocyanate group may exist in a state of being chemically bonded (crosslinked) with the hydroxyl group. On the other hand, a part of the hydroxyl group may be chemically bonded to the isocyanate group, and the other part may be present in a state where it is not chemically bonded (crosslinked) to the isocyanate group.
いくつかの好ましい態様において、粘着剤層は触媒を含む。触媒は、粘着剤層形成時に粘着剤層の硬化を促進する目的、典型的には、上述したいずれかの架橋反応をより効果的に進行させる目的で添加され得る。したがって、上記触媒は、硬化触媒または架橋触媒ともいう。触媒を添加することにより、初期硬化が促進され、粘着剤層表面の気泡発生の原因となる副反応を抑制することができる。触媒としては、鉄系触媒、錫系触媒、チタン系触媒、ジルコニウム系触媒、鉛系触媒、コバルト系触媒、亜鉛系触媒等の有機金属系化合物、3級アミン化合物等が挙げられる。これらは、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。なかでも、反応速度とポットライフのバランスから、鉄系触媒、錫系触媒が好ましく、鉄系触媒が特に好ましい。
In some preferred embodiments, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer comprises a catalyst. The catalyst may be added for the purpose of promoting the curing of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer during the formation of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, typically for the purpose of more effectively advancing any of the above-mentioned cross-linking reactions. Therefore, the catalyst is also referred to as a curing catalyst or a cross-linking catalyst. By adding a catalyst, initial curing is promoted, and side reactions that cause bubbles on the surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer can be suppressed. Examples of the catalyst include organic metal-based compounds such as iron-based catalysts, tin-based catalysts, titanium-based catalysts, zirconium-based catalysts, lead-based catalysts, cobalt-based catalysts, and zinc-based catalysts, and tertiary amine compounds. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among them, an iron-based catalyst and a tin-based catalyst are preferable, and an iron-based catalyst is particularly preferable, from the viewpoint of the balance between the reaction rate and the pot life.
鉄系触媒としては、例えば、鉄アセチルアセトネート、2-エチルヘキサン酸鉄等が挙げられる。鉄系触媒は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
Examples of the iron-based catalyst include iron acetylacetonate and iron 2-ethylhexanoate. The iron-based catalyst may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
錫系触媒としては、例えば、ジブチル錫ジクロライド、ジブチル錫オキシド、ジブチル錫ジブロマイド、ジブチル錫マレエート、ジブチル錫ジラウレート、ジブチル錫ジアセテート、ジブチル錫スルフィド、トリブチル錫メトキシド、トリブチル錫アセテート、トリエチル錫エトキシド、トリブチル錫エトキシド、ジオクチル錫オキシド、ジオクチル錫ジラウレート、トリブチル錫クロライド、トリブチル錫トリクロロアセテート、2-エチルヘキサン酸錫等が挙げられる。錫系触媒は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。
Examples of the tin-based catalyst include dibutyltin dichloride, dibutyltin oxide, dibutyltin dibromide, dibutyltin maleate, dibutyltin dilaurate, dibutyltin diacetate, dibutyltin sulfide, tributyltin methoxyde, tributyltin acetate, and triethyltinethoxydo. Examples thereof include tributyl tin ethoxydo, dioctyl tin oxide, dioctyl tin dilaurate, tributyl tin chloride, tributyl tin trichloroacetate, tin 2-ethylhexanoate and the like. The tin-based catalyst may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
触媒の使用量は、特に制限されず、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対して、例えば0.0001重量部以上とすることができ、好ましくは0.001重量部以上、より好ましくは0.003重量部以上、さらに好ましくは0.006重量部以上、特に好ましくは0.008重量部以上である。触媒を適量用いることで、粘着剤層からの気泡発生が抑制され、平滑な粘着面が得られやすい。また、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対する触媒の使用量は、例えば1重量部以下とすることができ、0.1重量部以下であってもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対する触媒の使用量は、0.03重量部以下であり、より好ましくは0.02重量部以下、さらに好ましくは0.01重量部以下であり、0.005重量部以下であってもよい。ポリマー(A)100重量部に対する触媒の含有量を適度に制限することにより、好適な粘着力上昇を実現しやすい。
The amount of the catalyst used is not particularly limited and can be, for example, 0.0001 parts by weight or more, preferably 0.001 parts by weight or more, and more preferably 0.003 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A). It is 0 parts by weight or more, more preferably 0.006 parts by weight or more, and particularly preferably 0.008 parts by weight or more. By using an appropriate amount of catalyst, the generation of bubbles from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is suppressed, and a smooth pressure-sensitive adhesive surface can be easily obtained. Further, the amount of the catalyst used with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) can be, for example, 1 part by weight or less, and may be 0.1 part by weight or less. In some preferred embodiments, the amount of catalyst used per 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) is 0.03 parts by weight or less, more preferably 0.02 parts by weight or less, still more preferably 0.01 parts by weight or less. Yes, it may be 0.005 part by weight or less. By appropriately limiting the content of the catalyst with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), it is easy to realize a suitable increase in adhesive strength.
特に限定するものではないが、粘着剤層がモノマー単位として水酸基含有モノマーを含む構成において触媒を用いる場合、触媒の使用量は、粘着剤層に含まれる触媒と水酸基とのモル比([触媒]/[OH])が、例えば1.0×10-6以上となる量とすることができ、好ましくは1.0×10-5以上、より好ましくは1.0×10-4以上、さらに好ましくは2.0×10-4以上、特に好ましくは3.0×10-4以上となる量である。触媒を適量用いることで、粘着剤層からの気泡発生が抑制され、平滑な粘着面が得られやすい。また、上記モル比([触媒]/[OH])は、例えば5.0×10-2以下とすることができ、5.0×10-3以下であってもよい。いくつかの好ましい態様では、上記モル比([触媒]/[OH])は、3.0×10-3以下であり、より好ましくは1.0×10-3以下、さらに好ましくは5.0×10-4以下であり、3.0×10-4以下であってもよい。触媒の含有量を適度に制限することにより、好適な粘着力上昇を実現しやすい。
Although not particularly limited, when a catalyst is used in a configuration in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a hydroxyl group-containing monomer as a monomer unit, the amount of the catalyst used is the molar ratio of the catalyst and the hydroxyl group contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer ([catalyst]. / [OH]) can be, for example, 1.0 × 10 -6 or more, preferably 1.0 × 10 -5 or more, more preferably 1.0 × 10 -4 or more, still more preferable. Is an amount of 2.0 × 10 -4 or more, particularly preferably 3.0 × 10 -4 or more. By using an appropriate amount of catalyst, the generation of bubbles from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is suppressed, and a smooth pressure-sensitive adhesive surface can be easily obtained. Further, the molar ratio ([catalyst] / [OH]) can be, for example, 5.0 × 10-2 or less, and may be 5.0 × 10 -3 or less. In some preferred embodiments, the molar ratio ([catalyst] / [OH]) is 3.0 × 10 -3 or less, more preferably 1.0 × 10 -3 or less, still more preferably 5.0. It may be × 10 -4 or less, and may be 3.0 × 10 -4 or less. By appropriately limiting the content of the catalyst, it is easy to realize a suitable increase in adhesive strength.
(粘着付与樹脂)
粘着剤層には、必要に応じて粘着付与樹脂を含ませることができる。粘着付与樹脂としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、ロジン系粘着付与樹脂、テルペン系粘着付与樹脂、フェノール系粘着付与樹脂、炭化水素系粘着付与樹脂、ケトン系粘着付与樹脂、ポリアミド系粘着付与樹脂、エポキシ系粘着付与樹脂、エラストマー系粘着付与樹脂等が挙げられる。粘着付与樹脂は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 (Adhesive-imparting resin)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may contain a pressure-sensitive adhesive resin, if necessary. The tackifier resin is not particularly limited, and for example, a rosin-based tackifier resin, a terpene-based tackifier resin, a phenol-based tackifier resin, a hydrocarbon-based tackifier resin, a ketone-based tackifier resin, a polyamide-based tackifier resin, etc. Examples thereof include an epoxy-based adhesive-imparting resin and an elastomer-based adhesive-imparting resin. The tackifier resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
粘着剤層には、必要に応じて粘着付与樹脂を含ませることができる。粘着付与樹脂としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、ロジン系粘着付与樹脂、テルペン系粘着付与樹脂、フェノール系粘着付与樹脂、炭化水素系粘着付与樹脂、ケトン系粘着付与樹脂、ポリアミド系粘着付与樹脂、エポキシ系粘着付与樹脂、エラストマー系粘着付与樹脂等が挙げられる。粘着付与樹脂は、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 (Adhesive-imparting resin)
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may contain a pressure-sensitive adhesive resin, if necessary. The tackifier resin is not particularly limited, and for example, a rosin-based tackifier resin, a terpene-based tackifier resin, a phenol-based tackifier resin, a hydrocarbon-based tackifier resin, a ketone-based tackifier resin, a polyamide-based tackifier resin, etc. Examples thereof include an epoxy-based adhesive-imparting resin and an elastomer-based adhesive-imparting resin. The tackifier resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
粘着付与樹脂の含有量は特に限定されず、目的や用途に応じて適切な粘着性能が発揮されるように設定することができる。ポリマー(A)100重量部に対する粘着付与樹脂の含有量(二種以上の粘着付与樹脂を含む場合には、それらの合計量)は、例えば5~500重量部程度とすることができる。また、ここに開示される技術は、粘着付与樹脂の使用量が制限された態様で好ましく実施することができる。例えば、ポリマー(A)100重量部に対する粘着付与樹脂の含有量は、20重量部未満とすることができ、10重量部未満であってもよく、3重量部未満でもよく、1重量部未満(0重量部~1重量部未満)でもよく、いくつかの態様においては、粘着剤層が粘着付与樹脂を実質的に含有しない。
The content of the adhesive-imparting resin is not particularly limited, and can be set so as to exhibit appropriate adhesive performance according to the purpose and application. The content of the tackifier resin with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) (when two or more kinds of tackifier resins are included, the total amount thereof) can be, for example, about 5 to 500 parts by weight. Further, the technique disclosed herein can be preferably carried out in an embodiment in which the amount of the tackifier resin used is limited. For example, the content of the tackifier resin with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A) can be less than 20 parts by weight, may be less than 10 parts by weight, may be less than 3 parts by weight, and may be less than 1 part by weight ( It may be from 0 part by weight to less than 1 part by weight), and in some embodiments, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer does not substantially contain the tack-imparting resin.
その他、ここに開示される技術における粘着剤層は、本発明の効果が著しく妨げられない範囲で、レベリング剤、可塑剤、軟化剤、着色剤(染料、顔料等)、充填剤、帯電防止剤、老化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、酸化防止剤、光安定剤、防腐剤等の、粘着剤に使用され得る公知の添加剤を必要に応じて含んでいてもよい。
In addition, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer in the technique disclosed herein is a leveling agent, a plasticizer, a softening agent, a colorant (dye, pigment, etc.), a filler, and an antistatic agent, to the extent that the effects of the present invention are not significantly impaired. , Anti-aging agents, UV absorbers, antioxidants, light stabilizers, preservatives and the like, which may contain known additives that can be used as adhesives, if necessary.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムを構成する粘着剤層は、粘着剤組成物の硬化層であり得る。すなわち、該粘着剤層は、水分散型、溶剤型、光硬化型、ホットメルト型等の粘着剤組成物を適当な表面に付与(例えば塗布)した後、硬化処理を適宜施すことにより形成され得る。二種以上の硬化処理(乾燥、架橋、重合、冷却等)を行う場合、これらは、同時に、または多段階にわたって行うことができる。モノマー原料の部分重合物(ポリマーシロップ)を用いた粘着剤組成物では、典型的には、上記硬化処理として、最終的な共重合反応が行われる。すなわち、部分重合物をさらなる共重合反応に供して完全重合物を形成する。例えば、光硬化性の粘着剤組成物であれば、光照射が実施される。必要に応じて、架橋、乾燥等の硬化処理が実施されてもよい。例えば、光硬化性粘着剤組成物で乾燥させる必要がある場合は、乾燥後に光硬化を行うとよい。完全重合物を用いた粘着剤組成物では、典型的には、上記硬化処理として、必要に応じて乾燥(加熱乾燥)、架橋等の処理が実施される。
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer constituting the reinforcing film disclosed herein may be a cured layer of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. That is, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is formed by applying (for example, coating) a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition such as a water-dispersed type, a solvent type, a photo-curing type, or a hot-melt type to an appropriate surface, and then appropriately performing a curing treatment. obtain. When performing two or more types of curing treatments (drying, crosslinking, polymerization, cooling, etc.), these can be performed simultaneously or in multiple steps. In a pressure-sensitive adhesive composition using a partial polymer (polymer syrup) of a monomer raw material, a final copolymerization reaction is typically performed as the above-mentioned curing treatment. That is, the partial polymer is subjected to a further copolymerization reaction to form a complete polymer. For example, in the case of a photocurable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, light irradiation is performed. If necessary, hardening treatment such as crosslinking and drying may be carried out. For example, when it is necessary to dry with a photocurable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition, it is preferable to perform photo-curing after drying. In the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition using a complete polymer, typically, as the above-mentioned curing treatment, treatments such as drying (heat drying) and cross-linking are carried out as necessary.
粘着剤組成物の塗布は、例えば、グラビアロールコーター、リバースロールコーター、キスロールコーター、ディップロールコーター、バーコーター、ナイフコーター、スプレーコーター等の慣用のコーターを用いて実施することができる。
The pressure-sensitive adhesive composition can be applied using a conventional coater such as a gravure roll coater, a reverse roll coater, a kiss roll coater, a dip roll coater, a bar coater, a knife coater, or a spray coater.
粘着剤層の厚さは特に限定されず、例えば6μm以上とすることができる。いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の厚さは、8μm以上でもよく、10μm以上でもよく、15μm以上でもよく、20μm以上または20μm超でもよい。粘着剤層の厚さの増大により、加熱後粘着力が上昇する傾向にある。また、いくつかの態様において、粘着剤層の厚さは、例えば300μm以下であってよく、200μm以下でもよく、150μm以下でもよく、100μm以下でもよく、70μm以下でもよく、50μm以下でもよく、40μm以下でもよい。粘着剤層の厚さが大きすぎないことは、補強用フィルムの薄型化や粘着剤層の凝集破壊防止等の観点から有利となり得る。厚さが上述の範囲内である粘着剤層を有する補強用フィルムは、粘着力等の粘着特性や屈曲回復性、屈曲保持力のバランスのとれたものとなり得る。なお、基材の第一面および第二面に第一粘着剤層および第二粘着剤層を有する補強用フィルムの場合、上述した粘着剤層の厚さは、少なくとも第一粘着剤層の厚さに適用され得る。第二粘着剤層の厚さも同様の範囲から選択され得る。また、基材レスの補強用フィルムの場合、該補強用フィルムの厚さは粘着剤層の厚さと一致する。
The thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not particularly limited and can be, for example, 6 μm or more. In some embodiments, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be 8 μm or greater, 10 μm or greater, 15 μm or greater, 20 μm or greater, or greater than 20 μm. As the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer increases, the pressure-sensitive adhesive strength tends to increase after heating. Further, in some embodiments, the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be, for example, 300 μm or less, 200 μm or less, 150 μm or less, 100 μm or less, 70 μm or less, 50 μm or less, 40 μm or less. It may be as follows. The fact that the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is not too large can be advantageous from the viewpoints of reducing the thickness of the reinforcing film and preventing cohesive failure of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. A reinforcing film having an adhesive layer having a thickness within the above range can have a good balance of adhesive properties such as adhesive strength, bending recovery property, and bending holding force. In the case of a reinforcing film having a first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and a second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the first and second surfaces of the base material, the thickness of the above-mentioned pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is at least the thickness of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Can be applied to. The thickness of the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be selected from the same range. Further, in the case of a base material-less reinforcing film, the thickness of the reinforcing film coincides with the thickness of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer.
<支持基材>
いくつかの態様に係る補強用フィルムは、支持基材の片面または両面に粘着剤層を備える基材付き粘着シートの形態であり得る。支持基材の材質は特に限定されず、補強用フィルムの使用目的や使用態様等に応じて適宜選択することができる。使用し得る基材の非限定的な例としては、プラスチックフィルム等の樹脂フィルム;ポリウレタンフォーム、ポリエチレンフォーム、ポリクロロプレンフォーム等の発泡体からなる発泡体シート;各種の繊維状物質(麻、綿等の天然繊維、ポリエステル、ビニロン等の合成繊維、アセテート等の半合成繊維、等であり得る。)の単独または混紡等による織布および不織布;和紙、上質紙、クラフト紙、クレープ紙等の紙類;アルミニウム箔、銅箔等の金属箔;等が挙げられる。これらを複合した構成の基材であってもよい。このような複合基材の例として、例えば、金属箔と上記プラスチックフィルムとが積層した構造の基材、ガラスクロス等の無機繊維で強化されたプラスチック基材等が挙げられる。 <Supporting base material>
The reinforcing film according to some aspects may be in the form of a substrate-based pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having an pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on one or both sides of a supporting base material. The material of the supporting base material is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose of use, the mode of use, and the like of the reinforcing film. Non-limiting examples of base materials that can be used include resin films such as plastic films; foam sheets made of foams such as polyurethane foams, polyethylene foams, and polychloroprene foams; various fibrous substances (linen, cotton, etc.). Natural fibers, synthetic fibers such as polyester and vinylon, semi-synthetic fibers such as acetate, etc.) Woven fabrics and non-woven fabrics made by single or blended spinning; papers such as Japanese paper, high-quality paper, kraft paper, crepe paper, etc. ; Metal foil such as aluminum foil and copper foil; and the like. A base material having a composite structure thereof may be used. Examples of such a composite base material include a base material having a structure in which a metal foil and the above plastic film are laminated, a plastic base material reinforced with an inorganic fiber such as glass cloth, and the like.
いくつかの態様に係る補強用フィルムは、支持基材の片面または両面に粘着剤層を備える基材付き粘着シートの形態であり得る。支持基材の材質は特に限定されず、補強用フィルムの使用目的や使用態様等に応じて適宜選択することができる。使用し得る基材の非限定的な例としては、プラスチックフィルム等の樹脂フィルム;ポリウレタンフォーム、ポリエチレンフォーム、ポリクロロプレンフォーム等の発泡体からなる発泡体シート;各種の繊維状物質(麻、綿等の天然繊維、ポリエステル、ビニロン等の合成繊維、アセテート等の半合成繊維、等であり得る。)の単独または混紡等による織布および不織布;和紙、上質紙、クラフト紙、クレープ紙等の紙類;アルミニウム箔、銅箔等の金属箔;等が挙げられる。これらを複合した構成の基材であってもよい。このような複合基材の例として、例えば、金属箔と上記プラスチックフィルムとが積層した構造の基材、ガラスクロス等の無機繊維で強化されたプラスチック基材等が挙げられる。 <Supporting base material>
The reinforcing film according to some aspects may be in the form of a substrate-based pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having an pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on one or both sides of a supporting base material. The material of the supporting base material is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose of use, the mode of use, and the like of the reinforcing film. Non-limiting examples of base materials that can be used include resin films such as plastic films; foam sheets made of foams such as polyurethane foams, polyethylene foams, and polychloroprene foams; various fibrous substances (linen, cotton, etc.). Natural fibers, synthetic fibers such as polyester and vinylon, semi-synthetic fibers such as acetate, etc.) Woven fabrics and non-woven fabrics made by single or blended spinning; papers such as Japanese paper, high-quality paper, kraft paper, crepe paper, etc. ; Metal foil such as aluminum foil and copper foil; and the like. A base material having a composite structure thereof may be used. Examples of such a composite base material include a base material having a structure in which a metal foil and the above plastic film are laminated, a plastic base material reinforced with an inorganic fiber such as glass cloth, and the like.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムの基材としては、各種のフィルム基材を好ましく用いることができる。上記フィルム基材は、発泡体フィルムや不織布シート等のように多孔質の基材であってもよく、非多孔質の基材であってもよく、多孔質の層と非多孔質の層とが積層した構造の基材であってもよい。いくつかの態様において、上記フィルム基材としては、独立して形状維持可能な(自立型の、あるいは非依存性の)樹脂フィルムをベースフィルムとして含むものを好ましく用いることができる。ここで「樹脂フィルム」とは、非多孔質の構造であって、典型的には実質的に気泡を含まない(ボイドレスの)樹脂フィルムを意味する。したがって、上記樹脂フィルムは、発泡体フィルムや不織布とは区別される概念である。上記樹脂フィルムとしては、独立して形状維持可能な(自立型の、あるいは非依存性の)ものが好ましく用いられ得る。上記樹脂フィルムは、単層構造であってもよく、二層以上の多層構造(例えば、三層構造)であってもよい。
As the base material of the reinforcing film disclosed here, various film base materials can be preferably used. The film base material may be a porous base material such as a foam film or a non-woven fabric sheet, or may be a non-porous base material, and may be a porous layer and a non-porous layer. It may be a base material having a laminated structure. In some embodiments, as the film substrate, a film containing an independently shape-maintainable (self-supporting or independent) resin film as a base film can be preferably used. As used herein, the term "resin film" means a resin film (of voidless) having a non-porous structure and typically containing substantially no bubbles. Therefore, the resin film is a concept that is distinguished from foam films and non-woven fabrics. As the resin film, one that can independently maintain its shape (self-supporting or independent) can be preferably used. The resin film may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure having two or more layers (for example, a three-layer structure).
樹脂フィルムを構成する樹脂材料としては、例えば、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ナイロン6、ナイロン66、部分芳香族ポリアミド等のポリアミド(PA)、ポリイミド(PI)、ポリアミドイミド(PAI)、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン(PEEK)、ポリエーテルスルホン(PES)、ポリフェニレンサルファイド(PPS)、ポリカーボネート(PC)、ポリウレタン(PU)、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体(EVA)、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)等のフッ素樹脂、アクリル樹脂、ポリアクリレート、ポリスチレン、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリ塩化ビニリデン等の樹脂を用いることができる。上記樹脂フィルムは、このような樹脂の一種を単独で含む樹脂材料を用いて形成されたものであってもよく、二種以上がブレンドされた樹脂材料を用いて形成されたものであってもよい。上記樹脂フィルムは、無延伸であってもよく、延伸(例えば一軸延伸または二軸延伸)されたものであってもよい。
Examples of the resin material constituting the resin film include polyamide (PA) such as polyester, polyolefin, nylon 6, nylon 66, and partially aromatic polyamide, polyimide (PI), polyamideimide (PAI), and polyetheretherketone (PEEK). ), Polyethersulfone (PES), Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), Polycarbonate (PC), Polyurethane (PU), Ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and other fluororesins and acrylic resins. , Polyacrylate, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride and the like can be used. The resin film may be formed by using a resin material containing one kind of such a resin alone, or may be formed by using a resin material in which two or more kinds are blended. good. The resin film may be unstretched or stretched (for example, uniaxially stretched or biaxially stretched).
樹脂フィルムを構成する樹脂材料の好適例として、ポリイミド系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、PPS樹脂およびポリオレフィン系樹脂が挙げられる。ここで、ポリイミド系樹脂とは、ポリイミドを50重量%を超える割合で含有する樹脂のことをいう。同様に、ポリエステル系樹脂とは、ポリエステルを50重量%を超える割合で含有する樹脂のことをいい、PPS樹脂とはPPSを50重量%を超える割合で含有する樹脂のことをいい、ポリオレフィン系樹脂とはポリオレフィンを50重量%を超える割合で含有する樹脂のことをいう。
Preferable examples of the resin material constituting the resin film include polyimide-based resin, polyester-based resin, PPS resin, and polyolefin-based resin. Here, the polyimide-based resin refers to a resin containing polyimide in a proportion of more than 50% by weight. Similarly, the polyester-based resin refers to a resin containing polyester in a proportion of more than 50% by weight, and the PPS resin refers to a resin containing PPS in a proportion of more than 50% by weight, and is a polyolefin-based resin. Refers to a resin containing polyolefin in a proportion of more than 50% by weight.
ポリエステル系樹脂の具体例としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリブチレンテレフタレート(PBT)、ポリエチレンナフタレート(PEN)、ポリブチレンナフタレート等が挙げられる。
Specific examples of the polyester resin include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polybutylene naphthalate and the like.
ポリオレフィン樹脂としては、一種のポリオレフィンを単独で、または二種以上のポリオレフィンを組み合わせて用いることができる。該ポリオレフィンは、例えばα-オレフィンのホモポリマー、二種以上のα-オレフィンの共重合体、一種または二種以上のα-オレフィンと他のビニルモノマーとの共重合体等であり得る。具体例としては、ポリエチレン(PE)、ポリプロピレン(PP)、ポリ-1-ブテン、ポリ-4-メチル-1-ペンテン、エチレンプロピレンゴム(EPR)等のエチレン-プロピレン共重合体、エチレン-プロピレン-ブテン共重合体、エチレン-ブテン共重合体、エチレン-ビニルアルコール共重合体、エチレン-エチルアクリレート共重合体等が挙げられる。低密度(LD)ポリオレフィンおよび高密度(HD)ポリオレフィンのいずれも使用可能である。ポリオレフィン樹脂フィルムの例としては、無延伸ポリプロピレン(CPP)フィルム、二軸延伸ポリプロピレン(OPP)フィルム、低密度ポリエチレン(LDPE)フィルム、直鎖状低密度ポリエチレン(LLDPE)フィルム、中密度ポリエチレン(MDPE)フィルム、高密度ポリエチレン(HDPE)フィルム、二種以上のポリエチレン(PE)をブレンドしたポリエチレン(PE)フィルム、ポリプロピレン(PP)とポリエチレン(PE)をブレンドしたPP/PEブレンドフィルム等が挙げられる。
As the polyolefin resin, one kind of polyolefin can be used alone, or two or more kinds of polyolefins can be used in combination. The polyolefin can be, for example, a homopolymer of an α-olefin, a copolymer of two or more kinds of α-olefins, a copolymer of one or more kinds of α-olefins and another vinyl monomer, and the like. Specific examples include polyethylene-propylene copolymers such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), poly-1-butene, poly-4-methyl-1-pentene, and ethylene propylene rubber (EPR), and ethylene-propylene-. Examples thereof include a butene copolymer, an ethylene-butene copolymer, an ethylene-vinyl alcohol copolymer, and an ethylene-ethyl acrylate copolymer. Both low density (LD) polyolefins and high density (HD) polyolefins can be used. Examples of polyolefin resin films include unstretched polypropylene (CPP) film, biaxially stretched polypropylene (OPP) film, low density polyethylene (LDPE) film, linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE) film, medium density polyethylene (MDPE). Examples thereof include a film, a high-density polyethylene (HDPE) film, a polyethylene (PE) film in which two or more kinds of polyethylene (PE) are blended, a PP / PE blend film in which polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) are blended, and the like.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムのベースフィルムとして好ましく利用し得る樹脂フィルムの具体例として、PIフィルム、PETフィルム、PENフィルム、PPSフィルム、PEEKフィルム、CPPフィルムおよびOPPフィルムが挙げられる。
Specific examples of the resin film that can be preferably used as the base film of the reinforcing film disclosed herein include PI film, PET film, PEN film, PPS film, PEEK film, CPP film and OPP film.
樹脂フィルムには、本発明の効果が著しく妨げられない範囲で、光安定剤、酸化防止剤、帯電防止剤、着色剤(染料、顔料等)、充填材、スリップ剤、アンチブロッキング剤等の公知の添加剤を、必要に応じて配合することができる。添加剤の配合量は特に限定されず、目的等に応じて適宜設定することができる。
Known resin films include light stabilizers, antioxidants, antistatic agents, colorants (dyees, pigments, etc.), fillers, slip agents, antiblocking agents, etc., as long as the effects of the present invention are not significantly impaired. Additives can be added as needed. The blending amount of the additive is not particularly limited and can be appropriately set according to the purpose and the like.
樹脂フィルムの製造方法は特に限定されない。例えば、押出成形、インフレーション成形、Tダイキャスト成形、カレンダーロール成形等の、従来公知の一般的な樹脂フィルム成形方法を適宜採用することができる。
The method for manufacturing the resin film is not particularly limited. For example, conventionally known general resin film molding methods such as extrusion molding, inflation molding, T-die casting molding, and calender roll molding can be appropriately adopted.
上記基材は、このようなベースフィルムから実質的に構成されたものであり得る。あるいは、上記基材は、上記ベースフィルムの他に、補助的な層を含むものであってもよい。上記補助的な層の例としては、光学特性調整層(例えば着色層、反射防止層)、基材に所望の外観を付与するための印刷層やラミネート層、帯電防止層、下塗り層、剥離層等の表面処理層が挙げられる。
The base material may be substantially composed of such a base film. Alternatively, the base material may include an auxiliary layer in addition to the base film. Examples of the auxiliary layer include an optical property adjusting layer (for example, a colored layer and an antireflection layer), a printing layer or a laminating layer for imparting a desired appearance to a substrate, an antistatic layer, an undercoat layer, and a peeling layer. Such as a surface treatment layer.
基材の厚さは、特に限定されず、補強用フィルムの使用目的や使用態様等に応じて選択し得る。基材の厚さは、例えば1000μm以下であり得る。いくつかの態様において、補強用フィルムの取扱い性や加工性の観点から、基材の厚さは、例えば500μm以下であってよく、300μm以下であってもよく、250μm以下であってもよく、200μm以下であってもよい。補強用フィルムが適用される製品の小型化や軽量化の観点から、いくつかの態様において、基材の厚さは、例えば160μm以下であってよく、130μm以下であってもよく、100μm以下であってもよく、90μm以下でもよく、80μm以下でもよく、60μm以下でもよく、50μm以下でもよく、25μm以下でもよく、10μm以下でもよく、5μm以下でもよい。基材の厚さが小さくなると、補強用フィルムの柔軟性や被着体の表面形状への追従性が向上する傾向にある。また、取扱い性や加工性等の観点から、基材の厚さは、例えば2μm以上であってよく、5μm以上でもよく、10μm以上でもよく、20μm以上でもよく、25μm以上または25μm超でもよい。いくつかの態様において、基材の厚さは、例えば30μm以上であってよく、35μm以上でもよく、55μm以上でもよく、70μm以上でもよく、75μm以上でもよく、90μm以上でもよく、120μm以上でもよい。例えば、補強用フィルムにおいて、厚さ30μm以上の基材を好ましく採用し得る。
The thickness of the base material is not particularly limited and can be selected according to the purpose and mode of use of the reinforcing film. The thickness of the substrate can be, for example, 1000 μm or less. In some embodiments, the thickness of the substrate may be, for example, 500 μm or less, 300 μm or less, or 250 μm or less, from the viewpoint of handleability and processability of the reinforcing film. It may be 200 μm or less. From the viewpoint of miniaturization and weight reduction of the product to which the reinforcing film is applied, in some embodiments, the thickness of the base material may be, for example, 160 μm or less, 130 μm or less, or 100 μm or less. It may be 90 μm or less, 80 μm or less, 60 μm or less, 50 μm or less, 25 μm or less, 10 μm or less, or 5 μm or less. As the thickness of the base material becomes smaller, the flexibility of the reinforcing film and the followability to the surface shape of the adherend tend to improve. Further, from the viewpoint of handleability, processability and the like, the thickness of the base material may be, for example, 2 μm or more, 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 25 μm or more, or 25 μm or more. In some embodiments, the thickness of the substrate may be, for example, 30 μm or more, 35 μm or more, 55 μm or more, 70 μm or more, 75 μm or more, 90 μm or more, 120 μm or more. .. For example, in the reinforcing film, a base material having a thickness of 30 μm or more can be preferably adopted.
基材の第一面には、必要に応じて、コロナ放電処理、プラズマ処理、紫外線照射処理、酸処理、アルカリ処理、下塗り剤(プライマー)の塗布による下塗り層の形成等の、従来公知の表面処理が施されていてもよい。このような表面処理は、粘着剤層の基材への投錨性を向上させるための処理であり得る。例えば、樹脂フィルムをベースフィルムとして含む基材を備えた補強用フィルムにおいて、かかる投錨性向上処理が施された基材を好ましく採用し得る。上記表面処理は、単独でまたは組み合わせて適用することができる。下塗り層の形成に用いるプライマーの組成は特に限定されず、公知のものから適宜選択することができる。下塗り層の厚さは特に制限されないが、通常、0.01μm~1μm程度が適当であり、0.1μm~1μm程度が好ましい。必要に応じて基材の第一面に施され得る他の処理として、帯電防止層形成処理、着色層形成処理、印刷処理等が挙げられる。
The first surface of the base material is a conventionally known surface such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, alkali treatment, and formation of an undercoat layer by applying a primer, if necessary. It may be treated. Such a surface treatment may be a treatment for improving the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the substrate. For example, in a reinforcing film provided with a base material containing a resin film as a base film, a base material subjected to such anchoring property improving treatment can be preferably adopted. The above surface treatments can be applied alone or in combination. The composition of the primer used for forming the undercoat layer is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known ones. The thickness of the undercoat layer is not particularly limited, but is usually about 0.01 μm to 1 μm, preferably about 0.1 μm to 1 μm. Other treatments that can be applied to the first surface of the substrate as needed include antistatic layer forming treatments, colored layer forming treatments, printing treatments and the like.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムが基材の第一面にのみ粘着剤層を有する片面粘着シートの形態である場合、基材の第二面には、必要に応じて、剥離処理や帯電防止処理等の、従来公知の表面処理が施されていてもよい。例えば、基材の背面を剥離処理剤で表面処理することにより(典型的には、剥離処理剤による剥離層を設けることにより)、ロール状に巻回された形態の補強用フィルムの巻戻し力を軽くすることができる。剥離処理剤としては、シリコーン系剥離処理剤、長鎖アルキル系剥離処理剤、オレフィン系剥離処理剤、フッ素系剥離処理剤、脂肪酸アミド系剥離処理剤、硫化モリブデン、シリカ粉等を用いることができる。また、印字性の向上、光反射性の低減、重ね貼り性向上等の目的で、基材の第二面にコロナ放電処理、プラズマ処理、紫外線照射処理、酸処理、アルカリ処理等の処理が施されていてもよい。また、両面粘着シートの場合、基材の第二面には、必要に応じて、基材の第一面に施され得る表面処理として上記で例示したものと同様の表面処理が施されていてもよい。なお、基材の第一面に施される表面処理と第二面に施される表面処理とは、同一であってもよく異なってもよい。
When the reinforcing film disclosed herein is in the form of a single-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having an adhesive layer only on the first surface of the base material, the second side of the base material may be subjected to peeling treatment or antistatic treatment, if necessary. Conventionally known surface treatment such as treatment may be applied. For example, by surface-treating the back surface of the base material with a release treatment agent (typically, by providing a release layer with a release treatment agent), the rewinding force of the reinforcing film in the form of being wound in a roll shape. Can be lightened. As the stripping agent, a silicone-based stripping agent, a long-chain alkyl-based stripping agent, an olefin-based stripping agent, a fluorine-based stripping agent, a fatty acid amide-based stripping agent, molybdenum sulfide, silica powder, or the like can be used. .. In addition, for the purpose of improving printability, reducing light reflectivity, improving stackability, etc., the second surface of the base material is subjected to treatments such as corona discharge treatment, plasma treatment, ultraviolet irradiation treatment, acid treatment, and alkali treatment. It may have been done. Further, in the case of the double-sided adhesive sheet, the second surface of the base material is subjected to the same surface treatment as those exemplified above as the surface treatment that can be applied to the first surface of the base material, if necessary. May be good. The surface treatment applied to the first surface of the base material and the surface treatment applied to the second surface may be the same or different.
<補強用フィルムの特性>
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、ステンレス鋼板に貼り合わせて23℃に30分間保持した後に測定される初期粘着力N23が所定値以下に制限されていることが好ましい。いくつかの態様において、粘着力N23は、例えば500gf/25mm未満であることが好ましく、より好ましくは400gf/25mm未満、さらに好ましくは300gf/25mm未満、特に好ましくは250gf/25mm以下(例えば200gf/25mm以下)であり、150gf/25mm以下であってもよい。粘着力N23が低いことは、リワーク性の観点から好ましい。粘着力N23の下限は特に制限されず、例えば1gf/25mm以上であり得る。被着体への貼付け作業性や、粘着力上昇前における位置ズレ防止等の観点から、粘着力N23は、通常、10gf/25mm以上であることが適当である。加熱後粘着力の向上等の観点から、いくつかの態様において、粘着力N23は、例えば20gf/25mm以上であってよく、50gf/25mm以上でもよく、80gf/25mm以上でもよく、100gf/25mm以上(例えば150gf/25mm以上)でもよい。 <Characteristics of reinforcing film>
In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, it is preferable that the initial adhesive force N 23 measured after being bonded to a stainless steel plate and held at 23 ° C. for 30 minutes is limited to a predetermined value or less. In some embodiments, the adhesive force N 23 is preferably, for example, less than 500 gf / 25 mm, more preferably less than 400 gf / 25 mm, still more preferably less than 300 gf / 25 mm, particularly preferably 250 gf / 25 mm or less (eg 200 gf /). 25 mm or less), and may be 150 gf / 25 mm or less. A low adhesive force N 23 is preferable from the viewpoint of reworkability. The lower limit of the adhesive force N 23 is not particularly limited and may be, for example, 1 gf / 25 mm or more. The adhesive strength N 23 is usually preferably 10 gf / 25 mm or more from the viewpoint of sticking workability to the adherend and prevention of positional deviation before the adhesive strength increases. From the viewpoint of improving the adhesive strength after heating, in some embodiments, the adhesive strength N 23 may be, for example, 20 gf / 25 mm or more, 50 gf / 25 mm or more, 80 gf / 25 mm or more, 100 gf / 25 mm or more. The above (for example, 150 gf / 25 mm or more) may be used.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、ステンレス鋼板に貼り合わせて23℃に30分間保持した後に測定される初期粘着力N23が所定値以下に制限されていることが好ましい。いくつかの態様において、粘着力N23は、例えば500gf/25mm未満であることが好ましく、より好ましくは400gf/25mm未満、さらに好ましくは300gf/25mm未満、特に好ましくは250gf/25mm以下(例えば200gf/25mm以下)であり、150gf/25mm以下であってもよい。粘着力N23が低いことは、リワーク性の観点から好ましい。粘着力N23の下限は特に制限されず、例えば1gf/25mm以上であり得る。被着体への貼付け作業性や、粘着力上昇前における位置ズレ防止等の観点から、粘着力N23は、通常、10gf/25mm以上であることが適当である。加熱後粘着力の向上等の観点から、いくつかの態様において、粘着力N23は、例えば20gf/25mm以上であってよく、50gf/25mm以上でもよく、80gf/25mm以上でもよく、100gf/25mm以上(例えば150gf/25mm以上)でもよい。 <Characteristics of reinforcing film>
In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, it is preferable that the initial adhesive force N 23 measured after being bonded to a stainless steel plate and held at 23 ° C. for 30 minutes is limited to a predetermined value or less. In some embodiments, the adhesive force N 23 is preferably, for example, less than 500 gf / 25 mm, more preferably less than 400 gf / 25 mm, still more preferably less than 300 gf / 25 mm, particularly preferably 250 gf / 25 mm or less (eg 200 gf /). 25 mm or less), and may be 150 gf / 25 mm or less. A low adhesive force N 23 is preferable from the viewpoint of reworkability. The lower limit of the adhesive force N 23 is not particularly limited and may be, for example, 1 gf / 25 mm or more. The adhesive strength N 23 is usually preferably 10 gf / 25 mm or more from the viewpoint of sticking workability to the adherend and prevention of positional deviation before the adhesive strength increases. From the viewpoint of improving the adhesive strength after heating, in some embodiments, the adhesive strength N 23 may be, for example, 20 gf / 25 mm or more, 50 gf / 25 mm or more, 80 gf / 25 mm or more, 100 gf / 25 mm or more. The above (for example, 150 gf / 25 mm or more) may be used.
粘着力N23[gf/25mm]は、被着体としてのステンレス鋼(SUS)板に圧着して23℃、50%RHの環境で30分間放置した後、同環境において(すなわち、23℃において)、剥離角度180度、引張速度300mm/分の条件で180°引きはがし粘着力を測定することにより把握される。被着体としては、SUS304BA板が用いられる。測定にあたっては、必要に応じて、測定対象の補強用フィルムに適切な裏打ち材(例えば、厚さ25μm程度のPETフィルム)を貼り付けて補強することができる。粘着力N23は、より具体的には、後述する実施例に記載の初期粘着力の測定方法に準じて測定することができる。
The adhesive strength N 23 [gf / 25 mm] is applied by crimping to a stainless steel (SUS) plate as an adherend and leaving it in an environment of 23 ° C. and 50% RH for 30 minutes, and then in the same environment (that is, at 23 ° C.). ), The peeling angle is 180 degrees, and the tensile speed is 300 mm / min. As the adherend, a SUS304BA plate is used. In the measurement, if necessary, an appropriate backing material (for example, a PET film having a thickness of about 25 μm) can be attached to the reinforcing film to be measured for reinforcement. More specifically, the adhesive strength N 23 can be measured according to the method for measuring the initial adhesive strength described in Examples described later.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、加熱により粘着力が上昇するものであり、例えば300gf/25mm以上の粘着力N60、すなわちステンレス鋼板に貼り合わせて60℃に60分間保持した後に23℃において測定される粘着力、を示すものであり得る。いくつかの態様において、粘着力N60は400gf/25mm以上であり、500gf/25mm以上であることが適当である。この特性を満足する補強用フィルムは、被着体に貼り付けた後、加熱により粘着力が所定値以上に上昇する。ここに開示される技術によると、加熱で強粘着力を得ることが可能である。いくつかの好ましい態様において、粘着力N60は、600gf/25mm以上であり、より好ましくは700gf/25mm以上であり、800gf/25mm以上であってもよく、900gf/25mm以上でもよい。粘着力N60の上限は特に制限されない。補強用フィルムの製造容易性や経済性の観点から、いくつかの態様において、粘着力N60は、例えば3000gf/25mm以下であってよく、1500gf/25mm以下でもよく、1000gf/25mm以下でもよい。
The reinforcing film disclosed herein has an adhesive strength that increases by heating, for example, an adhesive strength of N60 of 300 gf / 25 mm or more, that is, after being bonded to a stainless steel plate and held at 60 ° C. for 60 minutes, at 23 ° C. It can indicate the adhesive strength to be measured. In some embodiments, it is appropriate that the adhesive force N 60 is 400 gf / 25 mm or more and 500 gf / 25 mm or more. After the reinforcing film satisfying this characteristic is attached to the adherend, the adhesive strength is increased to a predetermined value or more by heating. According to the technique disclosed herein, it is possible to obtain a strong adhesive force by heating. In some preferred embodiments, the adhesive force N 60 is 600 gf / 25 mm or more, more preferably 700 gf / 25 mm or more, 800 gf / 25 mm or more, or 900 gf / 25 mm or more. The upper limit of the adhesive strength N 60 is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of ease of manufacturing and economic efficiency of the reinforcing film, the adhesive strength N 60 may be, for example, 3000 gf / 25 mm or less, 1500 gf / 25 mm or less, or 1000 gf / 25 mm or less in some embodiments.
粘着力N60[gf/25mm]は、被着体としてのSUS板に圧着して60℃の環境に60分間保持し、次いで23℃、50%RHの環境に30分間放置した後に、同環境において、剥離角度180度、引張速度300mm/分の条件で180°引きはがし粘着力を測定することにより把握される。被着体としては、粘着力N23と同様、SUS304BA板が用いられる。測定にあたっては、必要に応じて、測定対象の補強用フィルムに適切な裏打ち材(例えば、厚さ25μm程度のPETフィルム)を貼り付けて補強することができる。粘着力N60は、より具体的には、後述する実施例に記載の加熱後粘着力の測定方法に準じて測定することができる。
The adhesive strength N 60 [gf / 25 mm] is pressure-bonded to a SUS plate as an adherend and held in an environment of 60 ° C. for 60 minutes, and then left in an environment of 23 ° C. and 50% RH for 30 minutes, and then in the same environment. In, 180 ° peeling adhesive force is measured under the conditions of a peeling angle of 180 degrees and a tensile speed of 300 mm / min. As the adherend, a SUS304BA plate is used as in the case of the adhesive strength N 23 . In the measurement, if necessary, an appropriate backing material (for example, a PET film having a thickness of about 25 μm) can be attached to the reinforcing film to be measured for reinforcement. More specifically, the adhesive strength N 60 can be measured according to the method for measuring the adhesive strength after heating described in Examples described later.
粘着力N23[gf/25mm]に対する粘着力N60[gf/25mm]の比、すなわち粘着力上昇比N60/N23は、特に限定されず、いくつかの態様において、N60/N23は1.5以上であることが適当であり、好ましくは2.0以上であり、より好ましくは2.5以上であり、さらに好ましくは3.0以上(例えば3.5以上)であり、5.0超(例えば7.0超)であってもよい。N60/N23が大きい補強用フィルムによると、貼付け初期には良好なリワーク性を示し、かつその後の加熱等により粘着力を大きく上昇させることができる。N60/N23の上限は特に限定されず、通常は100以下であり、補強用フィルムの製造容易性や経済性の観点から、30以下でもよく、15以下でもよく、10以下でもよい。いくつかの態様において、N60/N23は、例えば5以下であってよく、3以下でもよく、2以下でもよい。
The ratio of the adhesive force N 60 [gf / 25 mm] to the adhesive force N 23 [gf / 25 mm], that is, the adhesive force increase ratio N 60 / N 23 is not particularly limited, and in some embodiments, the N 60 / N 23 Is 15 or more, preferably 2.0 or more, more preferably 2.5 or more, still more preferably 3.0 or more (for example, 3.5 or more), and 5 It may be more than 0.0 (for example, more than 7.0). According to the reinforcing film having a large N 60 / N 23 , good reworkability is exhibited at the initial stage of application, and the adhesive strength can be greatly increased by subsequent heating or the like. The upper limit of N 60 / N 23 is not particularly limited, and is usually 100 or less. From the viewpoint of ease of manufacturing and economic efficiency of the reinforcing film, it may be 30 or less, 15 or less, or 10 or less. In some embodiments, N 60 / N 23 may be, for example, 5 or less, 3 or less, or 2 or less.
なお、ここに開示される補強用フィルムの加熱後粘着力は、該補強用フィルムの一特性を表すものであって、この補強用フィルムの使用態様を限定するものではない。言い換えると、ここに開示される補強用フィルムの使用態様は、60℃で60分間の加熱を行う態様に限定されず、例えば室温域(通常は20℃~30℃、典型的には23℃~25℃)以上に加熱する処理を特に行わない態様でも使用することができる。かかる使用態様においても長期的に粘着力が上昇し、強固な接合を実現することができる。また、ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、貼付け後の任意のタイミングで30℃超(例えば50~70℃程度)または60℃より高い温度で加熱処理を行うことによって粘着力の上昇を促進することができる。かかる加熱処理における加熱温度は、特に限定されず、作業性、経済性、補強用フィルムの基材や被着体の耐熱性等を考慮して設定することができる。上記加熱温度は、例えば150℃未満であってよく、120℃以下であってもよく、100℃以下でもよく、80℃以下でもよく、70℃以下でもよい。また、上記加熱温度は、例えば40℃以上、45℃以上、50℃以上、55℃以上、60℃以上、または70℃以上とすることができ、80℃以上としてもよく、100℃以上としてもよい。加熱時間は特に限定されず、例えば3時間以下であってよく、1時間以下であってもよく、30分以下でもよく、10分以下でもよい。また、加熱時間は、例えば1分以上であってよく、15分以上でもよく、30分以上でもよく、1時間以上でもよい。あるいは、補強用フィルムや被着体に顕著な熱劣化が生じない限度で、より長期間の加熱処理を行ってもよい。なお、加熱処理は、一度に行ってもよく、複数回に分けて行ってもよい。
The post-heating adhesive force of the reinforcing film disclosed herein represents one characteristic of the reinforcing film, and does not limit the usage mode of the reinforcing film. In other words, the mode of use of the reinforcing film disclosed herein is not limited to the mode of heating at 60 ° C. for 60 minutes, for example, in the room temperature range (usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., typically 23 ° C. to 23 ° C.). It can also be used in a mode in which the treatment of heating to 25 ° C. or higher is not particularly performed. Even in such a usage mode, the adhesive strength is increased in a long period of time, and a strong bond can be realized. Further, the reinforcing film disclosed herein promotes an increase in adhesive strength by performing a heat treatment at an arbitrary timing after application at a temperature higher than 30 ° C (for example, about 50 to 70 ° C) or 60 ° C. be able to. The heating temperature in such a heat treatment is not particularly limited, and can be set in consideration of workability, economy, heat resistance of the base material of the reinforcing film and the adherend, and the like. The heating temperature may be, for example, less than 150 ° C., 120 ° C. or lower, 100 ° C. or lower, 80 ° C. or lower, or 70 ° C. or lower. Further, the heating temperature can be, for example, 40 ° C. or higher, 45 ° C. or higher, 50 ° C. or higher, 55 ° C. or higher, 60 ° C. or higher, or 70 ° C. or higher, 80 ° C. or higher, or 100 ° C. or higher. good. The heating time is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 3 hours or less, 1 hour or less, 30 minutes or less, or 10 minutes or less. The heating time may be, for example, 1 minute or longer, 15 minutes or longer, 30 minutes or longer, or 1 hour or longer. Alternatively, the heat treatment may be performed for a longer period of time as long as the reinforcing film or the adherend is not significantly deteriorated by heat. The heat treatment may be performed at one time or may be performed in a plurality of times.
<基材付き補強用フィルム>
ここに開示される補強用フィルムが基材付き粘着シートの形態である場合、該補強用フィルムの厚さは、例えば1000μm以下であってよく、600μm以下であってもよく、350μm以下でもよく、250μm以下でもよい。補強用フィルムが適用される製品の小型化、軽量化、薄型化等の観点から、いくつかの態様において、補強用フィルムの厚さは、例えば200μm以下であってよく、175μm以下であってもよく、140μm以下でもよく、120μm以下でもよく、100μm以下(例えば100μm未満)でもよい。また、補強用フィルムの厚さは、取扱い性等の観点から、例えば5μm以上であってよく、10μm以上でもよく、15μm以上でもよく、20μm以上でもよく、25μm以上でもよく、30μm以上でもよい。いくつかの態様において、補強用フィルムの厚さは、例えば50μm以上であってよく、60μm以上でもよく、80μm以上でもよく、100μm以上でもよく、120μm以上でもよい。補強用フィルムの厚さの上限は特に限定されない。
なお、補強用フィルムの厚さとは、被着体に貼り付けられる部分の厚さをいう。例えば図1に示す構成の補強用フィルム1では、補強用フィルム1の粘着面21Aから基材10の第二面10Bまでの厚さを指し、剥離ライナー31の厚さは含まない。 <Reinforcing film with base material>
When the reinforcing film disclosed herein is in the form of an adhesive sheet with a base material, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 1000 μm or less, 600 μm or less, or 350 μm or less. It may be 250 μm or less. From the viewpoint of miniaturization, weight reduction, thinning, etc. of the product to which the reinforcing film is applied, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 200 μm or less, even if it is 175 μm or less, in some embodiments. It may be 140 μm or less, 120 μm or less, or 100 μm or less (for example, less than 100 μm). Further, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, 15 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 25 μm or more, or 30 μm or more from the viewpoint of handleability and the like. In some embodiments, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 50 μm or more, 60 μm or more, 80 μm or more, 100 μm or more, or 120 μm or more. The upper limit of the thickness of the reinforcing film is not particularly limited.
The thickness of the reinforcing film means the thickness of the portion to be attached to the adherend. For example, in the reinforcingfilm 1 having the configuration shown in FIG. 1, it refers to the thickness from the adhesive surface 21A of the reinforcing film 1 to the second surface 10B of the base material 10, and does not include the thickness of the release liner 31.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムが基材付き粘着シートの形態である場合、該補強用フィルムの厚さは、例えば1000μm以下であってよく、600μm以下であってもよく、350μm以下でもよく、250μm以下でもよい。補強用フィルムが適用される製品の小型化、軽量化、薄型化等の観点から、いくつかの態様において、補強用フィルムの厚さは、例えば200μm以下であってよく、175μm以下であってもよく、140μm以下でもよく、120μm以下でもよく、100μm以下(例えば100μm未満)でもよい。また、補強用フィルムの厚さは、取扱い性等の観点から、例えば5μm以上であってよく、10μm以上でもよく、15μm以上でもよく、20μm以上でもよく、25μm以上でもよく、30μm以上でもよい。いくつかの態様において、補強用フィルムの厚さは、例えば50μm以上であってよく、60μm以上でもよく、80μm以上でもよく、100μm以上でもよく、120μm以上でもよい。補強用フィルムの厚さの上限は特に限定されない。
なお、補強用フィルムの厚さとは、被着体に貼り付けられる部分の厚さをいう。例えば図1に示す構成の補強用フィルム1では、補強用フィルム1の粘着面21Aから基材10の第二面10Bまでの厚さを指し、剥離ライナー31の厚さは含まない。 <Reinforcing film with base material>
When the reinforcing film disclosed herein is in the form of an adhesive sheet with a base material, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 1000 μm or less, 600 μm or less, or 350 μm or less. It may be 250 μm or less. From the viewpoint of miniaturization, weight reduction, thinning, etc. of the product to which the reinforcing film is applied, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 200 μm or less, even if it is 175 μm or less, in some embodiments. It may be 140 μm or less, 120 μm or less, or 100 μm or less (for example, less than 100 μm). Further, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 5 μm or more, 10 μm or more, 15 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 25 μm or more, or 30 μm or more from the viewpoint of handleability and the like. In some embodiments, the thickness of the reinforcing film may be, for example, 50 μm or more, 60 μm or more, 80 μm or more, 100 μm or more, or 120 μm or more. The upper limit of the thickness of the reinforcing film is not particularly limited.
The thickness of the reinforcing film means the thickness of the portion to be attached to the adherend. For example, in the reinforcing
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、例えば、支持基材の厚さTsが粘着剤層の厚さTaより大きい態様、すなわちTs/Taが1より大きい態様で好適に実施され得る。特に限定するものではないが、Ts/Taは、例えば1.1以上であってよく、1.2以上であってもよく、1.5以上であってもよく、1.7以上であってもよい。例えば、Ts/Taの増大により、補強用フィルムを薄型化しても良好な効果が発揮されやすくなる傾向にある。いくつかの態様において、Ts/Taは、2以上(例えば2より大)であってよく、2.5以上でもよく、2.8以上でもよい。また、Ts/Taは、例えば50以下であってよく、20以下でもよい。補強用フィルムを薄型化しても高い加熱後粘着力を発揮しやすくする観点から、Ts/Taは、例えば10以下であってよく、8以下でもよく、5以下でもよい。
The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be suitably implemented, for example, in an embodiment in which the thickness Ts of the supporting base material is larger than the thickness Ta of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, that is, the Ts / Ta is larger than 1. Although not particularly limited, Ts / Ta may be, for example, 1.1 or more, 1.2 or more, 1.5 or more, or 1.7 or more. May be good. For example, due to the increase in Ts / Ta, there is a tendency that a good effect is easily exhibited even if the reinforcing film is made thinner. In some embodiments, Ts / Ta may be 2 or greater (eg, greater than 2), 2.5 or greater, or 2.8 or greater. Further, Ts / Ta may be, for example, 50 or less, or 20 or less. The Ts / Ta may be, for example, 10 or less, 8 or less, or 5 or less, from the viewpoint of facilitating the high adhesive strength after heating even if the reinforcing film is made thin.
上記粘着剤層は、支持基材に固着していることが好ましい。ここで固着とは、被着体への貼付け後に粘着力が上昇した補強用フィルムにおいて、該補強用フィルムの被着体からの剥離時に粘着剤層と支持基材との界面での剥離が生じない程度に、粘着剤層が支持基材に対して十分な投錨性を示すことをいう。粘着剤層が支持基材に固着している基材付き補強用フィルムによると、被着体と支持基材とを強固に一体化することができる。粘着剤層が基材に固着している補強用フィルムの一好適例として、上述した加熱後粘着力の測定時に、粘着剤層と支持基材との間での剥離(投錨破壊)が生じない補強用フィルムが挙げられる。加熱後粘着力の測定時に投錨破壊が生じない補強用フィルムは、粘着剤層が基材に固着している補強用フィルムに該当する一好適例である。
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is preferably adhered to a supporting base material. Here, "sticking" means that in a reinforcing film whose adhesive strength has increased after being attached to an adherend, peeling occurs at the interface between the adhesive layer and the supporting base material when the reinforcing film is peeled from the adherend. It means that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer exhibits sufficient anchoring property with respect to the supporting base material to the extent that it does not exist. According to the reinforcing film with a base material in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is fixed to the support base material, the adherend and the support base material can be firmly integrated. As a preferred example of the reinforcing film in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is adhered to the base material, peeling (anchor failure) between the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the supporting base material does not occur during the above-mentioned measurement of the adhesive force after heating. Examples include reinforcing films. A reinforcing film in which anchoring failure does not occur when measuring the adhesive force after heating is a suitable example corresponding to a reinforcing film in which the adhesive layer is adhered to a base material.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、例えば、液状の粘着剤組成物を基材の第一面に接触させることと、該第一面上で上記粘着剤組成物を硬化させて粘着剤層を形成することと、をこの順に含む方法により好ましく製造され得る。上記粘着剤組成物の硬化は、該粘着剤組成物の乾燥、架橋、重合、冷却等の一または二以上を伴い得る。このように液状の粘着剤組成物を基材の第一面上で硬化させて粘着剤層を形成する方法によると、硬化後の粘着剤層を基材の第一面に貼り合わせることで該第一面上に粘着剤層を配置する方法に比べて、粘着剤層の基材への投錨性を高めることができる。このことを利用して、粘着剤層が基材に固着した補強用フィルムを好適に製造することができる。
In the reinforcing film disclosed herein, for example, a liquid pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is brought into contact with the first surface of a base material, and the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is cured on the first surface to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. It can be preferably produced by a method including forming and in this order. Curing of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition may involve one or more of drying, cross-linking, polymerization, cooling, etc. of the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition. According to the method of forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer by curing the liquid pressure-sensitive adhesive composition on the first surface of the base material, the cured pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is bonded to the first surface of the base material. Compared with the method of arranging the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the first surface, the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the base material can be enhanced. Utilizing this, a reinforcing film in which the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is adhered to the base material can be suitably manufactured.
いくつかの態様において、基材の第一面に液状の粘着剤組成物を接触させる方法としては、上記粘着剤組成物を基材の第一面に直接塗布する方法を採用することができる。基材の第一面上で硬化させた粘着剤層の第一面(粘着面)を剥離面に当接させることにより、該粘着剤層の第二面が基材の第一面に固着し、かつ該粘着剤層の第一面が剥離面に当接した構成の補強用フィルムを得ることができる。上記剥離面としては、剥離ライナーの表面や、剥離処理された基材背面等を利用し得る。
In some embodiments, as a method of contacting the liquid pressure-sensitive adhesive composition with the first surface of the base material, a method of directly applying the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition to the first surface of the base material can be adopted. By bringing the first surface (adhesive surface) of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer cured on the first surface of the base material into contact with the peeling surface, the second surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is fixed to the first surface of the base material. Moreover, it is possible to obtain a reinforcing film having a structure in which the first surface of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is in contact with the peeling surface. As the peeling surface, the surface of the peeling liner, the back surface of the base material that has been peeled off, or the like can be used.
また、例えば、モノマー原料の部分重合物(ポリマーシロップ)を用いた光硬化型の粘着剤組成物の場合、例えば、該粘着剤組成物を剥離面に塗布した後、その塗布された粘着剤組成物に基材の第一面を被せることで未硬化の上記粘着剤組成物に基材の第一面に接触させ、その状態で、基材の第一面と剥離面との間に挟まれた粘着剤組成物に光照射を行って硬化させることで粘着剤層を形成してもよい。
Further, for example, in the case of a photocurable pressure-sensitive adhesive composition using a partial polymer (polymer syrup) of a monomer raw material, for example, the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied to a peeling surface and then the applied pressure-sensitive adhesive composition is applied. By covering the object with the first surface of the base material, the uncured adhesive composition is brought into contact with the first surface of the base material, and in that state, it is sandwiched between the first surface of the base material and the peeled surface. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be formed by irradiating the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition with light to cure the pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
なお、上記で例示した方法は、ここに開示される補強用フィルムの製造方法を限定するものではない。ここに開示される補強用フィルムの製造にあたっては、基材の第一面に粘着剤層を固着させ得る適宜の方法を、一種を単独でまたは二種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。そのような方法の例には、上述のように液状の粘着剤組成物を基材の第一面上で硬化させて粘着剤層を形成する方法や、基材の第一面に粘着剤層の投錨性を高める表面処理を施す方法等が挙げられる。例えば、基材の第一面に下塗り層を設ける等の手法により粘着剤層の基材への投錨性を十分に向上させ得る場合には、硬化後の粘着剤層を基材の第一面に貼り合わせる方法で補強用フィルムを製造してもよい。また、基材の材質の選択や、粘着剤の組成の選択によっても、粘着剤層の基材への投錨性を向上させ得る。また、基材の第一面上に粘着剤層を有する補強用フィルムに室温より高い温度を適用することにより、該粘着剤層の基材への投錨性を高めることができる。投錨性を高めるために適用する温度は、例えば35℃~80℃程度であってよく、40℃~70℃以上程度でもよく、45℃~60℃程度でもよい。
Note that the method exemplified above does not limit the manufacturing method of the reinforcing film disclosed here. In the production of the reinforcing film disclosed herein, an appropriate method capable of fixing the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the first surface of the base material can be used alone or in combination of two or more. Examples of such methods include a method of curing a liquid pressure-sensitive adhesive composition on the first surface of a substrate to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer as described above, and a method of forming a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the first surface of a substrate. Examples thereof include a method of applying a surface treatment that enhances the anchoring property. For example, when the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the base material can be sufficiently improved by a method such as providing an undercoat layer on the first surface of the base material, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer after curing is used as the first surface of the base material. A reinforcing film may be manufactured by a method of adhering to. Further, the anchorability of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to the base material can be improved by selecting the material of the base material and the composition of the pressure-sensitive adhesive. Further, by applying a temperature higher than room temperature to the reinforcing film having the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the first surface of the base material, the anchoring property of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer on the base material can be enhanced. The temperature applied to enhance the anchoring property may be, for example, about 35 ° C. to 80 ° C., 40 ° C. to 70 ° C. or higher, or 45 ° C. to 60 ° C.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムが、基材の第一面に設けられた第一粘着剤層と、該基材の第二面に設けられた第二粘着剤層を有する粘着シート(すなわち、両面接着性の基材付き粘着シート)の形態である場合、第一粘着剤層と第二粘着剤層とは、同一の構成であってもよく、異なる構成であってもよい。第一粘着剤層と第二粘着剤層との構成が異なる場合、その相違は、例えば、組成の違いや構造(厚さ、表面粗さ、形成範囲、形成パターン等)の違いであり得る。例えば、第二粘着剤層は、ポリマー(B)を含有しない粘着剤層であってもよい。また、第二粘着剤層の表面(第二粘着面)は、23℃での表面弾性率が1~20kPaの範囲外(例えば20kPa超)であってもよく、30kPa以上でもよい。
The reinforcing film disclosed herein is a pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet having a first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer provided on the first surface of the base material and a second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer provided on the second surface of the base material (that is,). In the form of a double-sided adhesive base-attached pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet), the first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may have the same configuration or different configurations. When the composition of the first pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is different, the difference may be, for example, a difference in composition or a difference in structure (thickness, surface roughness, formation range, formation pattern, etc.). For example, the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer that does not contain the polymer (B). Further, the surface of the second pressure-sensitive adhesive layer (second pressure-sensitive adhesive surface) may have a surface elastic modulus outside the range of 1 to 20 kPa (for example, more than 20 kPa) at 23 ° C., or may be 30 kPa or more.
<剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルム>
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、粘着剤層の表面(粘着面)を剥離ライナーの剥離面に当接させた粘着製品の形態をとり得る。したがって、この明細書により、ここに開示されるいずれかの補強用フィルムと、該補強用フィルムの粘着面に当接する剥離面を有する剥離ライナーと、を含む剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルムが提供され得る。 <Reinforcing film with release liner>
The reinforcing film disclosed herein may take the form of an adhesive product in which the surface (adhesive surface) of the adhesive layer is brought into contact with the release surface of the release liner. Accordingly, this specification may provide a reinforcing film with a release liner comprising any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein and a release liner having a release surface that abuts on the adhesive surface of the reinforcement film. ..
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、粘着剤層の表面(粘着面)を剥離ライナーの剥離面に当接させた粘着製品の形態をとり得る。したがって、この明細書により、ここに開示されるいずれかの補強用フィルムと、該補強用フィルムの粘着面に当接する剥離面を有する剥離ライナーと、を含む剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルムが提供され得る。 <Reinforcing film with release liner>
The reinforcing film disclosed herein may take the form of an adhesive product in which the surface (adhesive surface) of the adhesive layer is brought into contact with the release surface of the release liner. Accordingly, this specification may provide a reinforcing film with a release liner comprising any of the reinforcing films disclosed herein and a release liner having a release surface that abuts on the adhesive surface of the reinforcement film. ..
剥離ライナーの厚さは、特に限定されないが、通常は5μm~200μm程度が適当である。剥離ライナーの厚さが上記範囲内にあると、粘着剤層への貼り合わせ作業性と粘着剤層からの剥離作業性に優れるため、好ましい。いくつかの態様において、剥離ライナーの厚さは、例えば10μm以上であってよく、20μm以上でもよく、30μm以上でもよく、40μm以上でもよい。また、剥離ライナーの厚さは、粘着剤層からの剥離を容易化する観点から、例えば100μm以下であってよく、80μm以下でもよい。剥離ライナーには、必要に応じて、塗布型、練り込み型、蒸着型等の、公知の帯電防止処理が施されていてもよい。
The thickness of the release liner is not particularly limited, but is usually about 5 μm to 200 μm. When the thickness of the release liner is within the above range, it is preferable because it is excellent in the workability of bonding to the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer and the workability of peeling off from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. In some embodiments, the thickness of the release liner may be, for example, 10 μm or more, 20 μm or more, 30 μm or more, or 40 μm or more. Further, the thickness of the release liner may be, for example, 100 μm or less, or 80 μm or less, from the viewpoint of facilitating the release from the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. If necessary, the release liner may be subjected to a known antistatic treatment such as a coating type, a kneading type, and a thin-film deposition type.
剥離ライナーとしては、特に限定されず、例えば、樹脂フィルムや紙(ポリエチレン等の樹脂がラミネートされた紙であり得る。)等のライナー基材の表面に剥離層を有する剥離ライナーや、フッ素系ポリマー(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン等)やポリオレフィン系樹脂(ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン等)のような低接着性材料により形成された樹脂フィルムからなる剥離ライナー等を用いることができる。表面平滑性に優れることから、ライナー基材としての樹脂フィルムの表面に剥離層を有する剥離ライナーや、低接着性材料により形成された樹脂フィルムからなる剥離ライナーを好ましく採用し得る。樹脂フィルムとしては、粘着剤層を保護し得るフィルムであれば特に限定されず、例えば、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、ポリブテンフィルム、ポリブタジエンフィルム、ポリメチルペンテンフィルム、ポリ塩化ビニルフィルム、塩化ビニル共重合体フィルム、ポリエステルフィルム(PETフィルム、PBTフィルム等)、ポリウレタンフィルム、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体フィルムなどが挙げられる。上記剥離層の形成には、例えば、シリコーン系剥離処理剤、長鎖アルキル系剥離処理剤、オレフィン系剥離処理剤、フッ素系剥離処理剤、脂肪酸アミド系剥離処理剤、硫化モリブデン、シリカ粉等の、公知の剥離処理剤を用いることができる。シリコーン系剥離処理剤の使用が特に好ましい。
The release liner is not particularly limited, and is, for example, a release liner having a release layer on the surface of a liner base material such as a resin film or paper (paper on which a resin such as polyethylene is laminated) or a fluoropolymer. A release liner made of a resin film formed of a low adhesive material such as (polytetrafluoroethylene, etc.) or a polyolefin resin (polyethylene, polypropylene, etc.) can be used. Since the surface smoothness is excellent, a release liner having a release layer on the surface of the resin film as a liner base material or a release liner made of a resin film formed of a low adhesive material can be preferably adopted. The resin film is not particularly limited as long as it can protect the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, and is, for example, a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polybutene film, a polybutadiene film, a polymethylpentene film, a polyvinyl chloride film, or a vinyl chloride copolymer. Examples thereof include films, polyester films (PET films, PBT films, etc.), polyurethane films, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer films, and the like. For forming the peeling layer, for example, a silicone-based stripping agent, a long-chain alkyl-based stripping agent, an olefin-based stripping agent, a fluorine-based stripping agent, a fatty acid amide-based stripping agent, molybdenum sulfide, silica powder, or the like can be used. , A known stripping agent can be used. The use of a silicone-based stripping agent is particularly preferred.
剥離層の厚さは特に制限されないが、通常は0.01μm~1μm程度が適当であり、0.1μm~1μm程度が好ましい。剥離層の形成方法は特に限定されず、使用する剥離処理剤の種類等に応じた公知の方法を適宜採用することができる。
The thickness of the peeling layer is not particularly limited, but usually about 0.01 μm to 1 μm is appropriate, and about 0.1 μm to 1 μm is preferable. The method for forming the release layer is not particularly limited, and a known method according to the type of the release treatment agent to be used can be appropriately adopted.
<用途>
この明細書により提供される補強用フィルムは、例えば、被着体に貼り合わせた初期においては良好なリワーク性を発揮することが可能なので、歩留り低下の抑制や該補強用フィルムを含む製品の高品質化に貢献し得る。そして、上記補強用フィルムは、被着体に貼り付けた後、エージングや加熱により粘着力を大きく上昇させることができる。例えば、被着体への貼付け後の適当なタイミングで加熱することにより、補強用フィルムを被着体に強固に接着させることができる。このような特徴を活かして、ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、種々の分野において、各種製品に含まれる部材の補強目的で好ましく用いられ得る。 <Use>
The reinforcing film provided by this specification can exhibit good reworkability at the initial stage of being attached to the adherend, for example, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in yield and to increase the height of the product containing the reinforcing film. Can contribute to quality improvement. Then, after the reinforcing film is attached to the adherend, the adhesive strength can be greatly increased by aging or heating. For example, the reinforcing film can be firmly adhered to the adherend by heating at an appropriate timing after being attached to the adherend. Taking advantage of these characteristics, the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably used for the purpose of reinforcing members contained in various products in various fields.
この明細書により提供される補強用フィルムは、例えば、被着体に貼り合わせた初期においては良好なリワーク性を発揮することが可能なので、歩留り低下の抑制や該補強用フィルムを含む製品の高品質化に貢献し得る。そして、上記補強用フィルムは、被着体に貼り付けた後、エージングや加熱により粘着力を大きく上昇させることができる。例えば、被着体への貼付け後の適当なタイミングで加熱することにより、補強用フィルムを被着体に強固に接着させることができる。このような特徴を活かして、ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、種々の分野において、各種製品に含まれる部材の補強目的で好ましく用いられ得る。 <Use>
The reinforcing film provided by this specification can exhibit good reworkability at the initial stage of being attached to the adherend, for example, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in yield and to increase the height of the product containing the reinforcing film. Can contribute to quality improvement. Then, after the reinforcing film is attached to the adherend, the adhesive strength can be greatly increased by aging or heating. For example, the reinforcing film can be firmly adhered to the adherend by heating at an appropriate timing after being attached to the adherend. Taking advantage of these characteristics, the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably used for the purpose of reinforcing members contained in various products in various fields.
ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、例えば、第一面および第二面を有するフィルム状基材の少なくとも第一面に粘着剤層が設けられた基材付き粘着シートの形態で、被着体に貼り付けられて該被着体を補強する補強フィルムとして好ましく用いられ得る。かかる補強フィルムにおいて、上記フィルム基材としては、樹脂フィルムをベースフィルムとして含むものを好ましく使用し得る。また、補強性能を高める観点から、上記粘着剤層はフィルム状基材の第一面に固着していることが好ましい。
例えば、光学製品に用いられる光学部材や、電子製品に用いられる電子部材では、高度な集積化、小型軽量化、薄型化が進行しており、線膨張係数や厚みの異なる複数の薄い光学部材/電子部材が積層され得る。このような部材に上記のような補強フィルムを貼り付けることにより、上記光学部材/電子部材に適度な剛性を付与することができる。これにより、製造プロセスおよび/または製造後の製品において、上記線膨張係数や厚みの異なる複数の部材間に発生し得る応力に起因するカールや湾曲を抑制することができる。
また、光学製品/電子製品の製造プロセスにおいて、上述のように薄い光学部材/電子部材に切断加工等の形状加工処理を行う局面において、該部材に補強フィルムを貼り付けて処理することにより、加工に伴う光学部材/電子部材への局所的な応力集中を緩和し、クラック、割れ、積層部材の剥がれなどのリスクを低減することができる。光学部材/電子部材に補強部材を貼り付けて取り扱うことは、該部材の搬送、積層、回転等の際における局所的な応力集中の緩和や、該部材の自重による折れや湾曲の抑制等にも役立ち得る。
さらに、上記補強フィルムを含む光学製品や電子製品等のデバイスは、市場において消費者に使用される段階において、該デバイスが落下した場合、重量物の下に置かれた場合、飛来物が衝突した場合等、非意図的な応力が付与された場合にも、該デバイスに補強フィルムが含まれていることにより、デバイスにかかるストレスを緩和することができる。したがって、上記デバイスに補強フィルムが含まれることにより、該デバイスの耐久性を向上させ得る。 The reinforcing film disclosed herein is, for example, an adherend in the form of an adhesive sheet with a substrate having an adhesive layer provided on at least the first surface of a film-like substrate having a first surface and a second surface. It can be preferably used as a reinforcing film which is attached to and reinforces the adherend. In such a reinforcing film, as the film base material, a film containing a resin film as a base film can be preferably used. Further, from the viewpoint of enhancing the reinforcing performance, it is preferable that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is adhered to the first surface of the film-like substrate.
For example, in optical members used in optical products and electronic members used in electronic products, advanced integration, miniaturization, weight reduction, and thinning are progressing, and a plurality of thin optical members having different linear expansion coefficients and thicknesses / Electronic members can be stacked. By attaching the reinforcing film as described above to such a member, it is possible to impart appropriate rigidity to the optical member / electronic member. Thereby, in the manufacturing process and / or the product after manufacturing, it is possible to suppress curl and bending caused by the stress that may occur between the plurality of members having different linear expansion coefficients and thicknesses.
Further, in the manufacturing process of optical products / electronic products, in the aspect of performing shape processing such as cutting on a thin optical member / electronic member as described above, processing is performed by attaching a reinforcing film to the member. It is possible to alleviate the local stress concentration on the optical member / electronic member and reduce the risk of cracks, cracks, peeling of laminated members, and the like. Handling a reinforcing member by attaching it to an optical member / electronic member also reduces local stress concentration during transportation, stacking, rotation, etc. of the member, and suppresses bending or bending due to the weight of the member. Can be useful.
Furthermore, devices such as optical products and electronic products containing the above-mentioned reinforcing film collide with flying objects when the device is dropped or placed under a heavy object at the stage of being used by consumers in the market. Even when unintentional stress is applied, such as in the case, the stress applied to the device can be relieved by including the reinforcing film in the device. Therefore, the inclusion of the reinforcing film in the device can improve the durability of the device.
例えば、光学製品に用いられる光学部材や、電子製品に用いられる電子部材では、高度な集積化、小型軽量化、薄型化が進行しており、線膨張係数や厚みの異なる複数の薄い光学部材/電子部材が積層され得る。このような部材に上記のような補強フィルムを貼り付けることにより、上記光学部材/電子部材に適度な剛性を付与することができる。これにより、製造プロセスおよび/または製造後の製品において、上記線膨張係数や厚みの異なる複数の部材間に発生し得る応力に起因するカールや湾曲を抑制することができる。
また、光学製品/電子製品の製造プロセスにおいて、上述のように薄い光学部材/電子部材に切断加工等の形状加工処理を行う局面において、該部材に補強フィルムを貼り付けて処理することにより、加工に伴う光学部材/電子部材への局所的な応力集中を緩和し、クラック、割れ、積層部材の剥がれなどのリスクを低減することができる。光学部材/電子部材に補強部材を貼り付けて取り扱うことは、該部材の搬送、積層、回転等の際における局所的な応力集中の緩和や、該部材の自重による折れや湾曲の抑制等にも役立ち得る。
さらに、上記補強フィルムを含む光学製品や電子製品等のデバイスは、市場において消費者に使用される段階において、該デバイスが落下した場合、重量物の下に置かれた場合、飛来物が衝突した場合等、非意図的な応力が付与された場合にも、該デバイスに補強フィルムが含まれていることにより、デバイスにかかるストレスを緩和することができる。したがって、上記デバイスに補強フィルムが含まれることにより、該デバイスの耐久性を向上させ得る。 The reinforcing film disclosed herein is, for example, an adherend in the form of an adhesive sheet with a substrate having an adhesive layer provided on at least the first surface of a film-like substrate having a first surface and a second surface. It can be preferably used as a reinforcing film which is attached to and reinforces the adherend. In such a reinforcing film, as the film base material, a film containing a resin film as a base film can be preferably used. Further, from the viewpoint of enhancing the reinforcing performance, it is preferable that the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is adhered to the first surface of the film-like substrate.
For example, in optical members used in optical products and electronic members used in electronic products, advanced integration, miniaturization, weight reduction, and thinning are progressing, and a plurality of thin optical members having different linear expansion coefficients and thicknesses / Electronic members can be stacked. By attaching the reinforcing film as described above to such a member, it is possible to impart appropriate rigidity to the optical member / electronic member. Thereby, in the manufacturing process and / or the product after manufacturing, it is possible to suppress curl and bending caused by the stress that may occur between the plurality of members having different linear expansion coefficients and thicknesses.
Further, in the manufacturing process of optical products / electronic products, in the aspect of performing shape processing such as cutting on a thin optical member / electronic member as described above, processing is performed by attaching a reinforcing film to the member. It is possible to alleviate the local stress concentration on the optical member / electronic member and reduce the risk of cracks, cracks, peeling of laminated members, and the like. Handling a reinforcing member by attaching it to an optical member / electronic member also reduces local stress concentration during transportation, stacking, rotation, etc. of the member, and suppresses bending or bending due to the weight of the member. Can be useful.
Furthermore, devices such as optical products and electronic products containing the above-mentioned reinforcing film collide with flying objects when the device is dropped or placed under a heavy object at the stage of being used by consumers in the market. Even when unintentional stress is applied, such as in the case, the stress applied to the device can be relieved by including the reinforcing film in the device. Therefore, the inclusion of the reinforcing film in the device can improve the durability of the device.
また、ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、例えば各種の携帯機器(ポータブル機器)を構成する部材に貼り付けられる態様で好ましく用いられ得る。ここで「携帯」とは、単に携帯することが可能であるだけでは充分ではなく、個人(標準的な成人)が相対的に容易に持ち運び可能なレベルの携帯性を有することを意味するものとする。また、ここでいう携帯機器の例には、携帯電話、スマートフォン、タブレット型パソコン、ノート型パソコン、各種ウェアラブル機器、デジタルカメラ、デジタルビデオカメラ、音響機器(携帯音楽プレーヤー、ICレコーダー等)、計算機(電卓等)、携帯ゲーム機器、電子辞書、電子手帳、電子書籍、車載用情報機器、携帯ラジオ、携帯テレビ、携帯プリンター、携帯スキャナ、携帯モデム等の携帯電子機器の他、機械式の腕時計や懐中時計、懐中電灯、手鏡等が含まれ得る。上記携帯電子機器を構成する部材の例には、液晶ディスプレイ等の薄層ディスプイやフィルム型ディスプレイ等のような画像表示装置に用いられる光学フィルムや表示パネル等が含まれ得る。ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、自動車、家電製品等における各種部材に貼り付けられる態様でも好ましく用いられ得る。
Further, the reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably used, for example, in a manner of being attached to a member constituting various portable devices (portable devices). Here, "portable" means that it is not enough to be portable, but that an individual (standard adult) has a level of portability that is relatively easy to carry. do. Examples of portable devices here include mobile phones, smartphones, tablet PCs, notebook PCs, various wearable devices, digital cameras, digital video cameras, sound devices (portable music players, IC recorders, etc.), and calculators (portable music players, IC recorders, etc.). Calculators, etc.), mobile game devices, electronic dictionaries, electronic notebooks, electronic books, in-vehicle information devices, mobile radios, mobile TVs, mobile printers, mobile scanners, mobile modems and other portable electronic devices, as well as mechanical watches and pocketbooks. Clocks, flashlights, hand mirrors, etc. may be included. Examples of the members constituting the portable electronic device may include an optical film or a display panel used for an image display device such as a thin layer display such as a liquid crystal display or a film type display. The reinforcing film disclosed herein can also be preferably used in a mode of being attached to various members in automobiles, home appliances and the like.
また、ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を有するので、その特長を生かして、屈曲可能な要素(例えば、フレキシブルディスプレイ等のフレキシブルデバイス。ローラブルデバイスやフォルダブルデバイスとも称され得る。)を備えた機器を構成する部材に貼り付けられる態様で好ましく用いられ得る。そのような機器として、例えば上述の各種の携帯機器(ポータブル機器)が挙げられる。上記携帯電子機器を構成する部材の例には、液晶ディスプレイや有機EL(エレクトロルミネッセンス)ディスプレイ等の画像表示装置に用いられる光学フィルムや表示パネル等が含まれ得る。ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、このような携帯電子機器において、該機器を構成する部材(典型的には、フレキシブルデバイスまたはフォルダブルデバイスと称される画像表示装置等)の補強用途に好ましく用いられ得る。
Further, since the reinforcing film disclosed herein has bending recovery and bending holding force, it is possible to take advantage of its features to bendable elements (for example, flexible devices such as flexible displays, rollable devices and foldable devices). It can also be preferably used in a manner of being attached to a member constituting a device provided with). Examples of such a device include the above-mentioned various portable devices (portable devices). Examples of the members constituting the portable electronic device may include an optical film, a display panel, or the like used in an image display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display. The reinforcing film disclosed herein is preferable for reinforcing applications of members constituting the device (typically, an image display device referred to as a flexible device or a foldable device) in such a portable electronic device. Can be used.
また、ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、例えば、液晶ディスプレイパネル、プラズマディスプレイパネル(PDP)、有機ELディスプレイ等の構成要素として用いられる光学部材の製造時、搬送時等に該光学部材を補強する用途に好適である。液晶ディスプレイパネル用の偏光板(偏光フィルム)、波長板、位相差板、光学補償フィルム、輝度向上フィルム、光拡散シート、反射シート等の光学部材に適用される補強用フィルムとして有用である。
Further, the reinforcing film disclosed herein reinforces the optical member used as a component of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, a plasma display panel (PDP), an organic EL display, etc., at the time of manufacturing, transporting, or the like. Suitable for applications. It is useful as a reinforcing film applied to optical members such as polarizing plates (polarizing films) for liquid crystal display panels, wave plates, retardation plates, optical compensation films, brightness improving films, light diffusing sheets, and reflective sheets.
なお、ここに開示される補強用フィルムの用途としては、特に限定されず、剛性や耐衝撃性の付与等を目的とする各種用途に利用され得る。ここに開示される補強用フィルムは、上記のようにフレキシブルデバイス用途に好ましく用いることができるだけでなく、フレキシブルデバイスを含まない他の用途に用いることができる。補強用フィルムが屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力を有することは、当該補強用フィルムの適用範囲の制限が少ないことを意味し、このことの実用上の利点は大きい。
The use of the reinforcing film disclosed herein is not particularly limited, and can be used for various purposes such as imparting rigidity and impact resistance. The reinforcing film disclosed herein can be preferably used not only for flexible device applications as described above, but also for other applications that do not include flexible devices. The fact that the reinforcing film has bending recovery and bending holding force means that the range of application of the reinforcing film is not limited, and this has a great practical advantage.
以下、本発明に関するいくつかの実施例を説明するが、本発明をかかる具体例に示すものに限定することを意図したものではない。なお、以下の説明中の「部」および「%」は、特に断りがない限り重量基準である。
Hereinafter, some examples of the present invention will be described, but the present invention is not intended to be limited to those shown in such specific examples. In addition, "part" and "%" in the following description are based on weight unless otherwise specified.
[ポリマー(A)の合成]
(合成例A1)
撹拌羽根、温度計、窒素ガス導入管および冷却器を備えた四つ口フラスコに、アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル(2EHA)90.2部、アクリル酸4-ヒドロキシブチル(4HBA)8.6部、N-アクリロイルモルホリン(ACMO)1.2部、重合開始剤として2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(AIBN)0.2 部、および重合溶媒として酢酸エチルを仕込み、緩やかに攪拌しながら窒素ガスを導入し、フラスコ内の液温を65℃ 付近に保って6時間重合反応を行い、ポリマー濃度が35%のアクリル系ポリマーA1溶液を調製した。アクリル系ポリマーA1の重量平均分子量(Mw)は54万であった。 [Synthesis of polymer (A)]
(Synthesis Example A1)
In a four-necked flask equipped with a stirring blade, a thermometer, a nitrogen gas inlet tube and a cooler, 90.2 parts of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), 8.6 parts of 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate (4HBA), N. -Acryloylmorpholine (ACMO) 1.2 parts, 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) 0.2 parts as a polymerization initiator, and ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent are charged, and nitrogen gas is gently stirred. Was introduced, and the polymerization reaction was carried out for 6 hours while keeping the liquid temperature in the flask at around 65 ° C. to prepare an acrylic polymer A1 solution having a polymer concentration of 35%. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic polymer A1 was 540,000.
(合成例A1)
撹拌羽根、温度計、窒素ガス導入管および冷却器を備えた四つ口フラスコに、アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル(2EHA)90.2部、アクリル酸4-ヒドロキシブチル(4HBA)8.6部、N-アクリロイルモルホリン(ACMO)1.2部、重合開始剤として2,2’-アゾビスイソブチロニトリル(AIBN)0.2 部、および重合溶媒として酢酸エチルを仕込み、緩やかに攪拌しながら窒素ガスを導入し、フラスコ内の液温を65℃ 付近に保って6時間重合反応を行い、ポリマー濃度が35%のアクリル系ポリマーA1溶液を調製した。アクリル系ポリマーA1の重量平均分子量(Mw)は54万であった。 [Synthesis of polymer (A)]
(Synthesis Example A1)
In a four-necked flask equipped with a stirring blade, a thermometer, a nitrogen gas inlet tube and a cooler, 90.2 parts of 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA), 8.6 parts of 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate (4HBA), N. -Acryloylmorpholine (ACMO) 1.2 parts, 2,2'-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) 0.2 parts as a polymerization initiator, and ethyl acetate as a polymerization solvent are charged, and nitrogen gas is gently stirred. Was introduced, and the polymerization reaction was carried out for 6 hours while keeping the liquid temperature in the flask at around 65 ° C. to prepare an acrylic polymer A1 solution having a polymer concentration of 35%. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic polymer A1 was 540,000.
(合成例A2)
モノマー組成を、2EHA/4HBA/ACMO/アクリル酸ブチル(BA)=86.1部/9.7部/1.8部/2.4部に変更した他は合成例A1と同様にして溶液重合を行うことにより、アクリル系ポリマーA2の溶液を得た。 (Synthesis Example A2)
Solution polymerization in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 except that the monomer composition was changed to 2EHA / 4HBA / ACMO / butyl acrylate (BA) = 86.1 parts / 9.7 parts / 1.8 parts / 2.4 parts. A solution of the acrylic polymer A2 was obtained.
モノマー組成を、2EHA/4HBA/ACMO/アクリル酸ブチル(BA)=86.1部/9.7部/1.8部/2.4部に変更した他は合成例A1と同様にして溶液重合を行うことにより、アクリル系ポリマーA2の溶液を得た。 (Synthesis Example A2)
Solution polymerization in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 except that the monomer composition was changed to 2EHA / 4HBA / ACMO / butyl acrylate (BA) = 86.1 parts / 9.7 parts / 1.8 parts / 2.4 parts. A solution of the acrylic polymer A2 was obtained.
(合成例A3)
モノマー組成を、BA/4HBA=96部/4部に変更した他は合成例A1と同様にして溶液重合を行うことにより、アクリル系ポリマーA3の溶液を得た。 (Synthesis Example A3)
A solution of the acrylic polymer A3 was obtained by performing solution polymerization in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 except that the monomer composition was changed to BA / 4HBA = 96 parts / 4 parts.
モノマー組成を、BA/4HBA=96部/4部に変更した他は合成例A1と同様にして溶液重合を行うことにより、アクリル系ポリマーA3の溶液を得た。 (Synthesis Example A3)
A solution of the acrylic polymer A3 was obtained by performing solution polymerization in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1 except that the monomer composition was changed to BA / 4HBA = 96 parts / 4 parts.
(合成例A4)
モノマー組成を、2EHA/アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル(HEA)/メタクリル酸メチル(MMA)/N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン(NVP)=65部/15部/7部/13部に変更した他は合成例A1と同様にして溶液重合を行うことにより、アクリル系ポリマーA4の溶液を得た。 (Synthesis Example A4)
Other than changing the monomer composition to 2EHA / 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA) / methyl methacrylate (MMA) / N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP) = 65 parts / 15 parts / 7 parts / 13 parts A solution of the acrylic polymer A4 was obtained by performing solution polymerization in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1.
モノマー組成を、2EHA/アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル(HEA)/メタクリル酸メチル(MMA)/N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン(NVP)=65部/15部/7部/13部に変更した他は合成例A1と同様にして溶液重合を行うことにより、アクリル系ポリマーA4の溶液を得た。 (Synthesis Example A4)
Other than changing the monomer composition to 2EHA / 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA) / methyl methacrylate (MMA) / N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP) = 65 parts / 15 parts / 7 parts / 13 parts A solution of the acrylic polymer A4 was obtained by performing solution polymerization in the same manner as in Synthesis Example A1.
[ポリマー(B)の合成]
(合成例B1)
酢酸エチル101.15部、MMA40部、n-ブチルメタクリレート(nBMA)20部、2-エチルヘキシルメタクリレート(2EHMA)20部、官能基当量が900g/molのポリオルガノシロキサン骨格含有メタクリレートモノマー(商品名:X-22-174ASX、信越化学工業社製)8.7部、官能基当量が4600g/molのポリオルガノシロキサン骨格含有メタクリレートモノマー(商品名:KF-2012、信越化学工業社製)11.3部、および連鎖移動剤としてチオグリセロール0.8部を、撹拌羽根、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、冷却器および滴下ロートを備えた4つ口フラスコに投入した。そして、70℃にて窒素雰囲気下で30分撹拌した後、熱重合開始剤としてAIBN0.2部を投入し、70℃で3時間反応させた。続いて80℃にて30分撹拌した後、AIBN0.1部をさらに投入し、80℃で2時間反応させた。その後、AIBN0.05部をさらに投入し、80℃で2時間反応させ、ポリマーB1を得た。得られたポリマーB1のMwは20000であり、Tg(TB)は-13.8℃であった。 [Synthesis of polymer (B)]
(Synthesis Example B1)
101.15 parts of ethyl acetate, 40 parts of MMA, 20 parts of n-butyl methacrylate (nBMA), 20 parts of 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (2EHMA), and a polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer having a functional group equivalent of 900 g / mol (trade name: X). -22-174ASX, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 8.7 parts, polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer having a functional group equivalent of 4600 g / mol (trade name: KF-2012, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 11.3 parts, And 0.8 part of thioglycerol as a chain transfer agent was put into a four-necked flask equipped with a stirring blade, a thermometer, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a cooler and a dropping funnel. Then, after stirring at 70 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere for 30 minutes, 0.2 part of AIBN was added as a thermal polymerization initiator and reacted at 70 ° C. for 3 hours. Subsequently, after stirring at 80 ° C. for 30 minutes, 0.1 part of AIBN was further added and reacted at 80 ° C. for 2 hours. Then, 0.05 part of AIBN was further added and reacted at 80 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain polymer B1. The Mw of the obtained polymer B1 was 20000, and the Tg ( TB ) was -13.8 ° C.
(合成例B1)
酢酸エチル101.15部、MMA40部、n-ブチルメタクリレート(nBMA)20部、2-エチルヘキシルメタクリレート(2EHMA)20部、官能基当量が900g/molのポリオルガノシロキサン骨格含有メタクリレートモノマー(商品名:X-22-174ASX、信越化学工業社製)8.7部、官能基当量が4600g/molのポリオルガノシロキサン骨格含有メタクリレートモノマー(商品名:KF-2012、信越化学工業社製)11.3部、および連鎖移動剤としてチオグリセロール0.8部を、撹拌羽根、温度計、窒素ガス導入管、冷却器および滴下ロートを備えた4つ口フラスコに投入した。そして、70℃にて窒素雰囲気下で30分撹拌した後、熱重合開始剤としてAIBN0.2部を投入し、70℃で3時間反応させた。続いて80℃にて30分撹拌した後、AIBN0.1部をさらに投入し、80℃で2時間反応させた。その後、AIBN0.05部をさらに投入し、80℃で2時間反応させ、ポリマーB1を得た。得られたポリマーB1のMwは20000であり、Tg(TB)は-13.8℃であった。 [Synthesis of polymer (B)]
(Synthesis Example B1)
101.15 parts of ethyl acetate, 40 parts of MMA, 20 parts of n-butyl methacrylate (nBMA), 20 parts of 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (2EHMA), and a polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer having a functional group equivalent of 900 g / mol (trade name: X). -22-174ASX, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 8.7 parts, polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer having a functional group equivalent of 4600 g / mol (trade name: KF-2012, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 11.3 parts, And 0.8 part of thioglycerol as a chain transfer agent was put into a four-necked flask equipped with a stirring blade, a thermometer, a nitrogen gas introduction tube, a cooler and a dropping funnel. Then, after stirring at 70 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere for 30 minutes, 0.2 part of AIBN was added as a thermal polymerization initiator and reacted at 70 ° C. for 3 hours. Subsequently, after stirring at 80 ° C. for 30 minutes, 0.1 part of AIBN was further added and reacted at 80 ° C. for 2 hours. Then, 0.05 part of AIBN was further added and reacted at 80 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain polymer B1. The Mw of the obtained polymer B1 was 20000, and the Tg ( TB ) was -13.8 ° C.
(合成例B2~B6)
モノマー成分の組成を表1に示すように変更した他は、ポリマーB1の調製と同様にしてポリマーB2~B6を調製した。各ポリマーのTg(TB)は、ポリマーB2が-8.4℃、ポリマーB3が-7.2℃、ポリマーB4が-0.6℃、ポリマーB5が-25.1℃、ポリマーB6が9.4℃であった。表1中、MMAはメチルメタクリレート(Tg105℃)を、nBMAはn-ブチルメタクリレート(Tg20℃)を、2EHMAは2-エチルヘキシルメタクリレート(Tg-10℃)を、iBMAはイソブチルメタクリレート(Tg48℃)を、CHMAはシクロヘキシルメタクリレート(Tg66℃)を、X-22-174ASXはポリオルガノシロキサン骨格含有メタクリレートモノマー(商品名:X-22-174ASX、信越化学工業社製、官能基当量900g/mol)を、KF-2012はポリオルガノシロキサン骨格含有メタクリレートモノマー(商品名:KF-2012、信越化学工業社製、官能基当量4600g/mol)を、それぞれ表す。 (Synthesis Examples B2 to B6)
Polymers B2 to B6 were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of polymer B1, except that the composition of the monomer components was changed as shown in Table 1. The Tg ( TB ) of each polymer is -8.4 ° C for polymer B2, -7.2 ° C for polymer B3, -0.6 ° C for polymer B4, -25.1 ° C for polymer B5, and 9 for polymer B6. It was 0.4 ° C. In Table 1, MMA is methyl methacrylate (Tg 105 ° C.), nBMA is n-butyl methacrylate (Tg 20 ° C.), 2EHMA is 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (Tg-10 ° C.), and iBMA is isobutyl methacrylate (Tg 48 ° C.). CHMA is cyclohexyl methacrylate (Tg66 ° C.), X-22-174ASX is a polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer (trade name: X-22-174ASX, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., functional group equivalent 900 g / mol), KF- 2012 represents a polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer (trade name: KF-2012, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., functional group equivalent of 4600 g / mol).
モノマー成分の組成を表1に示すように変更した他は、ポリマーB1の調製と同様にしてポリマーB2~B6を調製した。各ポリマーのTg(TB)は、ポリマーB2が-8.4℃、ポリマーB3が-7.2℃、ポリマーB4が-0.6℃、ポリマーB5が-25.1℃、ポリマーB6が9.4℃であった。表1中、MMAはメチルメタクリレート(Tg105℃)を、nBMAはn-ブチルメタクリレート(Tg20℃)を、2EHMAは2-エチルヘキシルメタクリレート(Tg-10℃)を、iBMAはイソブチルメタクリレート(Tg48℃)を、CHMAはシクロヘキシルメタクリレート(Tg66℃)を、X-22-174ASXはポリオルガノシロキサン骨格含有メタクリレートモノマー(商品名:X-22-174ASX、信越化学工業社製、官能基当量900g/mol)を、KF-2012はポリオルガノシロキサン骨格含有メタクリレートモノマー(商品名:KF-2012、信越化学工業社製、官能基当量4600g/mol)を、それぞれ表す。 (Synthesis Examples B2 to B6)
Polymers B2 to B6 were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of polymer B1, except that the composition of the monomer components was changed as shown in Table 1. The Tg ( TB ) of each polymer is -8.4 ° C for polymer B2, -7.2 ° C for polymer B3, -0.6 ° C for polymer B4, -25.1 ° C for polymer B5, and 9 for polymer B6. It was 0.4 ° C. In Table 1, MMA is methyl methacrylate (Tg 105 ° C.), nBMA is n-butyl methacrylate (Tg 20 ° C.), 2EHMA is 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate (Tg-10 ° C.), and iBMA is isobutyl methacrylate (Tg 48 ° C.). CHMA is cyclohexyl methacrylate (Tg66 ° C.), X-22-174ASX is a polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer (trade name: X-22-174ASX, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., functional group equivalent 900 g / mol), KF- 2012 represents a polyorganosiloxane skeleton-containing methacrylate monomer (trade name: KF-2012, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., functional group equivalent of 4600 g / mol).
ポリマーB1~B6の調製に用いたモノマー成分の組成およびポリマーB1~B6のTg(TB)を、表1にまとめて示す。
The composition of the monomer components used in the preparation of the polymers B1 to B6 and the Tg ( TB ) of the polymers B1 to B6 are summarized in Table 1.
なお、上述した各ポリマーのMwは、GPC装置(東ソー社製、HLC-8220GPC)を用いて下記の条件で測定を行い、ポリスチレン換算により求めた。
[GPC条件]
・サンプル濃度:0.2wt%(テトラヒドロフラン(THF)溶液)
・サンプル注入量:10μL
・溶離液:THF・流速:0.6mL/min
・測定温度:40℃
・カラム:
サンプルカラム;TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H(1本)+TSKgel SuperHZM-H(2本)
リファレンスカラム;TSKgel SuperH-RC(1本)
・検出器:示差屈折計(RI) The Mw of each of the above-mentioned polymers was measured under the following conditions using a GPC device (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, HLC-8220GPC), and was determined by polystyrene conversion.
[GPC conditions]
-Sample concentration: 0.2 wt% (tetrahydrofuran (THF) solution)
-Sample injection volume: 10 μL
・ Eluent: THF ・ Flow rate: 0.6 mL / min
・ Measurement temperature: 40 ° C
·column:
Sample column; TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H (1) + TSKgel SuperHZM-H (2)
Reference column; TSKgel SuperH-RC (1)
-Detector: Differential refractometer (RI)
[GPC条件]
・サンプル濃度:0.2wt%(テトラヒドロフラン(THF)溶液)
・サンプル注入量:10μL
・溶離液:THF・流速:0.6mL/min
・測定温度:40℃
・カラム:
サンプルカラム;TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H(1本)+TSKgel SuperHZM-H(2本)
リファレンスカラム;TSKgel SuperH-RC(1本)
・検出器:示差屈折計(RI) The Mw of each of the above-mentioned polymers was measured under the following conditions using a GPC device (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, HLC-8220GPC), and was determined by polystyrene conversion.
[GPC conditions]
-Sample concentration: 0.2 wt% (tetrahydrofuran (THF) solution)
-Sample injection volume: 10 μL
・ Eluent: THF ・ Flow rate: 0.6 mL / min
・ Measurement temperature: 40 ° C
·column:
Sample column; TSKguardcolumn SuperHZ-H (1) + TSKgel SuperHZM-H (2)
Reference column; TSKgel SuperH-RC (1)
-Detector: Differential refractometer (RI)
[補強用フィルムの作製]
<実施例1>
アクリル系ポリマーA1を100部、ポリマーB1を2.0部、架橋剤としてイソシアネート化合物C1(商品名「コロネートHX」、東ソー社製)を固形分換算で0.10部添加し、全体の固形分が30%となるように酢酸エチルで希釈し、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。
片面にシリコーン処理を施した厚さ75μmのポリエステル樹脂からなる剥離ライナー(商品名「ダイアホイルMRF75」、三菱ケミカル社製)を用意し、そのシリコーン処理面に、上記で得たアクリル系粘着剤溶液を塗布し、130℃で1分間の条件で乾燥させることにより、厚さ25μmの粘着剤層を形成した。
次いで、得られた粘着剤層の表面に、厚さ50μmのポリイミド基材(商品名「ユーピレックス50S」、宇部興産社製)を貼り合わせて本例に係る補強用フィルムを得た。この補強用フィルムは、基材の片面に粘着剤層を有し、その粘着面に剥離ライナーの剥離面が当接した剥離ライナー付き粘着シートの形態を有する。
なお、本例の補強用フィルムにつき、粘着剤層中のOH量(アクリル系ポリマーA1中の水酸基のモル数)とNCO量(イソシアネート化合物のイソシアネート基のモル数)から、モル比([NCO]/[OH])を算出したところ、0.008であった。 [Making a reinforcing film]
<Example 1>
Add 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1, 2.0 parts of polymer B1, and 0.10 part of isocyanate compound C1 (trade name "Coronate HX", manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content, and add 0.10 part of the total solid content. Was diluted with ethyl acetate so as to have a concentration of 30% to obtain an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example.
A release liner (trade name "Diafoil MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a polyester resin having a thickness of 75 μm and having a silicone treatment on one side was prepared, and the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution obtained above was prepared on the silicone-treated surface. Was applied and dried at 130 ° C. for 1 minute to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a thickness of 25 μm.
Next, a polyimide base material having a thickness of 50 μm (trade name “UPIREX 50S”, manufactured by Ube Industries, Ltd.) was bonded to the surface of the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to obtain a reinforcing film according to this example. This reinforcing film has an adhesive layer on one side of a base material, and has the form of an adhesive sheet with a release liner in which the release surface of the release liner is in contact with the adhesive surface.
The molar ratio ([NCO]) of the reinforcing film of this example is based on the amount of OH (the number of moles of hydroxyl groups in the acrylic polymer A1) and the amount of NCO (the number of moles of isocyanate groups of the isocyanate compound) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. / [OH]) was calculated and found to be 0.008.
<実施例1>
アクリル系ポリマーA1を100部、ポリマーB1を2.0部、架橋剤としてイソシアネート化合物C1(商品名「コロネートHX」、東ソー社製)を固形分換算で0.10部添加し、全体の固形分が30%となるように酢酸エチルで希釈し、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。
片面にシリコーン処理を施した厚さ75μmのポリエステル樹脂からなる剥離ライナー(商品名「ダイアホイルMRF75」、三菱ケミカル社製)を用意し、そのシリコーン処理面に、上記で得たアクリル系粘着剤溶液を塗布し、130℃で1分間の条件で乾燥させることにより、厚さ25μmの粘着剤層を形成した。
次いで、得られた粘着剤層の表面に、厚さ50μmのポリイミド基材(商品名「ユーピレックス50S」、宇部興産社製)を貼り合わせて本例に係る補強用フィルムを得た。この補強用フィルムは、基材の片面に粘着剤層を有し、その粘着面に剥離ライナーの剥離面が当接した剥離ライナー付き粘着シートの形態を有する。
なお、本例の補強用フィルムにつき、粘着剤層中のOH量(アクリル系ポリマーA1中の水酸基のモル数)とNCO量(イソシアネート化合物のイソシアネート基のモル数)から、モル比([NCO]/[OH])を算出したところ、0.008であった。 [Making a reinforcing film]
<Example 1>
Add 100 parts of acrylic polymer A1, 2.0 parts of polymer B1, and 0.10 part of isocyanate compound C1 (trade name "Coronate HX", manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content, and add 0.10 part of the total solid content. Was diluted with ethyl acetate so as to have a concentration of 30% to obtain an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example.
A release liner (trade name "Diafoil MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a polyester resin having a thickness of 75 μm and having a silicone treatment on one side was prepared, and the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution obtained above was prepared on the silicone-treated surface. Was applied and dried at 130 ° C. for 1 minute to form a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer having a thickness of 25 μm.
Next, a polyimide base material having a thickness of 50 μm (trade name “UPIREX 50S”, manufactured by Ube Industries, Ltd.) was bonded to the surface of the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive layer to obtain a reinforcing film according to this example. This reinforcing film has an adhesive layer on one side of a base material, and has the form of an adhesive sheet with a release liner in which the release surface of the release liner is in contact with the adhesive surface.
The molar ratio ([NCO]) of the reinforcing film of this example is based on the amount of OH (the number of moles of hydroxyl groups in the acrylic polymer A1) and the amount of NCO (the number of moles of isocyanate groups of the isocyanate compound) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. / [OH]) was calculated and found to be 0.008.
<実施例2~3>
ポリマーB1に代えて、ポリマーB2(実施例2)、ポリマーB3(実施例3)を使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Examples 2 to 3>
The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer B2 (Example 2) and the polymer B3 (Example 3) were used instead of the polymer B1. A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
ポリマーB1に代えて、ポリマーB2(実施例2)、ポリマーB3(実施例3)を使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Examples 2 to 3>
The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer B2 (Example 2) and the polymer B3 (Example 3) were used instead of the polymer B1. A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
<実施例4~7>
イソシアネート化合物C1の使用量を、表2に示すように、アクリル系ポリマーA1 100部に対して固形分換算で0.015部(実施例4)、0.05部(実施例5)、0.20部(実施例6)、0.60部(実施例7)に変更した他は実施例1と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Examples 4 to 7>
As shown in Table 2, the amount of the isocyanate compound C1 used was 0.015 parts (Example 4), 0.05 parts (Example 5), 0. The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the parts were changed to 20 parts (Example 6) and 0.60 parts (Example 7). A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
イソシアネート化合物C1の使用量を、表2に示すように、アクリル系ポリマーA1 100部に対して固形分換算で0.015部(実施例4)、0.05部(実施例5)、0.20部(実施例6)、0.60部(実施例7)に変更した他は実施例1と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Examples 4 to 7>
As shown in Table 2, the amount of the isocyanate compound C1 used was 0.015 parts (Example 4), 0.05 parts (Example 5), 0. The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the parts were changed to 20 parts (Example 6) and 0.60 parts (Example 7). A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
<実施例8~10>
ポリマーB1の使用量を、表2に示すように、アクリル系ポリマーA1 100部に対して1.0部(実施例8)、3.0部(実施例9)、6.0部(実施例10)に変更した他は実施例1と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Examples 8 to 10>
As shown in Table 2, the amount of the polymer B1 used is 1.0 part (Example 8), 3.0 parts (Example 9), and 6.0 parts (Example) with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A1. An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that it was changed to 10). A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
ポリマーB1の使用量を、表2に示すように、アクリル系ポリマーA1 100部に対して1.0部(実施例8)、3.0部(実施例9)、6.0部(実施例10)に変更した他は実施例1と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Examples 8 to 10>
As shown in Table 2, the amount of the polymer B1 used is 1.0 part (Example 8), 3.0 parts (Example 9), and 6.0 parts (Example) with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A1. An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that it was changed to 10). A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
<実施例11>
アクリル系ポリマーA1に代えてアクリル系ポリマーA2を使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Example 11>
An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the acrylic polymer A2 was used instead of the acrylic polymer A1. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
アクリル系ポリマーA1に代えてアクリル系ポリマーA2を使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Example 11>
An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the acrylic polymer A2 was used instead of the acrylic polymer A1. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
<実施例12>
アクリル系ポリマーA1に代えてアクリル系ポリマーA3を使用し、架橋剤として、イソシアネート化合物C2(商品名「タケネートD110N」、三井化学社製)を、アクリル系ポリマーA3 100部に対して固形分換算で0.07部使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Example 12>
Acrylic polymer A3 is used instead of acrylic polymer A1, and isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Kagaku Co., Ltd.) is used as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content for 100 parts of acrylic polymer A3. An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that 0.07 part was used. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
アクリル系ポリマーA1に代えてアクリル系ポリマーA3を使用し、架橋剤として、イソシアネート化合物C2(商品名「タケネートD110N」、三井化学社製)を、アクリル系ポリマーA3 100部に対して固形分換算で0.07部使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Example 12>
Acrylic polymer A3 is used instead of acrylic polymer A1, and isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Kagaku Co., Ltd.) is used as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content for 100 parts of acrylic polymer A3. An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that 0.07 part was used. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
<実施例13>
イソシアネート化合物C2の使用量を、表2に示すように、アクリル系ポリマーA3 100部に対して固形分換算で0.09部に変更した他は実施例12と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Example 13>
As shown in Table 2, the amount of the isocyanate compound C2 used was changed to 0.09 part in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A3, and the same as in Example 12, the acrylic according to this example. A system adhesive solution was obtained. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
イソシアネート化合物C2の使用量を、表2に示すように、アクリル系ポリマーA3 100部に対して固形分換算で0.09部に変更した他は実施例12と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Example 13>
As shown in Table 2, the amount of the isocyanate compound C2 used was changed to 0.09 part in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A3, and the same as in Example 12, the acrylic according to this example. A system adhesive solution was obtained. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
<比較例1~2>
ポリマーB1に代えてポリマーB5(比較例1)、ポリマーB6(比較例2)を使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Comparative Examples 1 and 2>
The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer B5 (Comparative Example 1) and the polymer B6 (Comparative Example 2) were used instead of the polymer B1. A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
ポリマーB1に代えてポリマーB5(比較例1)、ポリマーB6(比較例2)を使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Comparative Examples 1 and 2>
The acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer B5 (Comparative Example 1) and the polymer B6 (Comparative Example 2) were used instead of the polymer B1. A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
<比較例3>
アクリル系ポリマーA1に代えてアクリル系ポリマーA4を使用し、架橋剤として、イソシアネート化合物C2(商品名「タケネートD110N」、三井化学社製)を、アクリル系ポリマーA4 100部に対して固形分換算で0.50部使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Comparative Example 3>
Acrylic polymer A4 is used instead of acrylic polymer A1, and isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Kagaku Co., Ltd.) is used as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content for 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4. An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that 0.50 part was used. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
アクリル系ポリマーA1に代えてアクリル系ポリマーA4を使用し、架橋剤として、イソシアネート化合物C2(商品名「タケネートD110N」、三井化学社製)を、アクリル系ポリマーA4 100部に対して固形分換算で0.50部使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Comparative Example 3>
Acrylic polymer A4 is used instead of acrylic polymer A1, and isocyanate compound C2 (trade name "Takenate D110N", manufactured by Mitsui Kagaku Co., Ltd.) is used as a cross-linking agent in terms of solid content for 100 parts of acrylic polymer A4. An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that 0.50 part was used. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
<比較例4~5>
イソシアネート化合物C2の使用量を、表2に示すように、アクリル系ポリマーA4 100部に対して固形分換算で1.10部(比較例4)、2.50部(比較例5)に変更した他は比較例3と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Comparative Examples 4 to 5>
As shown in Table 2, the amount of the isocyanate compound C2 used was changed to 1.10 parts (Comparative Example 4) and 2.50 parts (Comparative Example 5) in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A4. Other than that, the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 3. A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
イソシアネート化合物C2の使用量を、表2に示すように、アクリル系ポリマーA4 100部に対して固形分換算で1.10部(比較例4)、2.50部(比較例5)に変更した他は比較例3と同様にして、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。これらのアクリル系粘着剤溶液をそれぞれ使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、各例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Comparative Examples 4 to 5>
As shown in Table 2, the amount of the isocyanate compound C2 used was changed to 1.10 parts (Comparative Example 4) and 2.50 parts (Comparative Example 5) in terms of solid content with respect to 100 parts of the acrylic polymer A4. Other than that, the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to each example was obtained in the same manner as in Comparative Example 3. A reinforcing film according to each example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that each of these acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solutions was used.
<実施例14>
ポリマーB1に代えてポリマーB4を使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Example 14>
An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer B4 was used instead of the polymer B1. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
ポリマーB1に代えてポリマーB4を使用した他は実施例1と同様にして、本例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を得た。得られたアクリル系粘着剤溶液を使用した他は実施例1に係る補強用フィルムの作製と同様にして、本例に係る補強用フィルムを作製した。 <Example 14>
An acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution according to this example was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymer B4 was used instead of the polymer B1. The reinforcing film according to this example was produced in the same manner as in the production of the reinforcing film according to Example 1 except that the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive solution was used.
<評価>
[表面弾性率]
各例に係る補強用フィルムにつき、50℃で1日間エージングを行い、表面弾性率の測定を実施した。粘着面を保護する剥離ライナーを剥離し、ナノインデンター装置(Hysitron Inc.製 Triboindenter)を用いて、粘着剤層表面に、押込み深さ6μmまで圧子を押し込み、上記ナノインデンターによる測定により最大荷重(Pmax)[GPa/mm2]を得た。これを、式:
表面硬さ[GPa]=Pmax/A
に代入し、表面硬さを算出し、[kPa]単位に換算して、23℃での表面弾性率(23℃表面弾性率)として記録した。測定条件は下記のとおりである。なお、上式中、Aは圧子の接触投影面積[mm2]である。
(測定条件)
圧子アプローチ速度:5μm/s
最大変位 :6μm
押込み速度 :5μm/s
引抜き速度 :5μm/s
使用圧子 :Conical(球形圧子:曲率半径10μm)
測定方法 :単一押込み測定
測定温度 :室温(23℃) <Evaluation>
[Surface elastic modulus]
The reinforcing film according to each example was aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day, and the surface elastic modulus was measured. The release liner that protects the adhesive surface is peeled off, and an indenter is pressed into the surface of the adhesive layer to a pressing depth of 6 μm using a nanoindenter device (Triboindenter manufactured by Hysitron Inc.), and the maximum load is measured by the above nanoindenter. (Pmax) [GPa / mm 2 ] was obtained. This is the formula:
Surface hardness [GPa] = Pmax / A
The surface hardness was calculated and converted into [kPa] units, and recorded as the surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. (23 ° C. surface elastic modulus). The measurement conditions are as follows. In the above equation, A is the contact projection area [mm 2 ] of the indenter.
(Measurement condition)
Indenter approach speed: 5 μm / s
Maximum displacement: 6 μm
Pushing speed: 5 μm / s
Pulling speed: 5 μm / s
Indenter used: Conical (spherical indenter: radius ofcurvature 10 μm)
Measurement method: Single push measurement Measurement temperature: Room temperature (23 ° C)
[表面弾性率]
各例に係る補強用フィルムにつき、50℃で1日間エージングを行い、表面弾性率の測定を実施した。粘着面を保護する剥離ライナーを剥離し、ナノインデンター装置(Hysitron Inc.製 Triboindenter)を用いて、粘着剤層表面に、押込み深さ6μmまで圧子を押し込み、上記ナノインデンターによる測定により最大荷重(Pmax)[GPa/mm2]を得た。これを、式:
表面硬さ[GPa]=Pmax/A
に代入し、表面硬さを算出し、[kPa]単位に換算して、23℃での表面弾性率(23℃表面弾性率)として記録した。測定条件は下記のとおりである。なお、上式中、Aは圧子の接触投影面積[mm2]である。
(測定条件)
圧子アプローチ速度:5μm/s
最大変位 :6μm
押込み速度 :5μm/s
引抜き速度 :5μm/s
使用圧子 :Conical(球形圧子:曲率半径10μm)
測定方法 :単一押込み測定
測定温度 :室温(23℃) <Evaluation>
[Surface elastic modulus]
The reinforcing film according to each example was aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day, and the surface elastic modulus was measured. The release liner that protects the adhesive surface is peeled off, and an indenter is pressed into the surface of the adhesive layer to a pressing depth of 6 μm using a nanoindenter device (Triboindenter manufactured by Hysitron Inc.), and the maximum load is measured by the above nanoindenter. (Pmax) [GPa / mm 2 ] was obtained. This is the formula:
Surface hardness [GPa] = Pmax / A
The surface hardness was calculated and converted into [kPa] units, and recorded as the surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. (23 ° C. surface elastic modulus). The measurement conditions are as follows. In the above equation, A is the contact projection area [mm 2 ] of the indenter.
(Measurement condition)
Indenter approach speed: 5 μm / s
Maximum displacement: 6 μm
Pushing speed: 5 μm / s
Pulling speed: 5 μm / s
Indenter used: Conical (spherical indenter: radius of
Measurement method: Single push measurement Measurement temperature: Room temperature (23 ° C)
[バルク弾性率G′およびtanδ]
片面にシリコーン処理を施した厚さ75μmのポリエステル樹脂からなる剥離ライナーR1(商品名「ダイアホイルMRF75」、三菱ケミカル社製)を用意し、そのシリコーン処理面に、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を塗布し、130℃で1分間の条件で乾燥させることにより、厚さ25μmの粘着剤層を形成した。次いで、得られた粘着剤層の表面に、片面にシリコーン処理を施した厚さ75μmのポリエステル樹脂からなる剥離ライナーR2(商品名「ダイアホイルMRE75」、三菱ケミカル社製)を、そのシリコーン処理面が粘着剤層側になるようにして被覆し、50℃で1日間エージングを行った。
得られた粘着剤層のみを取り出し、積層して約1mmの厚みとし、これをφ8mmに打ち抜き、円柱状のペレットを作製して測定用サンプルとした。
上記測定サンプルをφ8mmパラレルプレートの治具に固定し、動的粘弾性測定装置(ティー・エー・インスツルメント社製「ARES」)により、以下の条件で貯蔵弾性率G′、損失弾性率G″および損失正接tanδを測定し、23℃での貯蔵弾性率G′23[kPa]、80℃での貯蔵弾性率G′80[kPa]および80℃でのtanδ(80℃での損失弾性率G″80/80℃での貯蔵弾性率G′80)を求めた。
・測定モード:せん断モード
・温度範囲 :-70℃~200℃
・昇温速度 :5℃/min
・周波数 :1Hz
なお、貯蔵弾性率G′は、材料が変形する際に弾性エネルギーとして貯蔵される部分に相当し、硬さの程度を表す指標である。損失弾性率G″は、材料が変形する際に内部摩擦等により散逸される損失エネルギー部分に相当し、粘性の程度を表す。 [Bulk modulus G'and tan δ]
A release liner R1 (trade name "Diafoil MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a 75 μm thick polyester resin with a silicone treatment on one side was prepared, and the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive according to each example was prepared on the silicone-treated surface. The solution was applied and dried at 130 ° C. for 1 minute to form a 25 μm-thick pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Next, on the surface of the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, a release liner R2 (trade name "Diafoil MRE75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a polyester resin having a thickness of 75 μm, which was treated with silicone on one side, was applied to the silicone-treated surface. Was coated so as to be on the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer side, and aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day.
Only the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was taken out and laminated to a thickness of about 1 mm, which was punched to φ8 mm to prepare a columnar pellet, which was used as a measurement sample.
The above measurement sample is fixed to a jig of a φ8 mm parallel plate, and a dynamic elastic modulus (“ARES” manufactured by TA Instruments) is used to store elastic modulus G ′ and loss elastic modulus G under the following conditions. ″ And the loss positive tan δ were measured and the storage modulus G'23 [kPa] at 23 ° C, the storage modulus G'80 [kPa] at 80 ° C and the tan δ at 80 ° C (loss modulus at 80 ° C). The storage elastic modulus G'80 ) at G " 80/80 ° C. was determined.
-Measurement mode: Shear mode-Temperature range: -70 ° C to 200 ° C
・ Temperature rise rate: 5 ° C / min
・ Frequency: 1Hz
The storage elastic modulus G'corresponds to a portion stored as elastic energy when the material is deformed, and is an index indicating the degree of hardness. The loss elastic modulus G ″ corresponds to the loss energy portion dissipated by internal friction or the like when the material is deformed, and represents the degree of viscosity.
片面にシリコーン処理を施した厚さ75μmのポリエステル樹脂からなる剥離ライナーR1(商品名「ダイアホイルMRF75」、三菱ケミカル社製)を用意し、そのシリコーン処理面に、各例に係るアクリル系粘着剤溶液を塗布し、130℃で1分間の条件で乾燥させることにより、厚さ25μmの粘着剤層を形成した。次いで、得られた粘着剤層の表面に、片面にシリコーン処理を施した厚さ75μmのポリエステル樹脂からなる剥離ライナーR2(商品名「ダイアホイルMRE75」、三菱ケミカル社製)を、そのシリコーン処理面が粘着剤層側になるようにして被覆し、50℃で1日間エージングを行った。
得られた粘着剤層のみを取り出し、積層して約1mmの厚みとし、これをφ8mmに打ち抜き、円柱状のペレットを作製して測定用サンプルとした。
上記測定サンプルをφ8mmパラレルプレートの治具に固定し、動的粘弾性測定装置(ティー・エー・インスツルメント社製「ARES」)により、以下の条件で貯蔵弾性率G′、損失弾性率G″および損失正接tanδを測定し、23℃での貯蔵弾性率G′23[kPa]、80℃での貯蔵弾性率G′80[kPa]および80℃でのtanδ(80℃での損失弾性率G″80/80℃での貯蔵弾性率G′80)を求めた。
・測定モード:せん断モード
・温度範囲 :-70℃~200℃
・昇温速度 :5℃/min
・周波数 :1Hz
なお、貯蔵弾性率G′は、材料が変形する際に弾性エネルギーとして貯蔵される部分に相当し、硬さの程度を表す指標である。損失弾性率G″は、材料が変形する際に内部摩擦等により散逸される損失エネルギー部分に相当し、粘性の程度を表す。 [Bulk modulus G'and tan δ]
A release liner R1 (trade name "Diafoil MRF75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a 75 μm thick polyester resin with a silicone treatment on one side was prepared, and the acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive according to each example was prepared on the silicone-treated surface. The solution was applied and dried at 130 ° C. for 1 minute to form a 25 μm-thick pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. Next, on the surface of the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive layer, a release liner R2 (trade name "Diafoil MRE75", manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) made of a polyester resin having a thickness of 75 μm, which was treated with silicone on one side, was applied to the silicone-treated surface. Was coated so as to be on the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer side, and aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day.
Only the obtained pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was taken out and laminated to a thickness of about 1 mm, which was punched to φ8 mm to prepare a columnar pellet, which was used as a measurement sample.
The above measurement sample is fixed to a jig of a φ8 mm parallel plate, and a dynamic elastic modulus (“ARES” manufactured by TA Instruments) is used to store elastic modulus G ′ and loss elastic modulus G under the following conditions. ″ And the loss positive tan δ were measured and the storage modulus G'23 [kPa] at 23 ° C, the storage modulus G'80 [kPa] at 80 ° C and the tan δ at 80 ° C (loss modulus at 80 ° C). The storage elastic modulus G'80 ) at G " 80/80 ° C. was determined.
-Measurement mode: Shear mode-Temperature range: -70 ° C to 200 ° C
・ Temperature rise rate: 5 ° C / min
・ Frequency: 1Hz
The storage elastic modulus G'corresponds to a portion stored as elastic energy when the material is deformed, and is an index indicating the degree of hardness. The loss elastic modulus G ″ corresponds to the loss energy portion dissipated by internal friction or the like when the material is deformed, and represents the degree of viscosity.
[初期粘着力]
各例に係る補強用フィルムにつき、50℃で1日間エージングを行い、剥離ライナーごと幅25mm×長さ140mmにカットしたものを測定サンプルとした。上記測定サンプルから剥離ライナーを剥がして粘着面を露出させ、被着体としてのステンレス鋼板(SUS304BA板)に2kgハンドローラーを1往復させて圧着した。このようにして被着体に圧着した測定サンプルを、23℃の環境温度下に30分間放置した後、引張り試験機(島津製作所社製、商品名「オートグラフAG-Xplus HS 6000mm/min高速モデル(AG-50NX plus)」)を使用して、剥離角度180度、剥離速度(引張速度)300mm/分の条件で、上記被着体から補強用フィルムを剥離した時の荷重を測定し、測定時の平均荷重を初期粘着力[gf/25mm]として記録した。 [Initial adhesive strength]
The reinforcing film according to each example was aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day, and the release liner was cut into a width of 25 mm and a length of 140 mm as a measurement sample. The release liner was peeled off from the measurement sample to expose the adhesive surface, and a 2 kg hand roller was reciprocated once on a stainless steel plate (SUS304BA plate) as an adherend and crimped. The measurement sample crimped to the adherend in this way was left at an ambient temperature of 23 ° C. for 30 minutes, and then a tensile tester (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, trade name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm / min high-speed model"). (AG-50NX plus) ”), the load when the reinforcing film is peeled from the adherend is measured and measured under the conditions of a peeling angle of 180 degrees and a peeling speed (tensile speed) of 300 mm / min. The average load at the time was recorded as the initial adhesive force [gf / 25 mm].
各例に係る補強用フィルムにつき、50℃で1日間エージングを行い、剥離ライナーごと幅25mm×長さ140mmにカットしたものを測定サンプルとした。上記測定サンプルから剥離ライナーを剥がして粘着面を露出させ、被着体としてのステンレス鋼板(SUS304BA板)に2kgハンドローラーを1往復させて圧着した。このようにして被着体に圧着した測定サンプルを、23℃の環境温度下に30分間放置した後、引張り試験機(島津製作所社製、商品名「オートグラフAG-Xplus HS 6000mm/min高速モデル(AG-50NX plus)」)を使用して、剥離角度180度、剥離速度(引張速度)300mm/分の条件で、上記被着体から補強用フィルムを剥離した時の荷重を測定し、測定時の平均荷重を初期粘着力[gf/25mm]として記録した。 [Initial adhesive strength]
The reinforcing film according to each example was aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day, and the release liner was cut into a width of 25 mm and a length of 140 mm as a measurement sample. The release liner was peeled off from the measurement sample to expose the adhesive surface, and a 2 kg hand roller was reciprocated once on a stainless steel plate (SUS304BA plate) as an adherend and crimped. The measurement sample crimped to the adherend in this way was left at an ambient temperature of 23 ° C. for 30 minutes, and then a tensile tester (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, trade name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm / min high-speed model"). (AG-50NX plus) ”), the load when the reinforcing film is peeled from the adherend is measured and measured under the conditions of a peeling angle of 180 degrees and a peeling speed (tensile speed) of 300 mm / min. The average load at the time was recorded as the initial adhesive force [gf / 25 mm].
[加熱後粘着力]
各例に係る補強用フィルムにつき、上記初期粘着力測定と同様にして、測定サンプルを用意し、被着体に圧着した。そして、上記被着体に圧着した測定サンプルを60℃の環境温度下で60分間加熱した。その後、23℃の環境温度下に30分間放置し、引張り試験機(島津製作所社製、商品名「オートグラフAG-Xplus HS 6000mm/min高速モデル(AG-50NX plus)」)を使用して、剥離角度180度、剥離速度(引張速度)300mm/分の条件で、上記被着体から補強用フィルムを剥離した時の荷重を測定し、測定時の平均荷重を加熱後粘着力[gf/25mm]として記録した。 [Adhesive strength after heating]
For the reinforcing film according to each example, a measurement sample was prepared and pressure-bonded to the adherend in the same manner as in the initial adhesive strength measurement. Then, the measurement sample pressure-bonded to the adherend was heated at an environmental temperature of 60 ° C. for 60 minutes. After that, it was left at an ambient temperature of 23 ° C. for 30 minutes, and a tensile tester (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, trade name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm / min high-speed model (AG-50NX plus)") was used. Under the conditions of a peeling angle of 180 degrees and a peeling speed (tensile speed) of 300 mm / min, the load when the reinforcing film is peeled from the adherend is measured, and the average load at the time of measurement is measured as the adhesive force after heating [gf / 25 mm. ] Recorded as.
各例に係る補強用フィルムにつき、上記初期粘着力測定と同様にして、測定サンプルを用意し、被着体に圧着した。そして、上記被着体に圧着した測定サンプルを60℃の環境温度下で60分間加熱した。その後、23℃の環境温度下に30分間放置し、引張り試験機(島津製作所社製、商品名「オートグラフAG-Xplus HS 6000mm/min高速モデル(AG-50NX plus)」)を使用して、剥離角度180度、剥離速度(引張速度)300mm/分の条件で、上記被着体から補強用フィルムを剥離した時の荷重を測定し、測定時の平均荷重を加熱後粘着力[gf/25mm]として記録した。 [Adhesive strength after heating]
For the reinforcing film according to each example, a measurement sample was prepared and pressure-bonded to the adherend in the same manner as in the initial adhesive strength measurement. Then, the measurement sample pressure-bonded to the adherend was heated at an environmental temperature of 60 ° C. for 60 minutes. After that, it was left at an ambient temperature of 23 ° C. for 30 minutes, and a tensile tester (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, trade name "Autograph AG-Xplus HS 6000 mm / min high-speed model (AG-50NX plus)") was used. Under the conditions of a peeling angle of 180 degrees and a peeling speed (tensile speed) of 300 mm / min, the load when the reinforcing film is peeled from the adherend is measured, and the average load at the time of measurement is measured as the adhesive force after heating [gf / 25 mm. ] Recorded as.
[屈曲保持試験]
各例に係る補強用フィルムにつき、50℃で1日間エージングを行った後、剥離ライナーを剥離し、露出した粘着面に、厚さ25μmのポリイミド基材(商品名「ユーピレックス25S」、宇部興産社製)を貼り合わせ、60℃で60分間加熱し、密着させた。次いで、得られた測定サンプル(積層体)を、25μm基材側を内側としてφ6mmとなるように折り曲げた状態で固定し、80℃で15時間の加熱を行った。そして、室温(23℃)に放置し、十分に冷めたことを確認してから、上記測定サンプルの折り曲げ状態の固定を解除し、固定解除から10分以内に、分度器を用いて、折り曲げられた上記測定サンプルの屈曲角度[°]を測定し、屈曲回復性を評価した。なお、屈曲角度は、測定サンプルの開き角度(折り曲げられた状態から測定サンプルが開く側の角度)であり、180°に近いほど優れた屈曲回復性を有し、屈曲角度が0°に近いほど屈曲回復性は劣る。
続けて、屈曲保持力の評価として、測定サンプルの屈曲部における「剥がれ」の有無を目視で確認し、「剥がれ」が認められなかった場合を「〇」と評価し、「剥がれ」が認められた場合を「×」と評価した。 [Bending retention test]
The reinforcing film according to each example was aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day, then the release liner was peeled off, and a 25 μm-thick polyimide substrate (trade name “UPIREX 25S”, Ube Industries, Ltd.) was applied to the exposed adhesive surface. Was bonded and heated at 60 ° C. for 60 minutes to bring them into close contact. Next, the obtained measurement sample (laminated body) was fixed in a bent state so as to have a diameter of 6 mm with the 25 μm substrate side as the inside, and heated at 80 ° C. for 15 hours. Then, after leaving it at room temperature (23 ° C.) and confirming that it had cooled sufficiently, the measurement sample was unfixed in the bent state, and was bent using a protractor within 10 minutes after the unfixing. The bending angle [°] of the above measurement sample was measured to evaluate the bending recovery. The bending angle is the opening angle of the measurement sample (the angle on the side where the measurement sample opens from the bent state). The closer it is to 180 °, the better the bending recovery property, and the closer the bending angle is to 0 °. Flexibility is inferior.
Subsequently, as an evaluation of the bending holding force, the presence or absence of "peeling" at the bent portion of the measurement sample was visually confirmed, and when "peeling" was not observed, it was evaluated as "○", and "peeling" was observed. Was evaluated as "x".
各例に係る補強用フィルムにつき、50℃で1日間エージングを行った後、剥離ライナーを剥離し、露出した粘着面に、厚さ25μmのポリイミド基材(商品名「ユーピレックス25S」、宇部興産社製)を貼り合わせ、60℃で60分間加熱し、密着させた。次いで、得られた測定サンプル(積層体)を、25μm基材側を内側としてφ6mmとなるように折り曲げた状態で固定し、80℃で15時間の加熱を行った。そして、室温(23℃)に放置し、十分に冷めたことを確認してから、上記測定サンプルの折り曲げ状態の固定を解除し、固定解除から10分以内に、分度器を用いて、折り曲げられた上記測定サンプルの屈曲角度[°]を測定し、屈曲回復性を評価した。なお、屈曲角度は、測定サンプルの開き角度(折り曲げられた状態から測定サンプルが開く側の角度)であり、180°に近いほど優れた屈曲回復性を有し、屈曲角度が0°に近いほど屈曲回復性は劣る。
続けて、屈曲保持力の評価として、測定サンプルの屈曲部における「剥がれ」の有無を目視で確認し、「剥がれ」が認められなかった場合を「〇」と評価し、「剥がれ」が認められた場合を「×」と評価した。 [Bending retention test]
The reinforcing film according to each example was aged at 50 ° C. for 1 day, then the release liner was peeled off, and a 25 μm-thick polyimide substrate (trade name “UPIREX 25S”, Ube Industries, Ltd.) was applied to the exposed adhesive surface. Was bonded and heated at 60 ° C. for 60 minutes to bring them into close contact. Next, the obtained measurement sample (laminated body) was fixed in a bent state so as to have a diameter of 6 mm with the 25 μm substrate side as the inside, and heated at 80 ° C. for 15 hours. Then, after leaving it at room temperature (23 ° C.) and confirming that it had cooled sufficiently, the measurement sample was unfixed in the bent state, and was bent using a protractor within 10 minutes after the unfixing. The bending angle [°] of the above measurement sample was measured to evaluate the bending recovery. The bending angle is the opening angle of the measurement sample (the angle on the side where the measurement sample opens from the bent state). The closer it is to 180 °, the better the bending recovery property, and the closer the bending angle is to 0 °. Flexibility is inferior.
Subsequently, as an evaluation of the bending holding force, the presence or absence of "peeling" at the bent portion of the measurement sample was visually confirmed, and when "peeling" was not observed, it was evaluated as "○", and "peeling" was observed. Was evaluated as "x".
実施例1~13、比較例1~5に係る補強用フィルムに対する評価結果を表2に示す。表2には、各例に係る粘着剤層の組成の概略もあわせて示す。
Table 2 shows the evaluation results for the reinforcing films according to Examples 1 to 13 and Comparative Examples 1 to 5. Table 2 also shows an outline of the composition of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer according to each example.
また、実施例14に係る補強用フィルムに関する屈曲回復性および回復保持力の評価結果を、実施例14の概略(粘着剤層の組成、特性)とともに表3に示す。
Further, the evaluation results of the bending recovery property and the recovery holding power of the reinforcing film according to Example 14 are shown in Table 3 together with the outline of Example 14 (composition and characteristics of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer).
表2に示されるように、実施例1~13に係る粘着剤は、ポリマー(A)とポリマー(B)とを含むものであり、上記ポリマー(B)のTgが-20℃~5℃の範囲内であった。これらの例に係る補強用フィルムは、ポリマー(B)のTgが-20℃~5℃の範囲外であった比較例1~2と比べて、低い初期粘着力と加熱後粘着力上昇とをよりよく両立するものであった。また、実施例1~13に係る補強用フィルムは、粘着剤層の23℃表面弾性率が1~20kPaの範囲内であり、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力が良好であった。一方、上記23℃表面弾性率が1~20kPaの範囲外であった比較例3~5では、屈曲保持試験において剥がれが認められた。
As shown in Table 2, the pressure-sensitive adhesives according to Examples 1 to 13 contain a polymer (A) and a polymer (B), and the Tg of the polymer (B) is −20 ° C. to 5 ° C. It was within range. The reinforcing films according to these examples have lower initial adhesive strength and increased adhesive strength after heating as compared with Comparative Examples 1 and 2 in which the Tg of the polymer (B) was outside the range of −20 ° C. to 5 ° C. It was a better match. Further, in the reinforcing films according to Examples 1 to 13, the elastic modulus at 23 ° C. of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was in the range of 1 to 20 kPa, and the bending recovery property and the bending holding force were good. On the other hand, in Comparative Examples 3 to 5 in which the surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. was outside the range of 1 to 20 kPa, peeling was observed in the bending retention test.
より具体的には、実施例1~3の対比から、ポリマー(B)のTgが-20℃~5℃の範囲で高いほど、加熱後粘着力上昇を実現しつつ、初期粘着力が低くなり、初期の軽剥離性が改善される傾向であった。一方、ポリマー(B)のTgが-20℃未満であった比較例1では、初期粘着力が高く、軽剥離性に劣っていた。また、ポリマー(B)のTgが5℃超であった比較例2では、加熱後の粘着力上昇量が小さかった。また、実施例4~7の対比から、粘着剤層の23℃表面弾性率が1~20kPaの範囲で高いほど、屈曲回復性は改善する傾向が認められ、初期粘着力および加熱後粘着力は低くなる傾向であった。実施例5~7は、実施例4よりも屈曲回復性に優れており、23℃表面弾性率は2kPa以上であり、80℃でのtanδ80が0.10~0.60の範囲内であった。また、実施例7では、表面弾性率、バルク弾性率ともに高い値となり、加熱後粘着力上昇が実施例4~6と比べて相対的に低い結果となった。また、実施例4~6において、粘着剤層の23℃バルク弾性率G′23の差は認められなかった。また、実施例1~3,5における80℃バルク弾性率G′80は同等であった。実施例1~7に関して、23℃表面弾性率は、バルク弾性率よりも屈曲回復性と高い相関関係であったといえる。なお、実施例1~7において、初期粘着力、加熱後粘着力、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力がよりバランスよく改善された実施例1~3、5~6の粘着剤層におけるイソシアネート基と水酸基とのモル比([NCO]/[OH])は0.002~0.03の範囲内であった。
More specifically, from the comparison of Examples 1 to 3, the higher the Tg of the polymer (B) in the range of −20 ° C. to 5 ° C., the lower the initial adhesive strength while realizing the increase in the adhesive strength after heating. , The initial light peelability tended to be improved. On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1 in which the Tg of the polymer (B) was less than −20 ° C., the initial adhesive strength was high and the light peelability was inferior. Further, in Comparative Example 2 in which the Tg of the polymer (B) was more than 5 ° C., the amount of increase in the adhesive strength after heating was small. Further, from the comparison of Examples 4 to 7, it was found that the higher the elastic modulus at 23 ° C. of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was in the range of 1 to 20 kPa, the more the bending recovery tended to be improved, and the initial adhesive strength and the adhesive strength after heating were found to be higher. It tended to be lower. Examples 5 to 7 are superior in bending recovery to Example 4, have a surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. of 2 kPa or more, and have a tan δ 80 at 80 ° C. in the range of 0.10 to 0.60. rice field. Further, in Example 7, both the surface elastic modulus and the bulk elastic modulus were high, and the increase in adhesive strength after heating was relatively low as compared with Examples 4 to 6. Further, in Examples 4 to 6, no difference in the bulk elastic modulus G'23 at 23 ° C. of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer was observed. Moreover, the 80 ° C. bulk elastic modulus G'80 in Examples 1 to 3 and 5 was the same. It can be said that the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus had a higher correlation with the bending recovery property than the bulk elastic modulus with respect to Examples 1 to 7. In addition, in Examples 1 to 7, the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer of Examples 1 to 3, 5 to 6 in which the initial adhesive force, the adhesive force after heating, the bending recovery property and the bending holding force were improved in a more balanced manner. The molar ratio with and ([NCO] / [OH]) was in the range of 0.002 to 0.03.
また、実施例8~10の対比から、ポリマー(B)の使用量が増加するほど、粘着力が低下する傾向が確認された。ポリマー(B)の使用量が、ポリマー(A)100部に対して0.5~5部の範囲内であった実施例8~9では、初期粘着力が400gf/25mm未満、かつ加熱後粘着力が500gf/25mm以上であり、貼り付け初期の軽剥離性と加熱後粘着力上昇をよりよく両立した。また、ポリマー(B)の使用量が多くなると、23℃表面弾性率が高くなり、屈曲回復性が低下する傾向であった。また、実施例11~13の結果から、粘着剤のポリマー(A)の種類や架橋剤種を変更しても、所望の効果が達成されることが確認された。
Further, from the comparison of Examples 8 to 10, it was confirmed that the adhesive strength tends to decrease as the amount of the polymer (B) used increases. In Examples 8 to 9, where the amount of the polymer (B) used was in the range of 0.5 to 5 parts with respect to 100 parts of the polymer (A), the initial adhesive strength was less than 400 gf / 25 mm and the adhesive after heating was adhered. The force was 500 gf / 25 mm or more, and the light peelability at the initial stage of pasting and the increase in adhesive force after heating were better compatible. Further, as the amount of the polymer (B) used increased, the surface elastic modulus at 23 ° C. tended to increase, and the bending recovery property tended to decrease. Further, from the results of Examples 11 to 13, it was confirmed that the desired effect was achieved even if the type of the pressure-sensitive adhesive polymer (A) and the type of the cross-linking agent were changed.
また、表3に示されるように、粘着剤層の23℃表面弾性率が1~20kPaの範囲内であり、Tgが-1.6℃であるポリマー(B)を使用した実施例14においても、屈曲回復性および屈曲保持力が両立されることが確認された。表中には特に示さないが、実施例14に係る補強用フィルムは、初期粘着力が400gf/25mm未満(具体的には200gf/25mm未満)であり、加熱後粘着力の上昇量(粘着力上昇比N60/N23)が7(倍)であり、ここに開示される技術の効果を実現するものであった。
Further, as shown in Table 3, also in Example 14 using the polymer (B) in which the 23 ° C. surface elastic modulus of the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is in the range of 1 to 20 kPa and the Tg is −1.6 ° C. It was confirmed that both bending recovery and bending holding force were compatible. Although not particularly shown in the table, the reinforcing film according to Example 14 has an initial adhesive force of less than 400 gf / 25 mm (specifically, less than 200 gf / 25 mm), and an amount of increase in the adhesive force after heating (adhesive force). The increase ratio N 60 / N 23 ) was 7 (fold), which realized the effect of the technique disclosed here.
以上、本発明の具体例を詳細に説明したが、これらは例示にすぎず、請求の範囲を限定するものではない。請求の範囲に記載の技術には、以上に例示した具体例を様々に変形、変更したものが含まれる。
Although specific examples of the present invention have been described in detail above, these are merely examples and do not limit the scope of claims. The techniques described in the claims include various modifications and modifications of the specific examples exemplified above.
1,2,3 補強用フィルム
10 支持基材
10A 第一面
10B 第二面
21 粘着剤層(第一粘着剤層)
21A 粘着面(第一粘着面)
21B 粘着面(第二粘着面)
22 粘着剤層(第二粘着剤層)
22A 粘着面(第二粘着面)
31,32 剥離ライナー
100,200,300 剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルム 1, 2, 3 Reinforcingfilm 10 Supporting base material 10A 1st surface 10B 2nd surface 21 Adhesive layer (1st adhesive layer)
21A Adhesive surface (first adhesive surface)
21B adhesive surface (second adhesive surface)
22 Adhesive layer (second adhesive layer)
22A Adhesive surface (second adhesive surface)
31,32 Release liner 100, 200, 300 Reinforcing film with release liner
10 支持基材
10A 第一面
10B 第二面
21 粘着剤層(第一粘着剤層)
21A 粘着面(第一粘着面)
21B 粘着面(第二粘着面)
22 粘着剤層(第二粘着剤層)
22A 粘着面(第二粘着面)
31,32 剥離ライナー
100,200,300 剥離ライナー付き補強用フィルム 1, 2, 3 Reinforcing
21A Adhesive surface (first adhesive surface)
21B adhesive surface (second adhesive surface)
22 Adhesive layer (second adhesive layer)
22A Adhesive surface (second adhesive surface)
31,32
Claims (7)
- 粘着剤層を備える補強用フィルムであって、
前記粘着剤層は、ポリマー(A)と、ポリマー(B)とを含み、
前記ポリマー(B)は、ポリオルガノシロキサン骨格を有するモノマー単位と、(メタ)アクリル系モノマー単位と、を含み、
前記粘着剤層は、23℃での表面弾性率が1~20kPaであり、
前記ポリマー(B)のガラス転移温度TBが-20℃~5℃である、補強用フィルム。 A reinforcing film with an adhesive layer,
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer contains a polymer (A) and a polymer (B).
The polymer (B) contains a monomer unit having a polyorganosiloxane skeleton and a (meth) acrylic monomer unit.
The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a surface elastic modulus of 1 to 20 kPa at 23 ° C.
A reinforcing film having a glass transition temperature TB of the polymer ( B ) of −20 ° C. to 5 ° C. - 前記粘着剤層は、23℃でのバルク弾性率G′23が10~200kPaであり、80℃でのバルク弾性率G′80が5~100kPaであり、かつ80℃でのtanδ80が0.10~0.60である、請求項1に記載の補強用フィルム。 The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer has a bulk elastic modulus G'23 at 23 ° C. of 10 to 200 kPa, a bulk elastic modulus G'80 at 80 ° C. of 5 to 100 kPa, and a tan δ 80 at 80 ° C. of 0. The reinforcing film according to claim 1, which is 10 to 0.60.
- 前記ポリマー(A)はアクリル系ポリマーである、請求項1または2に記載の補強用フィルム。 The reinforcing film according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the polymer (A) is an acrylic polymer.
- 前記粘着剤層中の前記ポリマー(B)の含有量は、前記ポリマー(A)100重量部に対して0.5~5重量部である、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の補強用フィルム。 The content of the polymer (B) in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.5 to 5 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the polymer (A), according to any one of claims 1 to 3. Reinforcing film.
- 前記粘着剤層に含まれるイソシアネート基と水酸基とのモル比([NCO]/[OH])は0.002~0.03である、請求項1~4のいずれか一項に記載の補強用フィルム。 The reinforcing material according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the molar ratio ([NCO] / [OH]) of the isocyanate group and the hydroxyl group contained in the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is 0.002 to 0.03. the film.
- 請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の補強用フィルムが貼着された光学部材。 An optical member to which the reinforcing film according to any one of claims 1 to 5 is attached.
- 請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の補強用フィルムが貼着された電子部材。
An electronic member to which the reinforcing film according to any one of claims 1 to 5 is attached.
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
KR1020237007621A KR20230047163A (en) | 2020-08-06 | 2021-07-27 | Reinforcing film, optical member and electronic member |
CN202180057328.5A CN116034027A (en) | 2020-08-06 | 2021-07-27 | Reinforcing film, optical member, and electronic member |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2020134188A JP2022030292A (en) | 2020-08-06 | 2020-08-06 | Reinforcing film, optical member and electronic member |
JP2020-134188 | 2020-08-06 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2022030305A1 true WO2022030305A1 (en) | 2022-02-10 |
Family
ID=80117369
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2021/027752 WO2022030305A1 (en) | 2020-08-06 | 2021-07-27 | Film for reinforcement, optical member and electronic member |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP2022030292A (en) |
KR (1) | KR20230047163A (en) |
CN (1) | CN116034027A (en) |
TW (1) | TW202212126A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2022030305A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2024114547A1 (en) * | 2022-12-02 | 2024-06-06 | 华为技术有限公司 | Film assembly, display screen and electronic device |
Citations (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2008045027A (en) * | 2006-08-16 | 2008-02-28 | Nitto Denko Corp | Double sided adhesive tape or sheet and liquid crystal display apparatus |
JP2014224227A (en) * | 2013-04-15 | 2014-12-04 | 日東電工株式会社 | Adhesive composition, adhesive layer and adhesive sheet |
WO2016021332A1 (en) * | 2014-08-08 | 2016-02-11 | 日東電工株式会社 | Building member with pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet for building member |
WO2018034149A1 (en) * | 2016-08-15 | 2018-02-22 | 日東電工株式会社 | Adhesive layer for flexible image display devices, laminate for flexible image display devices, and flexible image display device |
WO2018092904A1 (en) * | 2016-11-21 | 2018-05-24 | 日東電工株式会社 | Adhesive sheet |
JP2019094476A (en) * | 2017-11-20 | 2019-06-20 | 日東電工株式会社 | Reinforcement film |
JP2019119199A (en) * | 2017-12-28 | 2019-07-22 | 日東電工株式会社 | Manufacturing method of laminate |
JP2020095206A (en) * | 2018-12-14 | 2020-06-18 | 日東電工株式会社 | Polarization film with adhesive layer |
Family Cites Families (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS57163482A (en) | 1981-03-31 | 1982-10-07 | Snow Brand Milk Prod Co Ltd | Novel yeast having specific saccharide utilization |
JPS5878594A (en) | 1981-11-06 | 1983-05-12 | Sankyo Co Ltd | Preparation of antibiotic substance b-41d, e, and g |
JP6373458B2 (en) | 2013-04-15 | 2018-08-15 | 日東電工株式会社 | Adhesive composition, adhesive layer, and adhesive sheet |
KR101813764B1 (en) | 2014-11-28 | 2017-12-29 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Adhesive composition for optical film, adhesive layer, optical member and image display device |
JP6737585B2 (en) | 2015-11-27 | 2020-08-12 | 三星エスディアイ株式会社SAMSUNG SDI Co., LTD. | Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet and image display device |
JP6755089B2 (en) | 2015-11-27 | 2020-09-16 | 三星エスディアイ株式会社SAMSUNG SDI Co., LTD. | Adhesive composition, adhesive layer, adhesive sheet, and image display device |
JP6376271B1 (en) | 2017-12-08 | 2018-08-22 | 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 | Manufacturing method of laminate for flexible device |
-
2020
- 2020-08-06 JP JP2020134188A patent/JP2022030292A/en active Pending
-
2021
- 2021-07-27 KR KR1020237007621A patent/KR20230047163A/en active Search and Examination
- 2021-07-27 CN CN202180057328.5A patent/CN116034027A/en active Pending
- 2021-07-27 WO PCT/JP2021/027752 patent/WO2022030305A1/en active Application Filing
- 2021-08-04 TW TW110128734A patent/TW202212126A/en unknown
Patent Citations (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2008045027A (en) * | 2006-08-16 | 2008-02-28 | Nitto Denko Corp | Double sided adhesive tape or sheet and liquid crystal display apparatus |
JP2014224227A (en) * | 2013-04-15 | 2014-12-04 | 日東電工株式会社 | Adhesive composition, adhesive layer and adhesive sheet |
WO2016021332A1 (en) * | 2014-08-08 | 2016-02-11 | 日東電工株式会社 | Building member with pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet, and pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet for building member |
WO2018034149A1 (en) * | 2016-08-15 | 2018-02-22 | 日東電工株式会社 | Adhesive layer for flexible image display devices, laminate for flexible image display devices, and flexible image display device |
WO2018092904A1 (en) * | 2016-11-21 | 2018-05-24 | 日東電工株式会社 | Adhesive sheet |
JP2019094476A (en) * | 2017-11-20 | 2019-06-20 | 日東電工株式会社 | Reinforcement film |
JP2019119199A (en) * | 2017-12-28 | 2019-07-22 | 日東電工株式会社 | Manufacturing method of laminate |
JP2020095206A (en) * | 2018-12-14 | 2020-06-18 | 日東電工株式会社 | Polarization film with adhesive layer |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2024114547A1 (en) * | 2022-12-02 | 2024-06-06 | 华为技术有限公司 | Film assembly, display screen and electronic device |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP2022030292A (en) | 2022-02-18 |
CN116034027A (en) | 2023-04-28 |
KR20230047163A (en) | 2023-04-06 |
TW202212126A (en) | 2022-04-01 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6371931B1 (en) | Adhesive sheet | |
JP7005431B2 (en) | Adhesive sheet | |
JP7171473B2 (en) | reinforcing film | |
CN110003802B (en) | Adhesive sheet | |
TWI843788B (en) | Adhesive Sheet | |
WO2022030305A1 (en) | Film for reinforcement, optical member and electronic member | |
WO2022030307A1 (en) | Reinforcing film, optical member, and electronic member | |
JP7262484B2 (en) | Adhesive sheet | |
JP2021042276A (en) | Pressure sensitive adhesive sheet | |
WO2022030306A1 (en) | Film for reinforcement, optical member and electronic member | |
WO2022030304A1 (en) | Reinforcement film, optical component, and electronic component | |
WO2024203752A1 (en) | Reinforcing film, optical member, and electronic member | |
JP7319766B2 (en) | Adhesive sheet |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 21854052 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20237007621 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 21854052 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |